Home

6800-A2-GN22-30

1. 839A Dial Backup System Controller DCX Multiplexer gogg CC GIGI CCC Basic Feature Workstations 839A Dial Backup System Controller DCX Multiplexer Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation im 4am2y0mLt q S System Printer q System Printer Full Feature Moder Workstations Control Channels m Network 1 16 Printer Print Server ROUTER Maximum of 24 Full Feature Workstations HUB Monitor Keyboard Maximum of Mouse 15 Network Printers Full Feature Workstation Maximum of 18 Basic Feature ALTOS Workstations SYSTEM 5000 UIP RALLEL SERIAL SERIAL rene HUB es F Network Monitor a Printer Keyboard erer o Mouse Full Feature Workstations ALTOS SYSTEM S 5000 G UIP A PARALLEL SERIAL SERIAL 494 14444 02 Figure 1 2 High Capacity 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports and Two UIPs 1 4 January 1997 6800 A2 G
2. J1 SPARES 491 11704a Figure 2 29 NAU Memory Jumper Locations and Settings 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 55 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 11 The Customer Test main menu appears Use the J key to highlight Disk Utilities PRESS Enter The Disk Utility Menu appears A table is displayed indicating the physical characteristics of the disk The disk utility program is automatically run measuring the characteristics of the disk drive As each option is measured it turns from blue to yellow Use the J key to highlight Low Level Format PRESS Enter The Low Level Format option may be hidden If it is shown use the J key to highlight it and PRESS Enter If it is not shown PRESS Ctrl Alt f to redraw the menu with the Low Level Format option and then use the J key to select it The Low Level Format screen appears and displays the following message 13 14 WARNING DESTRUCTIVE HARD DISK Tests specified Data will be DESTROYED on HARD DISK 1 Press lt Alt F5 gt to continue Press ESC to abort To prepare the hard disk for full feature workstation use PRESS Alt F5 NOTE The cylinder fields should be incrementing at one cylinder per second The entire format operation should take about 20 minutes When the formatting is complete PRESS Esc to return
3. Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation AT amp T Mail Basic Feature Workstations vo xXmMrc em mon aAamzy9mraMm o QZ D ZMAOJ ALTOS SYSTEM 5000 Host PARALLEL SERIAL ANALYSIS NMS Alert Transport Printer Requests I Cut through Port Modem Control Channels 1 8 Second Card Channels 9 16 optional g 839A Dial Backup System Controller DCX Multiplexer Basic Feature Workstations 839A Dial Backup System Controller DCX Multiplexer Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation amzZomMmIrIaAmMm o QZ D ZMXOHA Co System Printer Full Feature Workstations System Printer Print Server Monitor Keyboard Mouse ALTOS SYSTEM 5000 UIP PARALLEL S
4. 0 00 0 cee ee eee 6 2 Starting the NMS Application Program 0005 6 2 Shutting Down the NMS Application Program 6 5 Shutting Down UNIX on the Host 000 00 0008 6 7 Starting UNIX on the UIP 0 ee eee 6 8 Starting the UIP Application Program 00 00 0000 6 8 Shutting Down the UIP Application Program 6 9 Shutting Down UNIX on the UIP 0 0000 000000 6 10 7 Performing Migration OVERVIEW 5 pant aise ect Sia acetate sce tate act eta 7 1 Introduction To Migrating Databases 0 0 e ee eee 7 2 Release Database Migration 0 0 0 0 000 ee 7 3 Release 2 Database Migration 0 000 e eee eee 7 16 Release 3 0 3 1 Database Migration 00 0 7 25 Release 4 0 4 1 Database Migration 00 0 7 33 ii January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Table of Contents 8 Running Diagnostics OVELVICW his 3 Gi iter tee an oe ane ok ata oar nae a 8 1 SDX Diagnostic Program 0 2 ee eee 8 2 StarLAN 10 NAU Diagnostic Program 0 0005 8 4 IPC 900 Diagnostic Program for Altos 5000 Systems Only 8 5 IPC 1600 Diagnostic Program 0 cece eee eee 8 9 Emulex DCP 286i Diagnostic Program for Altos 5000 Systems Only 0 0 00 02 02200 8 12 Emulex DCP MUXi Diagnostic Program 00 0 8 13 Append
5. 035 0153 0031 cable 002 0039 0031 connector Two DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous Full duplex Flow control ON Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 bps 002 0050 0031 connector 035 0152 0031 cable To establish the connection perform the following steps at the processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or the UIP 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to one of the local DCE devices 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 37 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Perform the following steps at the remote end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to one of the user ports on the System Controller or ACCULINK Network Manager 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to the 002 0050 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0050 0031 connector to the DCE device See Appendix A Modem Settings for more information on optioning 3810 3811 3820 or 2224CEO modems for this application Connecting a Local Dial Backup Control Unit To connect a local 839A DBU you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an
6. 4 Follow the instructions under Installing Circuit Cards in the System 15000 to install the DCP MUXi cards in Slots 4 and 5 of the System 15000 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 41 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installing Circuit Cards in the System 15000 The System 15000 contains eight EISA expansion slots Figure 2 22 shows the position of all the expansion slots within the System 15000 processor chassis Each card should be installed in a specific slot Table 2 5 gives the proper slot assignment for each card Slot Cover Q Screw IPC 1600 First DOP MUXi Second DCP MUXi ECA Card Video Card 494 14502 01 Figure 2 22 System 15000 Expansion Slots To insert the circuit cards into a slot perform the following steps 1 Locate the EISA slots inside the System 15000 see Figure 2 22 2 Take the first circuit card you intend to install and locate the proper slot for that card see Table 2 5 3 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the slot cover screw and the slot cover for the slot in which you intend to install the card Save the screw for later Save the slot cover in case the card is removed in the future 2 42 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Slide the circuit card in the guides so that its connector
7. 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 51 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System To terminate the installation and leave the previous version intact enter n instead Create a password for the support login The system prompts you for password information The default password is help85 This is the standard password that should be used Installing the support login 1 Pick your own password 2 Pronounceable password will be generated for you To pick your own password TYPE 1 PRESS Enter A message describing acceptable passwords appears followed by the prompt for the new password Use the password help85 TYPE help85 PRESS Enter TYPE help85 PRESS Enter Create a password for the admin login You can choose your own password for the login or let the installation program generate one for you The system default is osffw1 PRESS Enter A message describing acceptable passwords appears followed by the prompt for the new password At the prompt if you choose to enter your own password TYPE the password you want PRESS Enter TYPE the same password again PRESS Enter Create a password for the ffw login You can choose your own password for the login or let the installation program generate one for you The system default is no password PRESS Enter A message describing acceptable passwords appears followed by the prompt for the new password To choose the default press Enter when prompte
8. NOTE Consult with Network Administrator to verify correct subnet mask Enter a subnet mask 255 0 0 0 PRESS Enter The system prompts Would you like to specify your gateway entries now y n q n PRESS Enter Would you like to add a name server y n n PRESS Enter If a HOSTS file does not exist please specify the path where it will reside Default C VXONEVHOSTS PRESS Enter 5 66 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 23 24 25 26 27 28 The system prompts Please verify settings Transport Interface Connector T O Address IP Address Subnet mask Hosts file path Are these settings correct y n q y PRESS Enter If the settings are not correct TYPE n PRESS Enter The system returns to Step 21 If the settings are OK PRESS Enter The system responds Settings saved in file C VXONEVtcp cfg Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system prompts Xsetup will need to copy the network driver tcpnet exe from the XONE diskette to the C XONE directory Insert the disk labeled Install in drive A Press Enter to continue of q to Quit PRESS Enter The system prompts XSetup will need to copy some additional files to go with your network files Press any key to continue PRESS Enter Searching archive for files Please wait Press any key to continue PRESS Enter
9. 035 0153 0031 cable PTEE ee gt 6 6821 F1 501 VT100 Emulation Connects 3 lt gt 7 6821 F1 524 035 0153 0031 cable 4 lt gt 8 5 lt gt 9 1 lt gt 10 Part 25 pin female Sub D to ANALYSIS Local connection 25 pin 10 pin 002 0053 0031 10 pin keyed modular of ANALYSIS 5600 to 6800 Goss oS hss gt 10 position female jack Connects Port 1 of ANALYSIS 29 ________ gt 2 ACU MODEM 5600 to an 035 0153 0031 gd a is Se sa adapter cable Jeaan gt 4 Feature Tesis SS gt 5 6821 F1 010 C gt 6 6821 F1 504 Saari gt 7 besos Se gt 8 4 lt gt 9 1 lt gt 10 Part 9 pin female Sub D to Connects basic feature 10 pin 9 pin 002 0054 0031 10 pin keyed modular workstations or printers to the ee SS gt 6 Feature jack COM ports of the Altos Oe ony gt 9 6800 B1 100 System 5000 ye Sha tec s1 6800 F1 020 J ean gt 4 6800 B1 150 ada gt 5 6800 F 1 150 622355205 2 7 lt gt 3 8 lt gt 8 9 lt gt 7 Part 25 pin to 25 pin SLIDE AUI EXTENDER for host and _ pin to pin 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 B 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Table B 1 6 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Part Number Feature Number Description Usage Pin Diagram Part 25 pin male Sub D to Remote connection of DPII 25 pin 10 pin 035 0105 0031 10 pin female control APL DDD modem or DSU to is
10. Altos 15000 Altos 5000 494 14582 Figure 4 7 Altos 15000 Basic Local Area Network Configuration 4 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components The Ethernet circuit card must be activated in the host processor to support the two UIPs Running the EISA Configuration Utility as indicated in Chapter 2 activates the card To complete the network installation you need the following equipment e A network hub unit see Figure 4 4 e Three modular cables part number 035 0116 5031 e Three AUI adapters NOTE ALL devices on the network must have link integrity enabled If any part of the network is reusing StarLAN equipment those StarLAN devices must have link integrity switches and you must set link integrity to enabled Any older StarLAN network equipment which does not have the link integrity option switch must be replaced Once you have this equipment assembled perform the following steps 1 Connect the network hub unit power cord to a non switched outlet 2 Connect the AUI adapters to the Ethernet cards on the host processor and the two UIPs 3 Connect one end of an 035 0116 5031 cable to each AUI adapter 4 Connect the other end of each 035 0116 5031 cable to a port on the network hub unit NOTE To ensure that the TCP IP network operates efficiently always use the shortest cord possible to connect each device to the network hub unit Connecting Additional Full Feature W
11. Select option TYPE 2 PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 55 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System The system displays the current chains including the following 2 altos_tcp gt en0 Select a chain to remove TYPE 2 PRESS Enter The system prompts for confirmation Remove altos_tcp gt en0 y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The chain is removed the existing chains are redisplayed followed by the menu of available options You need to reestablish the chain that was just removed TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system displays the top level chain descriptions and prompt Select top level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE 1 for altos_tcp PRESS Enter The system prompts Select next level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE 5 or appropriate number for en0 PRESS Enter The system prompts for confirmation Add chain altos_tcp gt en0 y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The system displays status messages and then requests Please enter the following information in order to configure en0 Enter the internet address of this interface TYPE internet address in the form nnn nnn nnn nnn Where nnn is an integer from 1 to 255 PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the netmask for this interface default 255 255 0 0 5 56 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software NOTE Consult your System Administrator to determine whether to specify a net mask a
12. To reformat create a bootable disk by using the format s command Then copy the format command found on the MS DOS Operating System disk onto the bootable disk Boot the system from the bootable disk and execute the format command on the hard disk Once the hard disk has been reformatted remove the rebootable disk and locate the three MS DOS Version 5 0 disks labeled Setup Disk 1 and Disk 2 NOTE If upgrading a full feature workstation you can use MS DOS 3 30a Reformat the disk and load MS DOS with the command insl dos Use the following procedures to install MS DOS 1 Insert the disk labeled 1 of 3 into Drive A and turn on the power to the computer 5 60 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The Welcome screen appears PRESS Enter The screen displays the default settings for Date Time Country Keyboard and Install to Hard Disk Change the defaults if necessary PRESS Enter The screen displays two setup options Install to C DOS and Run Shell on start up Yes Change the second option so that the shell will not run at start up Follow the instructions displayed on the screen PRESS Enter Anew screen displays a graph indicating the percentage of information transferred from the floppy disk to the hard disk When prompted remove Disk and insert Disk 2 PRESS Enter When prompted remove Disk 2 and insert Disk 3 PRESS Enter When prom
13. Turn on your system Insert your working copy of the disk labeled 6800 FFW Application Volume into Drive A At the C gt prompt TYPE cdC XONE PRESS Enter TYPE a install PRESS Enter The current directory should be AXONE If current directory is not XONE Please break out of the installation by typing Ctrl C Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system displays many messages including the following significant ones Loading fonts Loading configuration script Loading packet driver For further information on installation and startup Please refer to the C XONE README file Installation Completed 5 76 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software NOTE For the 15000 platform the division of full feature workstations among the three processors should be Host Uip 1 Ujip 2 7 3 14 Configurations with lower numbers of full feature workstations should retain equivalent ratios among the processors for best performance If the workstation is connected to the NMS host processor and while still in the XONE directory TYPE copy HOST CFG XONE CFG PRESS Enter If the workstation is connected to an NMS UIP and while still in the XONE directory TYPE copy UIP CFG XONE CFG PRESS Enter TYPE edit XONE CFG PRESS Enter The DOS editor displays the XONE CFG file You should look for the line which starts with CONN_COMMAND and c
14. 1 Add Pseudo tty 2 Remove Pseudo tty Select an option of enter q to quit q TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system prompts How many pseudo ttys you want to be created or enter return to use 67 PRESS Enter The system displays the currently configured chains again followed by the Available options menu TYPE q PRESS Enter The system prompts to relink the kernel Do you want to relink the kernel now TYPE n PRESS Enter The system now begins the branding of INFORMIX and displays the following message INFORMIX BRANDING PROCEDURE This process brands the Informix ONLINE 4 1 package and the 4GL Run time package Please have ready the 11 character serial number and the 6 character serial number key for this installation The serial number and serial number key can be found on the OnLine Serial Number card shipped with the 6800 NMS Application software Strike ENTER when ready PRESS Enter 5 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 22 The system displays the following prompt Enter the 11 character serial number for example RDS 9999999 exactly as it appears on the media TYPE the INFORMIX serial number key PRESS Enter 23 The system displays the following message Enter the 6 character serial number key exactly as it appears on the registration form TYPE the INFORMIX serial number key PRESS Enter 24 The system displays the following prompt asking for verificat
15. AREA CODE CHANGE Please note that the area code for Paradyne Corporation in Largo Florida has changed from 813 to 727 For any Paradyne telephone number that appears in this manual with an 813 area code dial 727 instead COMSPHERE 6800 SERIES NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE Document No 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 NOTE This document supports Release 4 2 or greater of 6800 Series NMS COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide 6800 A2 GN22 30 4th Edition January 1997 Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales and Service Information Contact your sales or service representative directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation or training use one of the following methods e Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com e Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 813 530 2340 Trademarks All products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered
16. TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system prompts Would you like to use the graphics board configuration detected by Xsetup y n y PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 63 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Select graphics mode 640x480 displayed in 816x640 virtual space 16 colors 640x480 16 colors 640x480 displayed in 640x816 virtual space 16 colors 640x480 displayed in 1088x480 virtual space 16 colors 800x600 16 colors 640x480 256 colors 800x600 256 colors SAAN BRWNe Enter Selection or q to Quit 15 TYPE 7 PRESS Enter Select Monitor Size 11 inch 14 inch 15 inch 16 inch 17 inch 19 inch 21 inch other PANNE ey Enter selection of q to Quit 1 TYPE appropriate number PRESS Enter The system then prompts Please verify settings Mouse settings Graphics Info Graphics board settings Monitor settings Are these settings correct y n q y If these settings are not correct TYPE n PRESS Enter The system starts again at Step 10 Ifthe settings are correct PRESS Enter 5 64 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 20 21 The system responds Settings saved the file C VXONEVhardware cfg Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system prompts Xsetup will need to copy the graphics driver vga256 dvr from the X One diskette t
17. Table 3 1 DL3600 MENU1 Settings Setting Correct Value lt EMULATE gt DPL24C lt FONT gt COUR 10 lt QUALITY gt LETTER lt PITCH gt 10 CPI lt LINE SP gt 6 LPI lt CHAR W gt NORMAL lt CHAR H gt NORMAL lt ATTRIB gt NONE lt PAGE LG gt 11 0 IN lt COLOR gt AUTOSEL lt LFT END gt 1 COLM lt TOP MRG gt 1 LINE lt LANGUGE gt USA lt CHR SET gt SET 2 lt PRF SKP gt NO SKIP lt WIDTH gt 13 6 IN lt ZEROFNT gt NO SLSH lt DC3 CDE gt ENABLE lt CR CODE gt CR ONLY lt LF CODE gt LF amp CR lt RGHTEND gt WRAP Select option amp return to lt lt FUNCTION gt gt menu 492 414082 3 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers Upon pressing the FF button the first MENU1 setting will print along with its optional values The default value will have a short line printed beneath the left hand portion of the value Press the MODE button to move the red cursor under the various values to be selected Press the FF button to select the value to be used for that particular setting The printer will underline that value and print the next setting and its values When lt END gt is printed you are ready to exit from changing the MENU1 settings Press the ONLINE button at this time to exit and return to the Function Menu When you have checked or changed all the MENU 1 settings select the HARDWRE function from the Function Menu by pressing the MODE button
18. command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for details on all commands Following completion of the Create Network Map crnm command bring up the network map window and inspect the network map visually NOTE Circuit names and device addresses are not displayed on the Release 4 2 network map Device names and site names are displayed Execute the Display Device Profile dsdp command to verify profiles for 3 devices Verify the accuracy of the information Execute the Display Site Profile dssp command to examine profiles for 3 sites Verify the accuracy of the information Execute the Display Facility Profile dsfp command to examine facility profiles associated with three devices If ACCULINK Network Manager ANM is installed execute the List Facility Profile Isfp command selecting T1 for the facility type and m2 for Device s if multiplexers are attached to the NMS Compare the screen results with a hard copy output from the List Node Connectivity snc command on the source system If ANM is installed execute the Hardware Module Summary hms command on three multiplexer devices Execute the Device Health Status dhs command on available device types e g three DATAPHONE II devices three COMSPHERE devices and three ANALYSIS devices Run Alert History reports to list Historical Alerts using the Detailed Alert Repor
19. 002 0039 0031 Connector 002 0021 0031 Connector 493 13909 01 Figure 4 17 Connections for Two Local ACCULINK Multiplexers 4 30 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components One Local ACCULINK Multiplexer and One 719 NETWORKER If only one 74x multiplexer is present at the local site a 719 NETWORKER can be used to multiplex the alert and cut through information over a single supervisory data link SDL The alert and cut through connections enter the 719 NETWORKER via channel ports The SDL exits the 719 NETWORKER through a link and connects to one of the 74x NAPs The second NAP is devoted to the command port Each multiplexer port on the 74x and 719 NETWORKER must be software configured Figure 4 18 shows the connections for one local ACCULINK multiplexer and one 719 NETWORKER Host 719 NETWORKER Processor 035 0153 0031 CLI LChannel External Systems 74 Port 035 0153 0031 835 3564 0011 Command Port 035 0153 0031 IPC 1600 Card ACCULINK MUX CL 002 0039 0031 Connector E 002 0021 0031 Connector eee Figure 4 18 Connections for One Local ACCULINK Multiplexer and One 719 NETWORKER 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 31 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System One Local ACCULINK Multiplexer For users with small networks a single local 74x multiplexer may be sufficient The event and command ports are directly connected to the two NAPs Multiplexer menu a
20. Add the IP address and NMS host processor name to the etc hosts file in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn host name Where nnn is a number from to 255 inclusive and host name is the name of the NMS host processor 5 54 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 4 Add the IP addresses and names of all workstations that the UIP will be directly communicating with in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn ffw name Where nnn is a number from 1 to 255 inclusive and ffw name is the name of the full feature workstation processor NOTE For the 15000 platform the division of full feature workstations among the three processors should be Host Uip 1 Ujip 2 7 3 14 Configurations with lower numbers of full feature workstations should retain equivalent ratios among the processors for best performance 5 While still logged in as root TYPE vi HOMF rhosts PRESS Enter Add the names of all workstations connected to the UIP one name to a line Save these changes and exit vi NOTE If a full feature workstation is to communicate with the NMS host do not put that workstation s IP address and processor name in the UIP s etc hosts file To change the IP address of a UIP already configured at the factory TYPE netconfig PRESS Enter The system displays the following menu Available options 1 Add a chain 2 Remove a chain 3 Reconfigure an element in a chain q Quit
21. Data Communications Equipment 000 0000 4 22 External Systems 32 42 50 c he a ae oS mb as 4 35 Netwiew PC i aE cts othe a R sala area De sn ee mse Sal aes 4 43 Automatic Trouble Report Feature 0 000 0 4 45 Accumaster Integrator 0 ee eee ee eee 4 46 Analysis Network Management System 00 4 50 StarKeeper Network Management System 4 54 Byte UMS aee Soci t Bare Fhe We Ries Runes Gop atgne sin E e areas 4 56 5 Loading and Restoring Software OVEDVIEW ite tlic habe cacti eae T eA eee eS 5 2 Network Preinstallation Preparation 0 00 5 4 Inserting the Software Media 0 000 000 000ee 5 6 UNIX Software for the Host Processor 0 0 e ee ener 5 6 Installing the MPX Software on the Altos 15000 5 19 Release 4 2 NMS Software 0 0 cece cee eee eee 5 21 Unix Software for the UIP 0 0 0 cee cee ene 5 41 WIP SoftWare 2 52565 cee ole ook BRA ot na ne hayes base oie ate 5 50 Full Feature Workstation Software 0 cece eee ee eee 5 59 Basic Feature Workstation Software 0 cece ee eee eee 5 86 Installing the Analysis Gateway Option 5000 Systems Only 5 90 Setting Data Rafes cesc coct irona Sa secre bee been e at 5 100 6 System Start Up and Shutdown OVERVIEW Sins piiri ak Se A sab eh ae oot od ha te ea a ed a8 6 1 Starting UNIX on the Host
22. Enter The welcome message appears followed by the FFW Login window see Figure 6 2 Shutting Down the UIP Application Program To shut down the UIP application program perform the following steps 1 The Network Management System Menu displays To begin shutdown select Stop the system TYPE 2 PRESS Enter The following message displays There are UIP processes running The processes will be shut down please wait The UIP facility has been removed 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 6 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 3 The system will prompt you to continue Press RETURN to continue PRESS Enter 4 The Network Management System Menu displays At this point the UIP application program has been stopped but the UNIX operating system continues to run Shutting Down UNIX on the UIP Once the UIP application program has been shut down you can shut down UNIX and power down the entire system To do so perform the following steps The Network Management System Menu displays Select Shutdown UNIX TYPE 3 PRESS Enter The following message displays UNIX will now be shutdown y n To proceed with the shutdown TYPE y PRESS Enter The system displays the following message You may turn the power off once UNIX has been shutdown Do not shut off the power until the message shown in Step 4 displays indicating that it is safe to power off The system displays
23. Enter TYPE rlpconf PRESS Enter and go to Step 3 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 2 The following message appears Installing Remote Line Printing Creating directories usr Ipd remote and usr spool and file etc printcap Saving Ip cancel and Ipstat commands to usr Ipd remote Installing remote Ip cancel and Ipstat commands to usr bin 3 The system then prompts Do you want to change the remote printer description file etc printcap y n TYPE y PRESS Enter 4 The system displays the following Remote Printing Configuration Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting remote print jobs Please enter the printer name q to quit TYPE remote printer name PRESS Enter 5 The system prompts Is remote_printer a remote printer or a local printer 1 1 TYPE r PRESS Enter 6 The system prompts Please enter the name of the remote host that remote_printer is attached to TYPE remote printer server name PRESS Enter 7 The system prompts for confirmation Printer remote_printer is attached to host remote_host Is this correct y n TYPE y if the configuration is correct PRESS Enter 3 22 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers The system then prompts Would you like this to be the system default printer y n TYPE n PRESS Enter The following messages appear Make sure that your host
24. Enter The system prompts Enter the netmask for this interface default 255 255 0 0 NOTE Consult your System Administrator to determine whether to specify a net mask a broadcast address or DOMAIN name different from the default Choose the default when using the basic network configuration as described in the Network Pre nstallation Preparation section PRESS Enter The system prompts Does the interface use a broadcast address of all 1 s y n default y PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the broadcast address for this interface default nnn nnn 255 255 NOTE The displayed default shows the first two levels of the IP address you have just entered The default above for broadcast address assumes the use of the basic network configuration parameters PRESS Enter The system asks for verification of the previously entered values Internet Address Netmask Broadcast Address 20 Ifthe values are not correct respond n The system again requests entry from the Internet Address If the values are correct TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 21 Enter DOMAIN name for node name or enter return to use net COM Where node name is the name of the system on which you are installing PRESS Enter The system prompts 32 Pseudo ttys are currently configured do you want to
25. F3 Daisy Chain Soori ne nan We ecg eae dae Week alae RE ka eee Bl wie atone 4 23 4 14 Local Control Channel Connections 0 0 0 eee eee eee 4 24 4 15 Remote Control Channel Connections 0 00 e eee eee eee ee 4 26 4 16 Connections for 719 NETWORKER to Host Processor 00 4 29 4 17 Connections for Two Local ACCULINK Multiplexers 0 0 0 0 4 30 4 18 Connections for One Local ACCULINK Multiplexer and One 719 NET WORKER on 5 00 cee ob ee Ss Cae Se eee ee 4 31 4 19 Connections for One Local ACCULINK Multiplexer 0 0 4 32 4 20 External Systems Connections 0 0 coe 4 36 4 21 Netview PC Connection i Saa a E E E cece ene ae 4 43 4 22 ATR Connechoniet sascha tet ake Ses Oe eh ad ea E ad re has 4 45 4 23 ACCUMASTER Integrator Local Connection via UAI and File Export 4 46 4 24 ACCUMASTER Integrator Remote Connection 0000005 4 48 4 25 ANALYSIS 6510 5605 AND 5600 Local Connection 4 51 4 26 ANALYSIS 6510 5605 and 5600 Remote Connection 4 52 4 27 StarKeeper Connection sesers se hosed ceded pease EE eda ee eee le 4 54 4 28 Bytex UMS Connection ss cscs ck be ek ee bea eee ee eee ees 4 56 5 1 Cartridge Tape Drive i205 0 6 beige lead a haa a Seek A Dee nase le ies 5 6 5 2 System 5000 Boot Menu Installing UNIX on Host Computer 5 7 5 3 Installation Procedure Menu In
26. Starting the UIP Application Program Once UNIX has been started you can start the UIP application program To do so perform the following steps 1 At the login prompt TYPE uip PRESS Enter 2 In response the password prompt displays TYPE the UIP password the default UIP password is startmenu PRESS Enter The Network Management System Menu displays Figure 6 5 Network Management System Select Start the system Stop the system Shutdown UNIX Install PTF Return to Console login Enter number 1 2 3 4 5 494 13959 01 Figure 6 5 Network Management System Menu 6 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 System Start Up and Shutdown 3 To select Start the system TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The following message displays The UIP start facility has been successfully added to the system The UIP will be started automatically please wait Although the UIP is active it only becomes functional if the NMS host is active If the host is not active the UIP will wait until the NMS host becomes active The following message displays Press RETURN to continue PRESS Enter The Network Management System Menu displays At this point the UIP is active and functional if the NMS host is active up and running TYPE 5 PRESS Enter to select Return to Console Login At the login prompt TYPE ffw PRESS Enter The system prompts for password TYPE the full feature workstation password PRESS
27. The NMS provides the following two forms of network management support for ACCULINK multiplexer products e Alert management e Command support The alert management feature permits the NMS to report alarms and events from the multiplexers The command feature allows the NMS to send tests and commands to the multiplexer and display the results on the host processor Configuration Options This section explains how to connect the ACCULINK multiplexers and the 719 NETWORKER to the host processor Three serial ports are required for multiplexer communication e Event Port All multiplexer network events and alarms are directed to this port When the events and alarms enter the host processor they are selectively filtered for display as alerts e External Systems Port This port permits access to the internal menus of individual multiplexers via the 6800 Series NMS s external cut through feature This provides the user with a transparent interface to the menus and allows the same user interaction that is available when a terminal is directly connected to the network administration port NAP of a multiplexer e Command Port The 6800 Series NMS commands are transmitted from the host processor to the multiplexer network and the network results are received by the 6800 Series NMS via this port The ports can be connected either to a NAP on an ACCULINK 74x multiplexer or a channel port on a 719 NETWORKER The port connection require
28. an Altos SX 20 or an AT amp T 6386 SX EL To connect an Altos 486DX 33 an Altos SX 20 or an AT amp T 6386 SX EL at a remote location you will need two DCE devices with the following characteristics e Asynchronous e Full duplex e Flow control ON e Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 or 9600 bps To establish the connection perform the following steps at the processor end 1 At the host processor or UIP end connect the grounded end of a 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card If connecting to a COM port use the 002 0054 0031 connector 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE device 4 At the remote end connect one end of the 035 0149 2531 cable to the remote DCE device 5 Connect the other end of the 035 0149 2531 cable to the workstation 25 pin serial connector on the basic feature workstation Connecting a Remote AT amp T 6286 or 6386 To connect an AT amp T 6286 or 6386 at a remote location you will need two DCE devices with the following characteristics e Asynchronous e Full duplex e Flow control ON e Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 or 9600 bps 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 17 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System To establish the connection perform the following steps at the processor end 1 Printers At the host processor or UIP end connect the grounded end of a 035
29. either lower or uppercase Field values that differ only in the case may create unintentional redundancies As a result a field or an entire record may be discarded Such impacts can be corrected following migration by editing or creating Release 4 2 profiles However eliminating potential problems beforehand will minimize effort and contribute to a smoother transition to Release 4 2 The following fields require specific attention Device Address e This field is required in Release 4 2 for all migrated device profiles e All letters are converted to lowercase e All other characters except numbers periods hyphens and slashes are deleted e Only one profile will be accepted for a given address Later occurrences of the same address will cause the profile to be discarded although a warning message will be displayed Device Name e This field is required in Release 4 2 and must be unique e All letters are converted to lowercase e All other characters except numbers periods and hyphens are converted to hyphens and any successive hyphens are converted to a single hyphen e If no device name exists a name containing the device type and a unique number is generated automatically e If the same device name appears in more than one record the first record is migrated without changes and a unique device name is generated for successive records of the same name although a warning message is displayed 7 4 January 19
30. have been installed prior to shipment leaving very little installation to be performed at the customer s location e This chapter opens with a description of the internal components and circuit cards It then e Describes the various upgrade packages that the customer can choose to install in both processors e Explains how to configure the strap settings on the circuit cards that are part of each upgrade package e Provides step by step instructions for opening the processors locating the expansion slots installing the circuit cards and closing the processors e Provides detailed information for converting processors from previous NMS releases to run with Release 4 2 e Explains how to run the EISA Configuration Utility which matches the processor s resources with the requirements of the circuit cards that were just installed Hardware conversion information includes retrofitting Release 1 2 and or 3 x host processors as full feature workstations and converting 6386 basic feature workstations to full feature workstations After the database information has been transferred the original 6800 Series R1 R2 or R3 x NMS hardware system can be disassembled and the individual components used as part of a Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS For example any basic feature workstation in Release 2 6800 Series NMS can be disconnected from the original system and reconnected to the Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS System printers can be similarly
31. hms command on three multiplexer devices Execute the Device Health Status dhs command on available device types e g three DATAPHONE II devices three COMSPHERE devices and three ANALYSIS devices Run Alert History reports to list Historical Alerts using the Detailed Alert Report dar and Alert Report Summary ars commands If user group permissions have been customized use the SQL Customization Package to examine the command_view table Correct any incomplete migration of data and account for the new capabilities of Release 4 2 specifically that all Network Control commands can now have customized user group levels Likewise if alert text or alert group names have been customized redo the customization after the migration is completed When the migration is completed execute the Edit Alert Monitoring State edams command to turn on polling NMS will then automatically acquire the current feature packages Versions for the multiplexer networks if ANM is installed 7 40 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration 12 The Edit Profile commands Edit Site Profile edsp Edit Device Profile eddp Edit Facility Profile edfp and the Identity id command provide mechanisms for changing or correcting the migrated data When migration completes successfully the messages sent to the console can be reviewed to take note of any warning messages as follows cd usr tmp pg initdb log pg restorelog Upon comp
32. service marks of their respective owners ED Printed on recycled paper COPYRIGHT 1997 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes A January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Safety Instructions Important Safety Instructions 1 Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual This product is intended to be used with a three wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding t
33. y n TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you want the kernel environment rebuilt y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The following messages appear to complete this process The kernel has been successfully rebuilt and installed To activate it reboot your system TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE shutdown g0 y i6 PRESS Enter The command will shutdown and reboot the system Installing Token Ring Software on the UIP To install this package on a UIP please refer to the earlier section Installing Token Ring Software on the NMS Host UIP Configuring the Token Ring Network on the UIP To configure the network on a UIP with the Token Ring package please refer to the earlier section Configuring the Token Ring Network on the 5000 Host UIP 5 58 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Full Feature Workstation Software A full feature workstation is a desktop computer running the full feature workstation application software and connected to either the 6800 Series NMS host computer or UIP by means of a local area network This workstation may be the Altos 486DX 33 the Altos SX 20 which was running under a previous release of NMS a Sun workstation running the UNIX Operating System or a generic X terminal The Altos 386 SX20 requires a total of 4 megabytes of memory The 486DX 33 has 4 megabytes of memory installed at the factory but requires the insertion of the following line in the CONFIG SYS file DEVICE C VDO
34. 002 0039 031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE device To establish the ACCUMASTER cut through connection perform the following steps at the host processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured for remote terminal 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE device Perform the following steps to connect the three remote DCE devices to the ACCUMASTER Integrator 1 Connect one end of the 835 5783 0011 cable to the appropriate port of the ACCUMASTER Integrator 2 Connect the 835 5783 0011 cable to the remote DCE device 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 49 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Analysis Network Management System This section explains how to connect the Paradyne ANALYSIS Network Management System to the host processor This feature is only supported on the Altos 5000 platform An IPC 900 card installed in the host processor provides the cut through access to the ANALYSIS NMS This is a dedicated IPC 900 card that is installed solely for ANALYSIS purposes It has eight user configurable ports Port is used to connect to the first ANALYSIS NMS This port will handle alerts cut throughs printer assignments and upload of device information The other seven ports on the IPC card are available for connection to
35. 01 Be 002 0052 0031 Connector Figure 4 11 Basic Feature Workstation Configurations The following sections explain how to make the connections shown in Figure 4 11 Connecting a Local Altos 486DX 33 an Altos SX 20 or an AT amp T 6386 SX EL To connect an Altos 486DX 33 an Altos SX 20 or an AT amp T 6386 SX EL as a local basic feature workstation perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to one of the following ports on either the host processor or the UIP COM1 COM2 port use the 002 0054 0031 connector IPC 1600 connect directly to port 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0047 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0047 0031 connector to the 9 pin serial connector on the basic feature workstation 4 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Connecting a Local AT amp T 6286 or 6386 To connect an AT amp T 6286 or 6386 as a local basic feature workstation perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to one of the following ports on either the host processor or the UIP COM1 COM2 port use the 002 0054 0031 connector IPC 1600 connect directly to port 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0052 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0052 0031 connector to the 25 pin serial connector on the basic feature workstation Connecting a Remote Altos 486DX 33
36. 0153 0031 cable and the 002 0040 0031 or 002 0052 0031 connector connect the terminal or printer to a port on the IPC 900 b To output the first ASCII data pattern TYPE COPY TEST PAT SIOx Where SIOXx can be SIO1 through SIOS representing Ports 1 through 8 PRESS Enter c To output the second ASCII data pattern TYPE COPY LONGTEST PAT SIOx Where SIOx can be SIO1 through SIOS representing Ports 1 through 8 PRESS Enter d The tests will take 3 4 minutes to run When they are finished you will be returned to the MS DOS operating system 11 The second test is a port to port data transfer validation test The diagnostic program sends a data pattern out of one port to a second port on the same IPC 900 the two ports must have the same configuration The received pattern is then compared with the original pattern to identify errors To run this test you need a 002 0040 0031 or 002 0052 0031 connector a 002 0039 0031 or 002 0053 0031 connector and two 035 0153 0031 cables Once you have this equipment perform the following steps a Connect one end of one of the 035 0153 0031 cables to the transmitting port SIOx on the IPC 900 and connect the other end of the cable to the 002 0039 0031 or 002 0053 0031 connector as shown in Figure 8 4 b Connect one end of the second 035 0153 0031 cable to the receiving port SIOy on the IPC 900 and connect the other end of the cable to the 002 0040 0031 or 002 0052 0031 connector c
37. 035 0116 9931 200 8 Power up the workstation and follow the steps for installing MS DOS and the NMS full feature workstation software in Chapter 5 Loading and Restoring Software 2 58 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Overview Preparing the Printers Overview Sun sa waa EE EEE canter Mee Usa oobi s eet ete baled 3 1 Fujitsu DES 600 aia auch 2 etd BA asd a A A a a a ara ke Sstia heen Daa 3 2 Fujitsu DL3400 E a cence 3 5 Fujitsu DEGO ie a r r E ae PGS Pee aa 3 8 Fujitsu DX2300 2 0 a EE A E a nA E A E 3 12 CITOH C 240 9 uee E a de gst ute haves E S EE aks 3 17 Network Printers i neva nou he steel ees A E EE Senge 3 19 Configuring Network Printers 0 0 0 0 eee cece eee 3 19 Remote Printing with the UNIX SCO S5R4 Print Spooler 3 19 Remote Printing with the BSD UNIX Print Spooler 3 21 There are four types of printers that can be used with the COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS These printers and the functions they serve are briefly summarized below Fujitsu DL5600 The Fujitsu DL5600 is intended to serve as the NMS system printer The function of the system printer is to print out copies of reports command results and screen information It has both serial and parallel interfaces Fujitsu DL3400 The Fujitsu DL3400 can be used instead of the DL5600 as the system printer It has a parallel interface Fujitsu DL3600 The Fujitsu DL3600 replaces the DL3400 and can be used in place of the DL5
38. 1 appears 7 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition 2 Initialize NMS Database 3 Include Migration Data 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices cont To Continue quit To abort If you wish to modify the NMS parameters Enter number 1 2 3 4 cont or quit 492 13960 Figure 7 1 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters Menu Release 1 Database Migration 3 The INFORMIX OnLine partition has not been initialized since NMS installation TYPE 1 PRESS Enter to select Initialize ONLINE Partition The following message appears Do you wish to initialize the ONLINE partition y n n 4 To initialize the partition TYPE y PRESS Enter A warning will appear To proceed PRESS Enter 5 All user created NMS databases must be initialized in preparation for migration TYPE 2 PRESS Enter to select Initialize NMS Database The following message appears Do you wish to initialize the NMS database y n n 6 To initialize the NMS database TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears WARNING Initializing the NMS database will replace it with default values Hit lt Enter gt to continue or lt q gt to quit 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 10 11 To continue with the migration process PRESS Enter If there is a database from Release 1 to be converted to Relea
39. 2 PRESS Enter The system reboots MS DOS 5 0 is installed and running 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 87 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installing Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows provides a window based interface for the NMW software You cannot run the NMW software unless Windows is first installed A copy of Windows Version 3 0 is provided with the NMW The following steps explain how to install Microsoft Windows on the hard disk of a basic feature workstation Be sure you have installed MS DOS before attempting to install Windows 1 Turn the computer s power on 2 At the C gt prompt TYPE a PRESS Enter to make Drive A the active drive 3 Insert Disk 1 in Drive A and TYPE setup PRESS Enter to run the setup program 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to install windows Do not change the computer or mouse type Use the default hardware configuration selected by the installation program Installing NMW Software The NMW software package is the application program that enables your Altos or AT amp T workstation to operate as a basic feature workstation The following steps explain how to install NMW Be sure you have installed MS DOS and Windows software before you attempt to install NMW NOTE Installing the NMW software requires a knowledge of certain basic MS DOS concepts such as path and AUTOEXEC BAT file If you are not familiar with these concepts read the re
40. 5000 is based on the Extended Industry Standard Architecture EISA bus and features an Intel 180486 central processing unit operating at a clock speed of 33 Mhz The following sections describe the hardware and circuit cards that are installed in the System 5000 when it is shipped to the customer The System 5000 that is shipped to the customer has been configured specifically to serve as a host processor NOTE Install the single ended termination connector packaged with the System 5000 into the connector labeled Expansion A on the back of the processor 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Circuit Cards Table 2 1 indicates the location of the standard and optional circuit cards that can be installed in the host processor Table 2 1 Altos 5000 Factory and Field Installable Circuit Cards Memory ae ion Slot Card Address IRQ I O Address Descriptio 1 Base I O 1000 101F Controls the hard disk s floppy disk and cartridge tape drives Integral 10 1CD0 1CD2 Optional Supports connection to User Ethernet Interface Processor Full Feature Workstation Incompatible with Token Ring card 2 IPC 900 D2000 D3FFF 5 2B0 2BF Optional Supports ANALYSIS cut through Host only Video Controller AQO0OO C7FFF 46E8 3BO0O 8DF Provides VGA level graphics Emulex DCP DC000 DFFFF 33C 33F P
41. 9 shows the position of all the expansion cards within the System 5000 host processor Each card should be installed in a specific slot Table 2 1 gives the proper slot assignments for each card for the host processor To insert the circuit cards into a slot perform the following steps 1 Locate the eight EISA slots inside the System 5000 see Figure 2 9 2 Take the first circuit card you intend to install and locate the proper slot for that card see Table 2 1 3 Remove the slot cover screw and the slot cover for the slot in which you intend to install the card Save the screw for later in this procedure Save the slot cover in case the circuit card is removed in the future 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Bracket Holding Screw S S a Base I O Boards in VGA Controller Dep Muxi lt r r IPC 1600 Memory Controller Memory Card 491 13843 Figure 2 9 System 5000 Expansion Slots 4 Each EISA slot has a connector with two rows of pins Slide the circuit card in the guides so that its connector fits into the EISA connector down to the second row of pins 5 Push once to engage the first row of pins and then again to engage the second row 6 Repeat this procedure for each circuit card you intend to install 7 When you have installed all circuit cards secure each card s me
42. A Site hrer na bed ae eae See ee aa ea 1 5 Contents DIST 23 e aE nica cw Sek ee We a OTR es 1 6 2 Preparing the Processors OVEDVIEW 5 its ee tiie ain ie eae aie re 2 2 Altos System 5000 Host 0 0 0 eee eee eee 2 3 Optional Host Upgrade Packages 00 00000 2 8 Optional Host Upgrade Procedures 0 0000 2 14 Altos System 5000 UIP 0 ee eee eee 2 21 Altos System 15000 seee cs es hte ee ee aS 2 30 EISA Configuration Utility 0 0 eee eee eee 2 46 Full Feature Workstation 0 0 cee cece eee eee 2 51 3 Preparing the Printers OVEIVIEW Sadi nick ele a a a es 3 1 Fujitsu DL5600 2 1 cc cnet teens 3 2 Fujitsu DL3400 2 0 cect eens 3 5 Fujitsu DL3600 2 0 ec ence eens 3 8 Fujitsu DX2300 ssaa ned ba ose ee nee ee ere es 3 12 GCITOH C240 iunccte wits eae ak tas cede ee tue tales 3 17 Network Printers sisaan Aidt cae esta Rae ta SAA aaa es 3 19 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 4 Connecting the Components OVERVIEW a a trie that he ae a es as oo sala ao aan 4 2 System Console nra Vide ee ebony wehbe theese 4 3 Altos 5000 Full Feature Workstation Configuration 4 4 Altos 15000 Full Feature Workstation Configuration 4 10 Basic Feature Workstation 0 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 4 14 Printers seco acc es sete se he PRN ered n Be Beats be Meas Wa AE ENER el ties 4 18
43. Configurations Altos 15000 Host Altos 5000 Host with Ethernet Altos 5000 UIP with Ethernet Altos 5000 Host with Token Rink Altos 5000 UIP with Token Ring 2 UIP 1 UIP optional 1 UIP optional Ethernet Network Ethernet Network Ethernet Network Token Ring Network Token Ring Network 16 Control Channel package 16 Control Channel package optional 16 Control Channel package optional ANALYSIS NMS Package optional ANALYSIS NMS package optional 1 3270 Emulation package optional 3270 Emulation package optional Serial Port Upgrade package optional Serial Port Upgrade package optional SNMP Trap Export package optional SNMP Trap Export package optional SNMP Trap Export package optional Database Customization packages optional Database Customization packages optional Database Customization packages optional Workstations 24 full feature 18 basic feature Workstations with UIP 6 full feature 11 basic feature without UIP 2 full feature 3 basic feature Workstations with UIP 6 full feature 11 basic feature without UIP 2 full feature 3 basic feature AutoBackup package AutoBackup package optional AutoBackup package optional NOTES Packages and features not marked as optional are required Altos 5000 UIP is used with both the Altos 5000 and Altos
44. For the Altos 15000 no further action is needed to reboot During reboot you should see messages referring to the driver for the IPC 1600 For more detailed information refer to the AT amp T Intelligent Ports Card Model 1600 IPC 1600 User s Guide To execute the diagnostic tests TYPE ipcl6dia PRESS Enter The IPC Diagnostics screen appears You have to enter the correct I O address memory address and interrupt request IRQ in the appropriate fields on the IPC 1600 Diagnostic screen For a valid IRQ and I O address refer to Table 2 1 for 5000 host and Table 2 5 for 15000 host Use the memory address A0000 Once you have selected the I O address memory address and IRQ the names of the six tests are displayed on the screen Toruna test enter the number of the test As you can see this screen keeps a record of the number of times each test was executed the number of times each test passed and the number of times each test failed For additional details about the tests refer to the AT amp T Intelligent Ports Card Model 1600 IPC 1600 User s Guide When you have finished running all appropriate diagnostics PRESS Esc to terminate the program 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 8 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 14 Power down the processor and remove the IPC 1600 card Reset the memory address from A0000 to its original setting as shown in Figure 2 14 for an Altos 5000 or Tab
45. Identity id command in which the update device profile option is selected An Identity id command can be executed globally e g to update all devices on one or more control channels However a global command affecting a large number of devices may take hours to complete If only a few of the affected devices are 3600 Series DSUs manually updating these profiles via the Edit Device Profile eddp command may be quicker 7 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration 3 Changes to site profiles are frequently needed because site data is extracted from device profiles fields which may be inaccurate or incomplete The results may be the following e Multiple site names and profiles for a single site Corrective Action use the Edit Device Profile eddp command to use a single site name for all devices at a given location Then delete the site profile using the Delete Site Profile disp command for all other site names no longer used at that location e Sites positioned at the unnamed site due to an invalid site contact phone number Corrective Action using the network map examine the object list at the unnamed site These sites can be repositioned using the Edit Site Profile edsp command to provide correct city code and country code data or latitude longitude data When all site profiles have been updated run the Create Network Map crnm command Then bring up a new network map The sites will appear repo
46. J4 Pins 5 and 3 to Pins 3 and 1 Change the settings on jumper DEF to select 128K window size Move the jumper from the E and F pins to the D and E pins No other jumper changes are required but you should confirm that the jumpers on the board match those in Figure 2 6 Follow the instructions under Optional Host Upgrade Procedures to install the DCP 286i card in Slot 7 and to connect the octopus cable assembly When you have installed all cards in the processor you must run the ECU to configure the System 5000 s resources to match all circuit cards in the system For instructions on how to run the ECU refer to the section EISA Configuration Utility Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 3270 Terminal Emulation Option Manual for instructions for loading the software 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 1614 1210 8 6 4 2 Input Output Starting Address Switch SW1 al hala NadO aaa Sick Red Switch Push Switch to Indicated siz lt lt Position if 9 1 ABC DEFGHJ KLM n SW1 vwx 161319 7 5 3 1 CHANGE on 15 EE 1110 Interrupt Request IRQ Level Jumper Set To ood 0 JS oo0 0 15 12 11 10 3 4 5 2 CHANGE CHANGE 493 13920a Figure 2 6 Emulex DCP 286i Switch and Jumper Locations 2 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Preinstallation Steps fo
47. January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers 5 The serial interface card contains a single DIP switch Figure 3 8 shows the location of the card in the printer and indicates the DIP switch settings for 9600 baud Serial Interface Card Switch 1234567 8 Push Switch to the BQQRUAAL Indicated Position Ij OFF Serial Interface Card 491 11701 01 Figure 3 8 DX2300 Serial Interface Card Settings 9600 Baud 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 3 4 shows the correct settings for the first five DIP switches and indicates the function performed by each switch Table 3 4 Serial Interface Card Settings Switches 1 5 Switch Setting Function 1 ON XON XOFF protocol 2 OFF 8 bit data length 3 OFF Parity OFF 4 OFF Parity ODD 5 OFF 1 stop bit Switches 6 through 8 are used to set the communications speed of the printer Table 3 5 shows the correct switch setting for each speed Table 3 5 Serial Interface Card Settings Switches 6 8 Switch Speed 6 7 3 9600 ON ON OFF 4800 ON OFF ON 2400 ON OFF OFF 1200 OFF ON ON 6 Replace the card cover screwing the retaining bolt in and locking the paper release lever 3 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers C ITOH C 240 The C ITOH C 240 is a dot matrix printer that communicates with the host processor t
48. LAN Support Program device drivers The necessary CONFIG SYS statements are automatically created in a file called CONFIG LSP Setup allows you to update your CONFIG SYS file Each screen contains instructions for configuring your software and hardware To accept Setup s default press ENTER To change Setup s default type over the default value You can use ESCAPE at any time to return to a previous screen You may use CNTL C to exit Setup at major decision points Press ENTER to continue PRESS Enter 7 The system prompts for a destination directory accept the default C PROTEON and PRESS Enter 8 The system prompts Will you be running a 3270 Program Using the JT keys select no and PRESS Enter 9 The system prompts Will you be running a NETBIOS application Using the JT keys select no and PRESS Enter The system displays a confirmation window for all values selected You have made the following selections LSP software directory C PROTEON 3270 Application Usage No NETBIOS Application Usage No Satisfied with your selections Press ENTER to continue ESCAPE to change selections If any value is not correct PRESS Esc The system requests entry again starting from Step 7 If the values are correct PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 79 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 10 11 Instructions for selection of values for the Proteon board then appear If you
49. Labels 492 11818 01 Figure 3 1 DL5600 Front Control Panel 3 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers QUALITY FONT CHAR W CHAR H CHAR SP LINE SP EMULATE ATTRIB PAGE LG COLOR LFT END TOP MRG LANGUGE CHR SET GRPH LF PRF SKP WIDTH ZEROFNT DC3 CDE CR CODE LF CODE RGHTEND LETTER COMPRSD NORMAL NORMAL 10 CPI 76 LPI DPL24C NONE 11 0 IN BLACK 1 COLM 13 6 IN NO SLSH ENABLE CR ONLY LF amp CR WRAP 4 To show the first setting in the display area press the LF button To show each additional setting press the LF button repeatedly Each time you press the button an additional setting will appear in the display area Scroll through all 22 settings and compare the values with the values shown above If any of the values on the printer do not match these values change them accordingly The following explains how to do this a Press the LF button until the setting you want to change is shown in the display area b Press the RESET button to display the first value that is valid for this setting Press RESET repeatedly to display each additional valid value The value that is asterisked is the one currently selected c When the value you want is displayed press LF to select that value and return you to the MENU 1 function 6800 A2 GN22 30 3 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 5 When you have changed all necessary MENU 1 settings you a
50. Locate the terminating resistor socket marked CN6 and remove the terminating resistor if there is one present The System 5000 does not use a terminating resistor 2 Locate the jumper switch block marked as CHN1 and set the jumpers as shown in Figure 2 4 3 Locate the jumper switch block marked as CHN7 and set the jumpers as shown in Figure 2 4 The CHN7 switch block must set the drive s SCSI ID to 2 Power Connection gt Data Connection gt Figure 2 4 Second and Third Hard Disk Jumper Settings O le oo O O le fe o o o fe 0 oJo ofoloyo o ojojo I olo olololojololojololo CN oo00000000 oo0o000000 f Terminating Resister Socket must be empty 494 14505 01 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Preinstallation Steps for the ANALYSIS NMS Package To configure the IPC 900 refer to Figure 2 5 and follow the instructions below 1 2 Set the DIP switch labeled SW1 to the I O address 2B0 Set the DIP switch labeled SW2 to the memory address D2000 Set the IRQ jumper to IRQ 5 Follow the instructions under Optional Host Upgrade Procedures to install the IPC 900 card in Slot 2 When you have installed all cards in the processor you must run the EISA Configuration
51. PROTOCOL 02 XON XOFF 30 BAUD RATE 06 9600 31 DATA LENGTH 01 8 BITS 32 PARITY 01 NONE 33 STOP BIT 01 1 34 CTS SIGNAL 01 INVALID 3 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers Network Printers The 6800 Series NMS supports the system printing function over a TCP IP network to remotely located printer servers Further information regarding this feature can be found by referring to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide Configuring Network Printers This feature supports those printer types that are already supported as local system printers with the restriction that network printers must not be named printer0 printer1 or printer2 These names are reserved for printers directly connected to the host processor You must define the remote printer to the UNIX operating system before sending print jobs from NMS to the newly defined network printer To configure the UNIX Remote Line Printing RLP feature you must change the parameters of the RLP on the 6800 host Before beginning determine which type of UNIX system is being run on the remote printer server UNIX SCO SSR4 or BSD UNIX Follow the appropriate procedures below Remote Printing with the UNIX SCO S5R4 Print Spooler To establish the remote printer connections with a printer server running UNIX SCO S5R4 perform the following steps 1 Logon to the NMS host as root and TYPE sysadmsh PRESS Enter 2 The Syst
52. Parameters Menu Table 5 3 gives a short explanation of each NMS parameter and the appropriate value for each Table 5 3 NMS Parameters Menu Options Option Explanation 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition Enter y for every new installation Initializing a partition that already has data in it will result in the loss of that data However loading UNIX has already deleted the database information 2 Initialize NUS Database Enter y 3 Include Migration Data This permits you to migrate data from earlier releases Refer to Chapter 7 Performing Migration for more detailed instructions 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices Enter y 3 The following message appears If you wish to modify the NMS parameters Enter number 1 2 3 4 cont or quit 4 Sequentially enter options 1 2 and 4 For each option perform the following TYPE y PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 29 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NOTE When you enter y for any of the options you will erase all existing data If you do not want to erase the data enter q to quit If migrating from a previous NMS release 1 x 2 0 3 x 4 1 TYPE 3 PRESS Enter The system responds Do you wish to include migration data from a previous NMS y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter If installing a new system or reloading the Release 4 2 TYPE n PRESS Enter
53. Sub D to Printers Local connection of 10 pin 25 pin 002 0040 0031 8 pin modular jack alert log printer or dedicated gt 6 10 position ATR or system printer to 6800 3 ______ L gt 20 terminal printer Connects an 035 0153 0031 OS opp Shs 8 adapter cable to the printer ie eee nat a alee 57 Feature DCX Multiplexers For local penan gt 2 p4 connection to 6800 Connects 7 lt gt 3 a MIU to 035 0153 0031 cable A E EEE S4 6821 F1 524 VT 100 For local connection QETE gt 5 6821 F1 010 to 6800 Connects computer 10 lt gt 1 system requiring VT100 terminal emulation to 035 0153 0031 cable ANALYSIS For local ANALYSIS 6510 5605 Port 1 connection to Port 1 on dedicated IPC 900 card Connects ANALYSIS to 035 0153 0031 cable Part 25 pin male Sub D to External Systems Remote 10 pin 25 pin 002 0047 0031 8 pin modular jack connection of System 5 ee ee gt 6 8 position female Controller to 6800 Connects Ja a gt 9 ACU MODEM 035 0152 0031 cable to i aes a al adapter remote DCE co a i z4 Feature parecer 5 lt gt 5 Ri ntegrator Starkeeper G eSs2s5 525 gt 3 PEE Remote connection to 6800 Priel eee Stole gt 2 6831 F1 531 Connects 035 0152 0031 EEEE ae F1 53 cable to remote DCE 6831 F1 010 cA i a a gt 8 Part 25 pin male Sub D to External Systems Remote 25 pin 8 pin 002 0050 0031 8 pin modular jack connection of System f Seo hes gt 8 position female Controller
54. THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE THE AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT IS CONDITIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS THAT NO MODIFICATIONS WILL BE MADE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THE CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY PARADYNE WARNING TO USERS OF DIGITAL APPARATUS IN CANADA THE DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS A LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATIONS OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS LE PRESENT APPAREIL NUMERIQUE N EMET PAS DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES DEPASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE LA CLASSE A PRESCRITES DANS LE REGLEMENT SUR LE BROUILLAGE RADIOELECTRIQUE EDICTE PAR LE MINISTERE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA Cc January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Table of Contents Preface Objectives and Reader Assumptions 2000 xi ADSACE andaa ra a Seco a Ob A ee E E E EET LN xii Documentation Conventions 0 0 e ee eee eee eee eee xii Related Documents asics senii A a E E E E a xii 1 Introduction OyervieW aeaa e tet wae Ati aa ale a E bites 1 1 selecting
55. To execute the selected options TYPE cont PRESS Enter When complete the UNIX prompt appears Network Configuration of NMS Host The NMS host requires information on other processors it must communicate with on the network This information is stored in a file etc hosts which must contain the name of each processor and its associated IP address While logged in as root you must do the following If using the basic network configuration and the defaults provided TYPE cp etc nms basic etc hosts PRESS Enter Go to step 5 If customizing the network configuration to connect to an existing Ethernet network TYPE vi etc hosts PRESS Enter If the NMS host will be connected to a UIP add the IP address and processor name to the etc hosts file in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn uip name Where nnn is a number from 1 to 255 and uip name is the name of the UIP 5 30 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Add the IP addresses and names of all workstations that the host will be directly communicating with in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn ffw name Where nnn is a number from 1 to 255 inclusive and ffw name is the name of the full feature workstation processor NOTE For the 15000 platform the division of full feature workstations among the three processors should be Host Uip 1 Ujip 2 7 3 14 Configurations with lower numbers of full feature workstations should retai
56. Unit SRCU you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector e 002 0032 0031 connector e 035 0152 0031 cable To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or UIP 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the 002 0032 0031 connector 4 Connect one end of the 035 0152 0032 cable to the 002 0032 0031 connector 5 Connect the other end of the 035 0152 0032 cable to the TERM IN port on the SRCU Connecting a Remote Service Restoration Control Unit To connect a remote Service Restoration Control Unit SRCU you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector e Two DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous Full duplex Flow control ON Bit rate of 9600 bps e 002 0032 0031 connector 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 39 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System e 25 position null modem connector e 035 0152 0031 cable To establish the connection perform the following steps at the processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or UIP 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 conn
57. associated with the multiplexer edams Display Processing Filter Use this command to set the Polling state field to polling polling and asynch reporting or asynch polling on for control channel m2 dspf Display Alert Monitoring State Use this command to display the processing filter value for each alert group of the device type specified edpf Edit Processing Filter Use this command to change the value of the filters that define an active alert dsaf Display Display Filter Use this command to display the display filter value for each alert group of the device type specified edaf Edit Display Filter Use this command to change the value of the filters that define the alerts that will display on the network map network monitor and network summary You should also check the Edit User Selection Criteria edusc command to see if the alerts you are interested in are configured for display on your individual monitor If you have verified that all connections and software configuration entries are correct and that the multiplexer hardware is functioning you should check the host processor for failure C 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Maintaining Multiplexers Event Log Printer Problems You may also be expecting alarms at the event log printer but not receiving them The software configuration must accurately reflect the node device to which the alarm cable is connected Use the Display Node C
58. available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or the UIP 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the terminal port of the 839A DBU Control Unit Connecting a Remote Dial Backup Control Unit To connect a remote 839A DBU you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector e Two DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous Full duplex Flow control ON Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 bps e 035 0151 0031 cable To connect a remote DBU perform the following steps at the processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or the UIP 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE devices 4 38 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Perform the following steps at the remote end 1 Connect one end of the 035 0151 0031 cable to the terminal port of the 839A DBU Control Unit 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0151 0031 cable to the DCE device See Appendix A Modem Settings for more information on optioning 3810 3811 3820 or 2224CEO modems for this application Connecting a Local Service Restoration Control Unit To connect a local Service Restoration Control
59. been successfully started Press RETURN to continue 4 To continue you have to redisplay the Network Management System Menu Figure 6 1 To do this PRESS Enter 5 With the Network Management System Menu displayed TYPE 11 PRESS Enter to select Return to Console login The unix login prompt will appear 6 At the unix login prompt TYPE ffw PRESS Enter 7 The system will prompt you for the full feature workstation FFW password The default is no password merely press Enter TYPE the FFW password PRESS Enter The following message displays Welcome to Altos SCO Unix System V 386 Release 3 2 followed by the FFW Login window as shown in Figure 6 2 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 6 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System i COMSPHERE 6600 HNS i Login Password Figure 6 2 FFW Login Window 493 14258 8 With the Login window displayed and the cursor in the Login field TYPE admin PRESS Enter The cursor will jump to the Password field TYPE the admin password the default password is admin1 PRESS Enter The 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu window displays as shown in Figure 6 3 Manager Hap Monitor Summary External Systems Performance Reports Trouble Inventory Reports Trouble Tracking Utilities Figure 6 3 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu Window 9 The 6800 Series NMS Tasks window is really a menu Select Manager by pointing to it with the mouse and cl
60. broadcast address or DOMAIN name different from the default Choose the default when using the basic network configuration as described in the Network Pre Installation Preparation section PRESS Enter The system prompts Does the interface use a broadcast address of all 1 s y n default y PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the broadcast address for this interface default nnn nnn 255 255 PRESS Enter The system prompts for verification of the previously entered values Interface Address Netmask Broadcast Address Are these values correct y n If the values are not correct respond n The system again requests entry of the Internet Address If the values are correct TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter DOMAIN name for node name or enter return to use net COM Where node name is the name of the system on which you are installing PRESS Enter The system prompts 99 Pseudo ttys are currently configured do you want to 1 Add Pseudo tty 2 Remove Pseudo tty Select an option of enter q to quit q TYPE q PRESS Enter The system displays TCP IP Configuration Complete 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 57 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System followed by the Available Options Menu You should TYPE q PRESS Enter The system prompts Do you want to relink the kernel now TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you want this kernel to boot by default
61. cable descriptions usage descriptions and pin information for each cable and adapter described in this guide Appendix C Maintaining Multiplexers This appendix provides information on general troubleshooting procedures command port failure recovery event port failure recovery and external systems port failure recovery Documentation Conventions Typeface The following convention has been used throughout this document This typeface indicates messages that appear on the screen Related Documents Contact your sales representative to order additional product documentation The following documents contain information pertinent to the installation process 305 910 AT amp T Intelligent Ports Card Model 900 IPC 900 User s Guide 305 920 AT amp T Intelligent Ports Card Model 1600 IPC 1600 User s Guide 999 100 292 AT amp T 2224 CEO Modem User s Guide 999 100 432 StarLAN 10 Network PC NAU Installation Guide 6500 A2 GA21 ANALYSIS 6510 Automated Network Management System Reference Manual 6510 A2 GN31 Network Management Workstation User s Guide 6800 A2 GB20 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Configuration Guide 6800 A2 GB21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Management and Configuration Guide 6800 A2 GB30 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preface 6800 A2 GB31 6
62. complete the installation of the full feature workstation The lists below show which procedures must be combined for the different LAN configurations 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 59 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installing MS DOS EtherLink II Configuration e Installing MS DOS e Installing the GrafPoint X One software package with EtherLink II card e Installing the NMS full feature workstation application software with EtherLink II card e Network configuration of full feature workstation StarLAN 10 NAU Configuration e Installing MS DOS e Installing the GrafPoint X One software package with a StarLAN 10 NAU e Installing the NMS full feature workstation application software with StarLAN 10 NAU e Network configuration of full feature workstation Token Ring Configuration e Installing MS DOS e Installing the GrafPoint X One software package with a StarLAN 10 NAU e Installing the NMS full feature workstation application software with StarLAN 10 NAU e Installing the Token Ring software on the full feature workstation e Network configuration of full feature workstation A full feature workstation requires the MS DOS Operating System For workstations supplied by Paradyne the workstation software is initially loaded at the factory You may have to reload this software because of hard disk failure or system upgrade When reloading it is advisable to reformat the hard disk before installing the software
63. configuration file and PRESS Enter The following messages appear Loading configuration files Please wait The maximal configuration of circuit card descriptions and settings will be automatically loaded Use the LT keys to review the cards in the loaded configuration Delete any cards that you do not have installed on the system To delete a card configuration highlight the card description on the screen using the Lt keys and press the Delete key To verify that all resources have been correctly configured PRESS Alt v for view PRESS r for Resources to display the Resource Map This display lists the settings for each component of the system Use the Lt keys to scroll through the Resource Map and verify that all appropriate settings are correct Refer to Table 2 1 for Altos 5000 host Table 2 3 for Altos 5000 UIP and Table 2 5 for Altos 15000 host If the settings are correct PRESS Enter PRESS Alt s for System PRESS x for exit to exit Select Save configuration and exit by pressing the s key when prompted Reboot the system to allow the new settings to take effect Remove the EISA Configuration Disk from the floppy drive and store it safely NOTE At any time in running the ECU you may reload the configuration file which contains the correct settings and begin again the process of deleting those circuit card descriptions which are not installed To do this press Alt
64. connection is broken the following message will be displayed Cannot communicate with the network check NMS connection to network 3 If the connection between the node is made and the problem persists check the control processor s LED display Your configuration may consist of a single control processor or it may have dual or redundant control processors Each processor will have its own LED display C 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Maintaining Multiplexers If the multiplexer control processor experiences faults its LED display will indicate the nature of the fault if possible For example if the LED reads 333 the control processor is performing diagnostics To identify a fault read the rightmost digit of the LED display for the control processor card or cards The codes correspond to status conditions and are described in Steps 4 5 6 and 7 CAUTION In the following procedures where you are instructed to check power connections you should make a visual inspection only To avoid electrical shock be sure to turn off power to the multiplexer before you examine any power connection 4 If the control processor s LED display is blank perform the following steps a Make sure the control processor is secure in its shelf slot b Check the power distribution connections Figures C 1 and C 2 show the locations of these connections on the 740 multiplexer both with and without the expansion shelf Fig
65. cord or by connecting the CCOUT DCIN jack on the COMSPHERE hubbing device to the CC IN jack on the DATAPHONE II modem with an 035 0107 0531 cord Control Channel from Host Computer CCOUT CCOUT CCIN CCIN CCIN CCOUT HUBBING HUBBING DEVICE DEVICE HUBBING DEVICE COMSPHERE DEVICE COMSPHERE DEVICE COMSPHERE DEVICE 493 13906 01 Figure 4 13 Daisy Chain 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 23 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Connecting Locally 035 0145 5031 Host Processor 3400 Series Model 2 Modems 3600 Series DSUs 999 43497031 3800 Series DDD Modems 3900 Series APL Modems 835 3564 2511 035 0154 0031 DATAPHONE II APL DDD Modem or DSU 3400 Series Model 2 Modems 3600 Series DSUs 3800 Series DDD Modems 3900 Series APL Modems 035 0106 0531 3400 Series Model 2 Modems 3600 Series DSUs 3800 Series DDD Modems 3900 Series APL Modems 035 0145 5031 035 0107 0531 DATAPHONE I APL DDD Modem or DSU CC IN 4000 Series Intelligent Communications Carrier 4400 Series APL Modems CC OUT 035 0145 5031 035 0109 0031 RW 002 0025 0031 Connector HH Hubbing Device 5506 06 for 3400 Modems 3600 F3 300 for 3600 3800 and 3900 Devices 3000 Series Carrier 3600 Series DSUs 3800 Series DDD Modems 3900 Series APL Modems 493 13907 01 Figure 4 14 Local Control Channel Connections The diagram in Figure 4 14 illustrates local connections
66. for you 1 Pick a password 2 Pronounceable password will be generated for you Enter choice default is 1 TYPE 1 PRESS Enter 9 The system prompts New password TYPE your chosen password PRESS Enter 10 The system prompts Re enter new password TYPE your chosen password again PRESS Enter 5 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 11 The system will display several status messages followed by Installation and configuration of the Altos SCO UNIX System V Operating System is now complete Remove the Filesystem Volume 2 floppy and the Cartridge tape Volume 3 AFTER the system is shutdown and press lt Return gt to restart the system Safe to Power Off or Press Any Key to Reboot CAUTION Do not remove the boot floppy or tape until the Press Any Key to Reboot prompt is displayed Remove both the floppy disk and the cartridge tape PRESS any key to reboot the system The system auto boots on a System 5000 do not press the spacebar to interrupt auto boot The following prompt appears Boot PRESS Enter INIT SINGLE USER MODE Type CONTROL d to proceed with normal startup or give root password for system maintenance NOTE You have approximately 10 seconds to type the root password and press the Enter key to select system maintenance Failure to do so within the 10 second window will load to normal start up If this occurs a rebo
67. gt Type any key to continue PRESS Enter 14 When the diagnostics are completed the system prompts Type any key to proceed PRESS Enter The Main Menu is displayed To test a second EMULEX DCP MUXi card or to repeat the test return to Step 5 Otherwise continue 15 Select Exit and PRESS Enter 16 At the DOS prompt remove the floppy disk and PRESS Ctrl Alt Del to reboot the system or run the next DOS based diagnostics program 8 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Overview Modem Settings OVELVIEW o re oho etek Oey Sadie ok WES Use ee lees Oe ate et A 1 3810 3811 and 3820 Modems ssuuuuunununnn eee eee eee A 1 2224 CEO Modem 0 cee cece eee tenes A 1 Configuring 3810 3811 and 3820 Modems 00005 A 1 Hardware Option Settings for the 2224 CEO 0000 A 2 Software Configuration Option Parameters for the 2224 CEO A 3 Locking Option Changes 0 cece cee cece eee nee A 4 3810 3811 and 3820 Modems The 3810 3811 and 3820 modems provide a user friendly diagnostic control panel DCP for configuration Please see the section Configuring 3810 Modems in this appendix to configure these modems 2224 CEO Modem The 2224 CEO modem has both hardware option switches and software configuration option parameters that control its operation This appendix describes the recommended settings for both hardware and software options Use this inf
68. have to be brought down and restarted Software Configuration Errors NOTE Before checking the software configuration check the NAP speed If the NAP speed is incorrect you may not receive an alert See Step 2 in the section entitled Faulty Connections for instructions If incorrect values have been introduced for event log 2 via the terminal interface or the Change Node Configuration Parameters chncp command has been run with incorrect information a loss of alerts can occur Determine if changes have been made to event log 2 by accessing the interface Use the Change Node Configuration Parameters chncp command to change incorrect values on the node s for event log 2 The other items to check are the device profiles alert monitoring state and filtering settings on the NMS Use the commands described in Table C 1 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 C 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Table C 1 NMS Commands Command Name Function dsdp Display Device Profile Use this command to check the System Polling field It must be set to mux poll to permit the multiplexer to be monitored for alerts and events eddp Edit Device Profile Use this command to set the System polling field to mux poll dsams Edit Alert Monitoring State Use this command to check the Polling state field It must be set to polling polling and asynch report ing or asynch polling for control channel m2 to detect faults
69. in order to configure en0 The system prompts Enter the internet address of this interface TYPE internet address in the form nnn nnn nnn nnn Where nnn is an integer from 1 to 255 PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the netmask for this interface default 255 255 0 0 NOTE Consult your System Administrator to determine whether to specify a net mask a broadcast address or DOMAIN name different from the default Choose the default when using the basic network configuration as described in the Network Pre nstallation Preparation section PRESS Enter The system prompts Does the interface use a broadcast address of all 1 s y n default y PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the broadcast address for this interface default nnn nnn 255 255 NOTE The displayed default shows the first two levels of the IP address you have just entered The default above for broadcast address assumes the use of the basic network configuration parameters PRESS Enter The system asks for verification of the previously entered values Interface Address Netmask Broadcast Address 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 47 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 14 If the values are not correct respond n The system again requests entry of the Internet Address If the values are correct TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter DOMAIN name for node name or enter
70. indicate that the installation is proceeding and that the operating system is being rebuilt 13 The following message appears Do you wish to have the screen saver capability y n n TYPE y for an automatic time out of the CRT PRESS Enter or TYPE n for a continuous display PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 53 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 14 The following system prompt appears Do you want this kernel to boot by default y n TYPE y PRESS Enter to proceed When the prompt Do you want the kernel environment rebuilt y n appears TYPE y PRESS Enter A message appears indicating when the installation is complete To shut down and reboot the system TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE shutdown g0 y i6 PRESS Enter This command will shutdown and reboot the system Then remove the tape and floppy disk Network Configuration of NMS UIP 1 The NMS UIP requires information on other processors it will communicate with on the network This information is stored in a file etc hosts which must contain the name of each processor and its associated IP address While logged in as root you must do the following If using the basic network configuration and the defaults provided TYPE cp etc uip basic etc hosts PRESS Enter Go to Step 5 If customizing the network configuration to connect to an existing 10BaseT network TYPE vi etc hosts PRESS Enter
71. multiplexer network interface Feature Number Description Usage Pin Diagram Part Centronics Connector Connects system printer to 035 0155 0031 to 25 pin male Sub D the parallel port on the 6820 Pec 2724 89G parallel cable Feature 6821 B1 135 6821 B1 235 6821 B1 136 6821 B1 236 6821 B1 134 6821 B1 234 Part 25 pin male Sub D to Connects control channel to 25 pin 10 pin 035 0184 5031 10 pin female control remote DPII devices or to 223222552 gt M6AY channel connector Model 2 devices when used 9e 4 Feature with 035 0106 0531 genn oo 3 6821 F1 517 A E 5 6821 F1 518 gt 9 8 lt gt 8 4 an n ana gt 7 9 lt 20 lt Part 6 pin modular jack to Connects control channel to 6 pin 25 pin 035 0185 5031 25 pin male Sub D remote Model 2 devices 5 eee gt 4 M6AY M6BK 2 lt gt 8 Feature a ra gt 2 6821 F1 518 ara gt 7 5 555 gt 3 C gt 9 gt 20 Part 25 pin male Sub D to Workstations Connects Pin to pin 835 3564 2511 25 pin female Sub D remote basic feature M25A workstation to its remote DCE Feature interface 6831 F 1 502 NetView PC Connects 6821 F 1 507 remote NetView PC to its DCE 6821 F 1 512 interface 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 B 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Table B 1 10 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Part Number Feature Number Descriptio
72. rebuilt When this is complete you will be asked whether you want the kernel to boot by default To indicate yes TYPE y PRESS Enter A second prompt appears asking whether you want the kernel environment rebuilt TYPE y PRESS Enter A message appears indicating the installation is complete If you installed the 5000 System proceed to Step a If you installed the 15000 System proceed to Step b a For the 5000 system you must shutdown and reboot the system to activate the kernel To do this remove the floppy disk and cartridge tape and TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE shutdown g0 y i6 PRESS Enter The system will reboot 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 25 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System b For the 15000 system you must shutdown and power off Then power on to activate the kernel To do this remove the floppy disk and cartridge tape and TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE shutdown g0 y i0 PRESS Enter When the system prompts Safe to Power Off or Press Any Key to Reboot Rotate the key counterclockwise 1 4 turn to the vertical SWITCHED OFF position Wait at least 45 seconds for the processor to power down Then rotate the switch clockwise 1 4 turn to the RUN position The system will reboot Formatting the Third Hard Disk On host processors with the Automatic Backup and Restore package you must format the third hard disk required by that package The Automatic Ba
73. remove the StarLAN 10 NAU and reset the jumper settings for IRQ 3 as shown in Figure 8 3 and replace the board Once you have this disk perform the following steps Default 492 11704d Figure 8 3 StarLAN IRQ Strapping 1 Move the RESET RUN key on the front panel clockwise to the RUN position to reboot the System 5000 if the System 5000 is turned off at this point move the power switch on the rear panel to the ON position instead The System 5000 will run through its normal power up sequence and display the following message Press spacebar to interrupt autoboot 2 PRESS the spacebar immediately The Boot Menu displays see Figure 8 1 3 Insert the disk entitled StarLAN 10 Network NAU Diagnostics into the floppy drive and select Option 2 to boot from the floppy 4 The diagnostic program will execute automatically It will check the strap settings I O address memory address memory size and memory to determine if the card is configured properly 5 When the diagnostic has completed press any key to exit the program and remove the disk from the floppy drive Power down the processor and remove the StarLAN 10 NAU Move the IRQ setting from 3 back to the default 2 See the section entitled Field Upgrade Packages in Chapter 2 Preinstallation Steps for the StarLAN 10 NAU for the correct strap settings Replace the card and power up the processor 8 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Running Diagnostics IPC 9
74. reused The fault log printer used in these previous releases can be reconnected to a Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS alert log printer port to provide alert printing capabilities For instructions on hardware connection of these components refer to Chapter 4 Connecting the Components Depending on the release some host processors can also be reused The Release and Release 2 6800 Series NMS host processors 6386 25 processors can be converted to full feature workstations or basic feature workstations and used with a Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS The Release 1 COMSPHERE 6830 processors including the 3B2 600 host the 6386 25 UIP 6386 network monitor unit can be returned for a customer credit applied towards the Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS 2 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Any 6386 based full feature workstation used in a Release or a Release 2 6800 Series NMS system can be loaded with Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS full feature workstation software and can be connected to the customer s Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS Additionally any 6386 based basic feature workstation can be converted to a full feature workstation with installation of an upgrade kit Any PC based basic feature workstation used in the Release 1 6800 Series NMS can be loaded with Release 4 2 basic feature workstation software and can be connected to the customer s Release 4 2 NMS Altos System 5000 Host Hardware The Altos System
75. sent by DTE modem dialerenabled U Modem ignores data from the DTE modem dialer disabled S1 8 D Enables the auto test function U Disables the auto test function Software Configuration Option Parameters for the 2224 CEO After the hardware option switches are set a terminal should be connected to the modem so that the following software configuration option parameters can be set e For all modems TYPE atzol2 y PRESS Enter twice e For all modems TYPE atzo34 1 PRESS Enter twice e Depending on the value y or n in column 07 of Table A 1 TYPE atzo7 y or atzo7 n PRESS Enter twice e Depending on the value y or n in column 051 of Table A 1 TYPE atzo51 y or atzo51 n PRESS Enter twice 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 A 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems e Depending on the value y or n in column 058 of Table A 1 TYPE atzo58 y or atzo58 n PRESS Enter twice The software configuration option parameter meanings are as follows 07 07 y or o7 n Automatic answer enabled yes or no 012 012 y Transparent Data mode should be enabled 034 034 1 Operate as standard modem without error control o51 051 y or o51 n CTS controlled by RTS yes or no 058 058 y or 058 n Modem ignores DTR yes or no Locking Option Changes After the software configuration option parameters have been set hardware switch S1 2 should be changed from D to U to lock the options so that they cannot be change
76. the Card Cover Figure 3 6 DX2300 Memory and Serial Interface Card Access 3 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers 4 The memory card contains an emulator mode switch and two DIP switches Figure 3 7 shows the location of the card in the printer and indicates the various switch settings To modify the emulator mode switch and the DIP switches perform the following steps a Set the emulator mode switch to Type F see Figure 3 7 b Set the DIP switches to the positions indicated in Figure 3 7 Table 3 3 also indicates the setting of each switch as well as each switch s function Memory Circuit Card Memory Circuit Card Switch 1 Switch 2 12345678 1234 Push Switch to the J D r 5 6 A p U A 5 Indicated Position J OFF OFF Memory Circuit Card Emulator Mode Switch 492 11700 02 Figure 3 7 DX2300 Memory Card Settings 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 3 3 Memory Card DIP Switch Settings Switch Setting Function DIP Switch 1 1 OFF Standard characters 10 CPI 2 ON Slashed zero 3 OFF Paper out detect 4 OFF Data input buffer 5 OFF 11 inch paper selected 6 ON Language selection 7 ON Language selection 8 ON Language selection DIP Switch 2 1 ON Online with power on 2 OFF Cut sheet feeder disabled 3 ON Skip over perforation 4 ON Line feed with carriage return 3 14
77. the following message Shutdown started date time Broadcast message from root console on uip 1 date time THE SYSTEM IS BEING SHUT DOWN Log off now or risk your files being damaged NOTE This message is broadcast across the system to alert other users of impending shutdown When the following message displays either power down the system or press any key to reset the system Safe to Power Off or Press Any Key to Reboot 6 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Overview Performing Migration QVeLVIEW 2 sek een Pek oad Ps ek eh E ee eet aoe ees 7 1 Introduction to Migrating Databases 00 eee eee ee eee 7 2 Release 1 Database Migration 0 0 eee eee eee eee 7 3 Databases Migrated i23 cui o a es We bee a EN eh a ee 7 3 Cleaning Up the Database 0 0 eee cece eee 7 4 Backing Up the Database 0 00 00 cece eee eee 7 7 Migrating the Database 00 cece eee cee eee 7 8 Checking the Migrated Database 0 0 0 e cece eee eee 7 13 Data Integrity Verification 0 0 eee eee ee eee 7 13 Profile Data Changes and Corrections 00 0000000 7 14 Release 2 Database Migration 0 0 rererere rerne 7 16 Databases Migrated 0 0 ccc 7 16 Cleaning Up the Database 0 00 7 17 Backing Up the Database 0 0c c cece eee eee 7 17 Migrating the Database 0 0 eee eee eee 7
78. the power cable monitor mouse and keyboard To do this perform the following steps 1 Slide the cover towards the front of the chassis about one half inch to engage the locking pins 2 Using the 2 Phillips screwdriver tighten the two screw type fasteners that secure the cover to the chassis The fasteners are located on the rear panel near the right side edge see Figure 2 1 2 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Installing the 16 Port Cabinet Assembly If you installed an IPC 1600 card in Slot 8 of the host you will have to connect the card to a 16 port cabinet assembly device that is shipped with the card To do this perform the following steps 1 Locate the two 80 conductor ribbon cables and the 16 port cabinet assembly as shown in Figure 2 11 2 Carefully thread the ends of the ribbon cables marked P3 and P4 through the card slot opening 3 Connect the cable marked P3 for Ports 9 through 16 to header P3 Connect the cable marked P4 for Ports 1 through 8 to header P4 The connectors are keyed for proper alignment with the 80 pin headers on the card as shown in Figure 2 12 Make sure that the retaining clips are properly secured 4 Carefully pass the excess ribbon cable through the slot opening until the IPC 1600 can be plugged into expansion Slot 8 Sind Right Side Lug 16 Wire Frame Cable P3 Ports 9 16 Mounting Cable P4 Ports 1 8 P4 Conne
79. to 6800 Connects D as gt 3 ACU MODEM 035 0152 0031 cable to CSh S22 55 2 gt 5 adapter remote DCE 4an gt 8 Feature ACCUMASTER Integrator l EEE EEEE gt 2 ea StarKeeper Remote yp eee ne gt 7 eee connection to 6800 Connects g ________ s 035 0152 0031 cable to ea gt 4 6831 F 1 531 remote DCE 6831 F1 010 B 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Adapter and Cable Identification Table B 1 5 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Part Number 002 0065 0031 LATCH ADAPTER UIP processors Feature Number Description Usage Pin Diagram Part 25 pin female Sub D to Local System Controller or 25 pin 8 pin 002 0051 0031 8 pin modular jack ACCUMASTER Integrator ee gt i 8 position female StarKeeper connection to ic SORENE E gt 3 terminal printer 6800 Connects 2 lt gt 5 adapter 035 0152 0031 cable from hp aa eee aes gt 8 System Controller to an PEOI EATER 52 Feature 002 0039 0031 connector 3 6831 F 1 501 Connects 035 0152 0031 eens eee 7 6831 F1 531 cable from ACCUMASTER 20 lt gt 6 Integrator StarKeeper to an arate oe gt 4 002 0039 0031 connector Part 25 pin female Sub D to Workstations Connects 25 pin 10 pin 002 0052 0031 10 pin modular jack 035 0153 0031 cable to 6 lt 10 position female basic feature workstation 20 lt as Ee gt 3 terminal printer IBM NetView PC Connects 8 lt gt 4 adapter local IBM PC to a gt 5 Feature
80. to create a new kernel now y n TYPE y PRESS Enter PRESS Enter to continue The system will prompt Press any key to continue PRESS Enter Use the gt lt keys to highlight Quit and PRESS Enter The system prompts for confirmation of the Quit request Use the lt keys to highlight Yes and PRESS Enter The system prompts Please remove the Altos SCO MPX Supplement floppy if it s still in the floppy drive and press Enter to continue Remove the floppy from the drive and PRESS Enter 5 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The system confirms the following Altos SCO Multi Processor Extensions MPX has been loaded You must reboot the system before MPX will be active Once you have rebooted you can verify that multiple processors are working by logging in as root and typing uname X and looking for the NumCPU field It should say NumCPU 2 This means the system is using 2 CPUs Please type init 6 to reboot the system 13 When the UNIX prompt appears TYPE init6 PRESS Enter The system automatically reboots Release 4 2 NMS Software This section explains how to install the Release 4 2 Network Management System NMS application program on an Altos System 5000 or Altos System 15000 computer You must install the software in multi user mode To install the 6800 NMS Application Software on t
81. to the control channels 4 24 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Materials Required To connect COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Model 2 APL modems COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSUs COMSPHERE 3800 Series DDD modems COMSPHERE 3900 Series APL modems DATAPHONE II APL and DDD modems and DATAPHONE II DSUs you will need the following materials e 002 0025 0031 adapter for a modem chain beginning with a Model 2 modem e 035 0145 5031 cable for a modem chain beginning with a Model 2 modem or for a 4000 Series Intelligent Communications Carrier ICC or 3000 Series Carrier e 035 0154 0031 cable for a modem chain beginning with a DATAPHONE II modem e 835 3564 2511 cable for a modem chain beginning with a DATAPHONE II modem e 5506 06 hubbing device for 3400 Model 2 modems e 3600 F3 300 hubbing device for 3600 3800 3900 Series devices Connection Procedures For a modem chain beginning with a COMSPHERE 3400 Series 3600 Series or 3800 Series devices perform the following steps 1 Connect the 002 0025 0031 adapter to one of the connectors on the octopus cable attached to the DCP MUXi card in the host processor 2 Connect the 035 0145 5031 cable to the 002 0025 0031 3 Connect the other end of the 035 0145 5031 cable to the CCIN DCOUT jack of the hubbing device attached to the COMSPHERE device For a modem chain beginning with a DATAPHONE II modem perform the following steps 1 Connect the 835 3564 2511 cable t
82. until the red cursor is positioned under the printed HARDWRE tag Then select that function by pressing the FF button Table 3 2 shows the settings and correct values for the HARDWRE function When lt END gt is printed you are ready to exit from changing the HARDWRE settings Press the ONLINE button at this time to exit and return to the Function Menu To exit SETUP mode position the red cursor under SAVE amp END and press the FF button Table 3 2 DL3600 HARDWARE Seitings Setting Correct Value lt PPR OUT gt DETECT lt PRT DIR gt BI DIR lt BUZZER gt ON lt WORD LG gt 8 BIT lt BUFFER gt 8KBYTE lt FEEDER gt REAR 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Fujitsu DX2300 The Fujitsu DX2300 is a dot matrix printer that communicates with the host processor through a serial interface Modifying its default settings is done directly on the memory and serial interface cards To modify the default settings perform the following steps 1 Remove the printer from its carton and set it on a flat surface 2 Loosen the card cover bolt and then move the paper release lever forward and remove the card cover as shown in Figure 3 6 3 Locate the memory card and serial interface card The memory card is found in the second slot of the printer card chassis and the serial interface card in the first slot 490 11698 Remove
83. which comes with the workstation software The workstation software is initially loaded at the manufacturer You may have to reload this software because of hard disk failure or system upgrade When reloading it is advisable to reformat the hard disk before installing the software To reformat create a bootable disk by using the format s command Then copy the format command found on the MS DOS Operating system disk onto the bootable disk Boot the system from the bootable disk and execute the format command on the hard disk Once the hard disk has been re formatted remove the rebootable disk and locate the two MS DOS disks labeled Install and Operating System Use the following procedures to install MS DOS 1 2 Insert the disk labeled 1 of 2 into Drive A and turn on the power to the computer The Welcome screen appears PRESS Enter The screen displays the default settings for Date Time Country Keyboard and Install to Hard Disk Change the defaults if necessary PRESS Enter The screen displays two setup options Install to C VDOS and Run Shell on start up Yes Change the second option so that the shell will not run at start up Follow the instructions displayed on the screen PRESS Enter Anew screen displays a graph indicating the percentage of information transferred from the floppy disk to the hard disk When prompted remove Disk and insert Disk 2 PRESS Enter When prompted remove Disk
84. which does have the Link Integrity option or remove the StarLAN card and replace it with a 3COM EtherLink II card If you wish to retain the StarLAN card be sure that the Link Integrity switch is set to enabled If you choose to install the 3COM EtherLink II card follow the steps in the section Preinstallation Steps for the EtherLink II card 5 If you are upgrading an AT amp T 6386 SX WGS AT amp T 6386 SX EL or Altos 386SX 20 you must upgrade the memory in the processor to a maximum of 4 megabytes AT amp T 6386 SX WGS Install 2 SIMMs 2 Mbytes carefully into Bank 1 location U18 on the system board ensuring that the SIMMs are locked into place AT amp T 6386 SX EL Install 1 SIMM 1 Mbyte carefully into Bank 1 location J22 and 1 SIMM 1 Mbyte into Bank 1 location J23 on the system board ensuring that the SIMMs are locked into place Altos 386SX 20 Remove all adapter cards to expose the system memory section on the system board Install 1 SIMM 1 Mbyte carefully into Bank 1 location U22 and 1 SIMM 1 Mbyte into Bank location U42 on the system board ensuring that the SIMMs are locked into place 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 57 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 6 Replace all covers 7 Connect either the StarLAN NAU or the EtherLink II card to the network HUB using one of the following cables a 035 0116 2531 25 b 035 0116 5031 50 c 035 0116 9031 100 d
85. 0 0000 00 ee eee 3 6 3 4 DL3600 Front Control Panel 00 0 ee eee 3 9 3 5 DL3600 SETUP Mode Opening Menu 000000022 eee 3 10 3 6 DX2300 Memory and Serial Interface Card Access 00 3 12 3 7 DX2300 Memory Card Settings 0 ee eee 3 13 3 8 DX2300 Serial Interface Card Settings 9600 Baud 0 3 15 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Figure Page 4 1 Altos System 5000 Display Unit Keyboard and Mouse Ports 4 3 4 2 Altos System 15000 Display Unit Keyboard and Mouse Ports 4 4 4 3 Local Area Network with Second Full Feature Workstation 4 6 4 4 Network Hub Unit canons ie i es Ge a eae ee ne ee 4 7 4 5 Local Area Network with UIP 00 cee eee eee 4 8 4 6 Local Area Network with Additional Full Feature Workstations 4 9 4 7 Altos 15000 Basic Local Area Network Configuration 4 10 4 8 Altos 15000 Configuration for Additional Full Feature Workstations 4 12 4 9 Altos 15000 Cascaded Network Hub Units 0 0 000 00 4 13 4 10 Basic Feature Workstation Configurations 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 4 15 4 11 Basic Feature Workstation Configurations 0 ce eee eee eee eee 4 16 4 12 Printer COnnections vs cond etka cies pe ce Ree AER ee Hh eRe 4 19 4
86. 0 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 39 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Checking the Migrated Database Following NMS start up the integrity of the migrated data should be verified The following procedures may be executed for that purpose 1 11 Bring up the System Management window and execute the Create Network Map crnm command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for details on all commands Following completion of the Create Network Map crnm command bring up the network map window and inspect the network map visually NOTE Circuit names and device addresses are not displayed on the Release 4 2 network map Device names and site names are displayed Execute the Display Device Profile dsdp command to verify profiles for three devices Verify the accuracy of the information Execute the Display Site Profile dssp command to examine profiles for three sites Verify the accuracy of the information Execute the Display Facility Profile dsfp command to examine facility profiles associated with three devices If the ACCULINK Network Manager ANM is installed execute the List Facility Profile sfp command selecting T1 for the facility type and m2 for Device s Compare the screen results with a hard copy output from the List Facility Profile sfp command on the source system If ANM is installed execute the Hardware Module Summary
87. 0 January 1997 5 89 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installing the Analysis Gateway Option 5000 Systems Only The ANALYSIS Gateway Option is supported by hardware and software The IPC 900 serial card must be installed in the host processor to support the physical link between the 6800 Series NMS and the ANALYSIS NMS see Chapter 2 for installation instructions The software that supports the ANALYSIS Gateway is embedded in the NMS application program loaded on the host processor The following procedure to initialize this software is presented in three stages The first stage involves installing and activating the software The second stage involves configuring the software with system parameters The third stage involves setting complimentary data rates on both the 6800 Series NMS and the ANALYSIS NMS If for any reason the NMS application program must be reinstalled the installation of the ANALYSIS Gateway must be repeated Installation The installation procedure must begin with the NMS application stopped Shut down the NMS application as described in Chapter 6 The UNIX system remains active after the NMS shutdown with a login prompt displayed NOTE To cancel the installation at any time during the procedure press the Esc key 1 Login move to the installation directory and initiate the installation program At the login prompt TYPE root PRESS Enter The system prompts Password TYPE root p
88. 00 Diagnostic Program for Altos 5000 Systems Only The IPC 900 diagnostic consists of three tests These tests can only be run under the MS DOS operating system Therefore you will have to boot the System 5000 with MS DOS create a bootable disk copy the diagnostics onto the bootable disk and reboot the system with the newly created diagnostic disk However you only have to do this once after which you can save the new disk and use it whenever you have to run the diagnostic To accomplish all this you need a bootable disk containing the MS DOS files a blank disk and the disk entitled Intelligent Ports Card MS DOS Device Drivers and Diagnostics Version 3 09 that is shipped with the card Before you begin you must format the blank floppy diskette using the SDX diskette To accomplish this boot from the SDX and enter u Then enter 1 and insert the blank diskette This formats the diskette Return to the Main Menu and exit then remove the SDX diskette 1 Move the RESET RUN key on the front panel clockwise to the RUN position to reboot the System 5000 if the System 5000 is turned off at this point move the power switch on the rear panel to the ON position instead The System 5000 will run through its normal power up sequence and display the following message Press spacebar to interrupt autoboot 2 PRESS the spacebar immediately The Boot Menu appears see Figure 8 1 3 Insert the bootable disk containing MS DOS and select Option
89. 00 UIP you must have a Single Inline Memory Module SIMM package part no 555 24231 003 which contains four 4 megabyte SIMMs Converting from prior NMS releases may require more than one SIMM package Install the additional SIMMs one SIMM in each of the four memory banks on the card immediately next to those SIMMs already installed If the SIMMs are not adjacent to each other in each bank or a memory bank has no SIMMs installed the processor cannot power up properly To install the memory on the UIP perform the following steps 1 If the processor is running stop the NMS processes and shut down UNIX by following the steps in the applicable sections of Chapter 6 System Start up and Shutdown 2 When the message Safe to power off appears power down the processor using the on off switch 3 Remove the side cover exposing the installed boards 2 22 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors 4 Remove the memory board by unscrewing the hold down screw on the board in memory Slot 0 located at the bottom of the processor gently pull the board until it is free of the slot Place the board on a flat surface with its memory plug facing you 5 Each of the four memory banks on the board should already have a memory SIMM installed in the first and second positions Install each of the new 4 megabyte SIMMs as follows a Hold the SIMM over the SIMM socket on the memory board with the SIMM s key notch located at t
90. 00 bps the 19 000 bps rate requires the presence of a soft channel card SC 1 e 835 5783 0011 cable To establish the connection perform the following steps at the processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or UIP 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE Perform the following steps at the remote end 1 Connect one end of the 835 5783 0011 cable to the remote DCE 2 Connect the other end of the 835 5783 0011 cable to the MIU attached to the DCX multiplexer See Appendix A Modem Settings for more information on optioning 3810 3811 3820 or 2224CEO modems for this application Connecting a Computer System Requiring VT100 Emulation The purpose of VT100 terminal emulation is to allow a workstation connected to the host processor or UIP to emulate the standard Digital Equipment Corporation DEC VT 100 terminal via a cut through interface Connecting Locally Since this connection depends on the device you are connecting to you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0040 0031 connector e 002 0052 0031 connector To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or UIP 6800 A
91. 00 is complete Installing the MPX Software on the Altos 15000 This section describes how to install the Altos MPX Multiprocessing software on the Altos System 15000 host processor Skip this section if you are installing on an Altos 5000 To install the MPX software perform the following steps 1 At the system prompt TYPE cd ust MPX PRESS Enter TYPE _ instalIMPX PRESS Enter 2 Use the LT keys to highlight Install and PRESS Enter 3 Use the LT keys to highlight A New Product and PRESS Enter 4 The system prompts you whether to install all or part of the software Use the LT keys to highlight Entire Product and PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 19 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 11 The system prompts for Distribution Floppy Volume 1 Insert the Altos SCO MPX Supplement floppy disk in the floppy drive Use the LT keys to highlight Continue and PRESS Enter The system prompts again for Altos MPX Multiprocessing Floppy Volume 1 The floppy is already in the drive so you can ignore this prompt Use the JT keys to highlight Continue and PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter your Altos MPX serial number TYPE your serial number provided in the Altos MPX software package PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter your Altos MPX activation key TYPE your activation key provided in the Altos MPX software package PRESS Enter The system asks Do you wish
92. 0051 0031 3 ________ 6 connector connects remote 7 ______ _ Feature SC to 002 0050 0031 4 6821 B1 133 connector 6 ERTA 7 3 B1 E gt ane SRC Local and remote SRC 5 eee eee gt 2 6821 F1 524 connection to 6800 Connects ee gt 1 ae local SRC or remote to an sae oe e 002 0032 0031 connector ceca ACCUMASTER Integrator 6831 F1 503 StarKeeper Local and E remote ACCUMASTER 6831 F1 506 Integrator StarKeeper 6831 F1 530 connection to 6800 Connects 6831 F1 531 local ACCUMASTER Integrator StarKeeper to an 002 0051 0031 connector connects remote ACCUMASTER Integrator StarKeeper to an 002 0050 0031 connector Part 10 pin modular to Used in any serial connection 035 0153 0031 10 pin modular cable to an IPC card 10 position modular cable Part 25 pin female Sub D Local DATAPHONE II APL 25 pin 10 pin 035 0154 0031 jack to 10 pin female DDD modem DSU e eee gt M6BC control channel connection to 6800 Connects 9 _ _______ gt 3 connector DCE device to 835 3564 2511 3 ________ 4 Fealure i cable 6820 to 035 011 0731 4 y A b 6821 F1 512 cable to local DCE DASR gt 8 f lt gt s 5 gt 6 L gt 9 6 lt 8 lt 20 lt B 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Adapter and Cable Identification Table B 1 9 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Part Number DATAPHONE II Connects local DATAPHONE to control channel 74x Multiplexers Connects 719 to 74x for
93. 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card If connecting to a COM port use the 002 0054 0031 connector Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE device At the remote end connect one end of the 835 3564 2511 cable to the remote DCE device Connect the other end of the 835 3564 2511 cable to the workstation 25 pin serial connector on the basic feature workstation There are five model printers available for the COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS as shown in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 NMS Printer Models Function Model System Printer Fujitsu DL5600 or DL8400 DL3600 Alert Log Printer Fujitsu DX2300 or C ITOH C 240 Dedicated Automated Trouble Report Printer Fujitsu DX2300 or C ITOH C 240 Chapter 3 Preparing the Printers explained that preparing the printers for connection to the host processor involved modifying some of the default strap settings on each printer to conform to NMS requirements If you have not done this read Chapter 3 and follow the instructions for modifying the settings Once you have modified the settings you can connect the printers to the host processor Figure 4 12 provides an overview of the different ways each printer can be connected The following sections provide instructions for connecting each printer 4 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Host Pro
94. 051 0031 connector 5 Connect the other end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to the terminal port on the StarKeeper Connecting Remotely To connect a remote StarKeeper NMS to the host processor you will need the following materials e Two 035 0153 0031 cables e Two 002 0039 0031 connectors e Two DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous Full duplex Flow control ON Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 bps e Two 002 0050 0031 connectors e Two 035 0152 0031 cables To establish the connection perform the following steps at the host processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of te 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE devices Perform the following steps at the remote end 1 Connect one end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to the terminal port of the StarKeeper 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to the 002 0050 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0050 0031 connector to the remote DCE devices 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 55 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Bytex UMS This section explains how to connect the Bytex UMS to the NMS host processor or the User Interface Processor UIP The UIP connection is restricted to cut through only To connect the Bytex Switch to the host pr
95. 1 The ANALYSIS Selection menu Figure 5 11 is displayed on your screen The letter n represents the number of ANALYSIS 6510 s already configured To remove a 6510 configuration from the 6800 Series NMS database TYPE 2 PRESS Enter The system displays the following message Warning The following steps will be taken if you continue 1 The 6510 support software in the 6800 NMS will be stopped 2 All Historic Alert records and Trouble Tickets for the 6510 and its devices will be deleted from the NMS database 3 All Facility Profiles having the 6510 or its devices at both endpoints point to point circuits will be deleted 4 NOTE Facility Profiles and bridging devices related to multipoint circuits will NOT be deleted Do you wish to continue y or n TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears Please select the 6510 1 System name 2 Cancel operation Enter a number from 1 to 7 depending on the number of 6510 s already configured TYPE number of the system to be removed PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 99 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 4 The following counter appears Elapsed Time 00 00 00 The counter increments every five seconds During this procedure the keyboard is locked and you cannot stop the removal For large ANALYSIS network configurations the removal may take longer than one hour When the process is completed the following messa
96. 15000 host It is optional with the 5000 Two UIPs are required with the 15000 Workstation configurations are the maximum number allowed The NMS requires a minimum of one full feature workstation attached to the host 1 The 16 Control Channel package cannot be installed on the Altos System 5000 in conjunction with either or both of the ANALYSIS or 3270 Emulation packages 2 The Serial Port Upgrade package must be installed on UIP 1 to support 18 basic feature workstations when the host is an Altos System 15000 Figure 1 1 shows a host processor and UIP for the System 5000 Figure 1 2 shows a System 15000 host with two System 5000 UIPs 1 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Introduction Command and Event Interface Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation AT amp T Mail Alert Log Printer or NetView PC ACCULINK lt h Multiplexer SNA Host Monitor Keyboard O Mouse ACCULINK Multiplexer ALA Automatic Trouble Report Interface UAI AMI Alarms AMI File Export C UUCP 839A Dial Backup System Controller DCX Multiplexer A Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation
97. 153 0031 835 4613 2511 m PORT 1 ANALYSIS 5600 IPC 900 Card I 002 0019 0031 Connector 492 13918 01 C 002 0039 0031 Connector 1 DCE Interface Figure 4 26 ANALYSIS 6510 5605 and 5600 Remote Connection 4 52 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Connecting the ANALYSIS 6510 5605 To connect a remote ANALYSIS 6510 5605 to the host processor perform the following steps at the remote end 1 Connect one end of the 835 5783 0011 cable to Port 1 on the ANALYSIS 6510 5605 2 Connect the other end of the 835 5783 0011 cable to the DCE device Perform the following steps at the host computer end 1 Connect the gronded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to a port on the IPC 900 card dedicated for ANALYSIS use 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the DCE device Connecting the ANALYSIS 5600 To connect a remote ANALYSIS 5600 to the host processor perform the following steps at the remote end 1 Connect the 002 0019 0031 connector to Port 1 on the ANALYSIS 5600 2 Connect the end of the 835 4613 2511 cable marked Terminal to the 002 0019 0031 connector 3 Connect the end of the 835 4613 2511 cable marked Controller to the DCE device Perform the following steps at the host processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to a port on the IPC 900 card 2 Connect the othe
98. 19 Checking the Migrated Database 0 0 0 cee cee cece ee eee 7 24 Release 3 0 3 1 Database Migration 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 7 25 Databases Migrated ununure ereere rreran cee 7 25 Cleaning Up the Database 0 0 0 7 26 Backing Up the Database 0 cece eee eee 7 26 Migrating the Database 00 cece eee ee eee 7 26 Checking the Migrated Database 0 00 00 eee eee eee 7 32 Release 4 0 4 1 Migration 0 0 eee cece eee eee 7 33 Databas s Migfat d ene sil etcetera oe Ss 7 33 Cleaning Up the Database 0 0 0 eee eee eee 7 34 Backing Up the Database 0 0 0 cece eee eee ee 7 34 Migrating the Database 00 cece eee eens 7 34 Checking the Migrated Database 0 00 00 c eee eee ee 7 40 This chapter provides procedural information on NMS database migration to Release 4 2 of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Database migration allows Release 1 Release 2 Release 3 x and Release 4 x NMS network configuration and fault information to be transferred automatically to the Release 4 2 NMS This database migration procedure will eliminate the need to reenter database information into a new Release 4 2 NMS The migration procedure used is dependent on the original NMS software release The procedures for migrating Release 1 NMS Release 2 Release 3 x and Release 4 x NMS are described in detail in this
99. 2 30 Performing Migration 12 The Edit Profile commands Edit Site Profile edsp Edit Device Profile eddp Edit Facility Profile edfp and the Identity id command provide mechanisms for changing or correcting the migrated data When migration completes successfully the messages sent to the console can be reviewed to take note of any warning messages as follows cd usr tmp pg initdb log pg restorelog Upon completion of the migration script perform the following Shutdown the NMS and restart it Turn polling on again with the edams command If your NMS has ANALYSIS systems connected and you wish to change or add systems perform the configuration steps now as specified in the Configuration section Backup the 4 2 database onto new cartridge tapes Release 4 0 4 1 Database Migration When a customer migrates from a Release 4 0 or Release 4 1 6800 Series NMS to a Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS all device profiles site profiles vendor profiles historical alerts trouble tickets user profiles and user groups filter values and channel group tables are transferred Databases Migrated The following databases will be migrated Device Profiles Vendor Profiles Site Profiles Facility Profiles User Profiles System Configuration Data External System Configuration Data Workstation Data Filter Values Alert Monitoring States Alert Colors and Alert Group Attributes ATR Phone Directories Historic Alerts Netwo
100. 2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 41 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 2 Depending on the application connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0040 0031 male or 002 0052 0031 female connector 3 Connect the 002 0040 0031 or 002 0052 0031 connector to the terminal port of the computer system requiring VT100 terminal emulation Connecting Remotely To connect a remote computer system requiring VT100 terminal emulation you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector e Two DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous Full duplex Flow control ON Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 bps e 835 5783 0011 cable depending upon the computer system you are connecting to you may need an 835 3564 2511 cable which is male to female instead of the 835 5783 0011 cable which is male to male To establish the connection perform the following steps at the processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or UIP 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE Perform the following steps at the remote end 1 Connect the male end of the 835 5783 0011 or the 835 3564 2511 cable to the remote DCE 2 Connect the male end of the 835 5783 0011 or the female e
101. 2 to boot from the floppy 4 Once the system boots you are ready to format the blank disk and transfer the system files onto the disk so that it can be used to boot the System 5000 To do this at the A gt prompt TYPE format a s PRESS Enter The system displays the following prompt Insert new diskette for Drive a and strike enter when ready 5 Remove the MS DOS disk insert the blank disk into the floppy drive and PRESS Enter The system formats the disk and transfers the system files to it When complete the system displays the following prompt Format complete format another 6 TYPE n PRESS Enter With the newly formatted disk still in the drive boot the system If the format was successful the system prompts you for the date and time PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 8 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 7 You are now ready to copy the IPC 900 diagnostic onto the newly formatted disk To copy the diagnostic device drivers and programs at the A gt prompt TYPE copy a b a The system prompts you to insert a disk in the drive Insert the disk entitled Intelligent Ports Card MS DOS Device Drivers and Diagnostics Version 3 09 into the drive and PRESS Enter b The system will eventually prompt you to insert a disk in Drive B Remove the diagnostic disk insert the newly formatted disk into the same drive and PRESS Enter Steps a and b will alternate unt
102. 21 2 14 IPC 1600 Switch and Jumper Locations and Settings 2 26 2 15 System 15000 Removing the Top Cover 0 0 0 0 0 0 e eee 2 32 2 16 System 15000 Removing the Side Panel 00004 2 33 2 17 System 15000 Removing the Front Panel 0 000 000 0008 2 34 2 18 Altos 15000 Main Processor Card and MPX 0 0 0 0 cece ee eee ee 2 35 2 19 Altos 15000 Motherboard and Bus Connectors 0 00 00 00 0000 0 2 36 2 20 Altos 15000 Showing the Hard Disk Bay 0000000000005 2 38 2 21 Altos 15000 Memory Board and Memory Modules 2 39 2 22 System 15000 Expansion Slots 0 0 2 eee eee 2 42 2 23 System 15000 Top Cover Locking Pins 00 0000 e eee 2 44 2 24 Boot Meni ig os selects OA n a See a eA aac cca ahaa adie Soni oes eg eae as 2 47 2225 Main Menus 332 22 sii ool si Ba ae ae E E me elas Ae SLES RA ERS 2 48 2 26 Configure Computer Menu 0 0 eee eee eens 2 48 2 27 EtherLink II Card Jumper Settings 00 0 2 51 2 28 Proteon pl392 Card ois Hed a oo Rak ee aoa I Rare A Ra eos ee el 2 53 2 29 NAU Memory Jumper Locations and Settings 0000 2 55 3 1 DL5600 Front Control Panel 00 0 0 eee eee 3 2 3 2 DL3400 Front Control Panel 00 0 ee eee 3 5 3 3 DL3400 SETUP Mode Opening Menu 00 0
103. 22 30 Preparing the Processors NOTE Before optioning the NAU check the faceplate to determine if this version of the NAU has a Link Integrity Function Switch If it does move the switch to the enabled position If the Star_LAN NAU does not have a Link Integrity Function Switch you must replace the NAU with an EtherLink II card For more information refer to the StarLAN 10 Network PC NAU Installation Guide Figure 2 29 shows the jumper locations and settings for the NAU To implement the setting and install the StarLAN 10 PC NAU perform the following steps 1 2 Use the default IRQ setting of 2 J12 Use the default I O address setting of 360 367 J3 Set the RAM address to C8000 C8FFF Pins 2 amp 3 J6 Set the RAM size to 16 kb J5 Insert the card into Slot 3 Insert the appropriately configured StarLAN 10 NAU into Slot 3 and secure with the chassis screw Insert the Paradise Windows Accelerator video card in the first available slot and secure with a chassis screw Confirm that all SW1 switches are in the OFF position Close the 6386 25 computer cover and reconnect monitor and keyboard cables Insert the Customer Test disk that comes with the 6386 25 This disk will be used to reformat the hard disk Start the 6386 25 and the computer will boot from the Customer Test disk The Customer Diagnostics introduction screen is displayed PRESS Enter
104. 3 Connecting Locally ieser anrea E Sai wea GE T r Sat 4 43 Connecting Remotely 0 eee cece eee 4 44 Automatic Trouble Report Feature 0 0 cece eee eee eee 4 45 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System ACCUMASTER Integrator 2 0 0 cece a 4 46 Connecting Locally sss ates eee GN oe SEE GS OS a eee 4 46 Connecting Remotely 0 0 cece eee eee 4 48 ANALYSIS Network Management System 00 0000 4 50 Connecting Locally pcs ace Seu ee Sen ie eee ee eee Pee eS 4 50 Connecting the ANALYSIS 6510 5605 0 00005 4 51 Connecting the ANALYSIS 5600 0 0 0 0 00 000 4 51 Connecting Remotely 0 eect ene ee 4 52 Connecting the ANALYSIS 6510 5605 0000 4 53 Connecting the ANALYSIS 5600 000 000 0000 0 4 53 StarKeeper Network Management System 000 00004 4 54 Connecting Locally io oss Ag hia edie a Abed a hase ated bogota 4 54 Connecting Remotely 0 0 cee eee 4 55 Bytex UMS aieeaa ef etter a ee es EES OSE EE La Oe es Be 4 56 Connecting the Host Processor to the Bytex UMS 4 57 Connecting the UIP to the Bytex UMS 0000 4 58 Overview This chapter provides step by step instructions for connecting the following components to the host processor and or when appropriate to the UIP e The system console e Full Fe
105. 40 01 Figure 8 2 SDX Main Menu 4 Torun the system confidence tests TYPE r PRESS Enter The following message appears If there is a tape drive present insert the tape cartridge and hit a lt CR gt to continue 5 Insert a blank cartridge tape and PRESS Enter The test sequence will start The tests will take several minutes To stop an individual test at any time PRESS Esc When the tests finish the system displays Do you wish to review summary again y n TYPE y The System Confidence Tests Summary is displayed PRESS Enter for subsequent pages All the tests are pass fail If any of the tests report Failed instead of Passed you have a hardware problem If after rebooting either system and running the SDX program again an identical failure occurs contact your service representative For a list of the SDX confidence tests see your Altos System Owner s Guide After you return the program to the Main Menu you can exit SDX However first remove the SDX diskette and cartridge tape Then TYPE x PRESS Enter to exit PRESS any key to reboot The system automatically reboots 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 8 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System StarLAN 10 NAU Diagnostic Program To test the StarLAN 10 NAU you need the disk entitled StarLAN 10 Network NAU Diagnostics that is shipped with the card To run this diagnostic program you must power down the Altos System 5000
106. 5 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Overview This chapter describes how and when to install the required software for the host processor User Interface Processor UIP full feature workstations and basic feature workstations 6800 NMS Application Software This package is installed in the host processor during system manufacture for the Altos 5000 platform Installation of this software on the 15000 platform must be done at the customer site Additionally you may also need to reload the application software to recover from a hard disk failure or when upgrading to a different release MPX Multiprocessing Software This software is installed on the Altos 15000 host processor to support the multiple 486 processors and must be done at the customer site for both new and existing 15000 platforms You may need to reload this software when recovering from a hard disk failure 6800 UIP Application Software This software is loaded on the User Interface Processor UIP during system manufacture You will need to reload and reconfigure it when you are adding the optional IPC 1600 card to the UIP You may also need to reload this software to recover from a hard disk failure or when upgrading to a different release PTF Software This software is loaded at the customer site It includes PTF 4 2 1 which provides an update for existing NMS and UIP applications and ACCULINK Network Manager ANM 4 3 0 which provides ACCULINK mul
107. 600 as the system printer It has a parallel interface Fujitsu DX2300 The Fujitsu DX2300 can be used as either the alert log printer or dedicated ATR Automatic Trouble Report printer The alert log printer prints out the alerts sent from devices monitored by the NMS The dedicated ATR printer prints out the automatic trouble reports that are sent to the Paradyne technical assistance center It has a serial interface C ITOH C 240 The C ITOH C 240 replaces the Fujitsu DX2300 as the alert log printer or dedicated ATR Automatic Trouble Report printer The alert log printer prints out the alerts sent from devices monitored by the NMS The dedicated ATR printer prints out the automatic trouble reports that are sent to the Paradyne technical assistance center It has serial and parallel interfaces Additionally the C ITOH C 240 can be used as a local copy printer For more information refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Local Copy Printer Support Feature Document Number 6800 A2 GZ47 Before the printers can be connected to the host processor some of their default settings must be modified to satisfy NMS requirements The pages that follow explain how to do this For instructions on connecting these printers to the host processor see Chapter 4 Connecting the Components 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Fujitsu DL5600 The Fujitsu DL5600 is a multicolor dot
108. 6286 models as basic feature workstations Refer to Chapter 1 ntroduction for a complete model list The host processor supports up to three basic feature workstations The fourth basic feature workstation if it is to be used simultaneously must be connected to the UIP To support additional basic feature workstations from the UIP the optional IPC 1600 card may be required Figure 4 10 shows this configuration 4 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Host Processor Basic Feature Workstations IPC 1600 Card Network Hub Unit User Interface Processor Ol Basic Feature ol Workstations IPC 1600 493 13902a 01 Card Figure 4 10 Basic Feature Workstation Configurations 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Host Processor or UIP ALTOS 486DX 33 ALTOS X 20 035 0153 0031 AT amp T 6386SX EL AT amp T 6386 035 0153 0031 AT amp T 6286 ALTOS 486DX 33 ALTOS SX 20 AT amp T 6386SX EL 035 0153 0031 AT amp T 6386 035 0153 0031 AT amp T 6286 035 0149 2531 035 0153 0031 pee el o ALTOS 486DX 33 ALTOS X 20 AT amp T 6386SX EL IPC 1600 Card 835 3564 2511 DCE Interface HME 002 0054 0031 Connector AT amp T 6386 AT amp T 6286 CL 002 0039 0031 Connector LI 002 0047 0031 Connector 493 13903
109. 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers Fujitsu DL3400 The Fujitsu DL3400 is a multicolor 24 pin dot matrix printer This printer communicates with the host processor through a parallel Centronics interface The interface cable receptacle is positioned at the right rear corner of the printer To modify the default settings you use the buttons on the front control panel This panel is shown in Figure 3 2 To modify the default settings perform the following steps 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and plug the power cable into an outlet but do not turn the power on yet Load 13 5 inch wide continuous form paper into the printer For detailed instructions consult the Fujitsu DL3300 3400 Printer User s Manual that comes with the machine 2 To modify the printer s default settings you must be in SETUP mode To put the printer in SETUP mode press the MODE button on the front control panel and while continuing to hold the MODE button down turn the printer s power on The MODE indicator on the front panel will light and the SETUP mode opening menu will be printed This menu is shown in Figure 3 3 to view the menu pull the clear plastic front cover completely forward 3 SETUP mode consists of a number of functions The first function is referred to as MENU1 To access this function press the MODE button until the cursor is positioned next to MENU1 The MENU function consists of 22 individual print
110. 719 NETWORKER and or 10 pin 25 pin 002 0021 0031 25 pin Sub D female 740 745 multiplexer qa EE 6 10 position connection to event and 3 lt multiplexer adapter command ports on 6800 oe a eee 5 22 Feature Soe eal 4 lt gt 20 035 0153 0031 cable 7 6821 F1 503 Jea gt C 35 gt gt 3 fess o Ss 5 gt 2 8 lt gt 5 Q EnEn gt 4 10 lt gt 1 Part 6 pin modular cable to Connects control channel to 25 pin 6 pin 002 0025 0031 25 pin Sub D female any Model 2 device Dio eS es 5 873A Bp et eee gt 3 Feature 42 gt 1 6821 F 1 513 OSs SSeS gt 2 a a gt 4 Part 8 pin modular jack to 4400 Series SRC to 6800 8 pin 25 pin 002 0032 0031 25 pin Sub D female connection Connects to by Se eae gt 3 355AF connector 035 0152 0031 cable 2 lt gt 2 Feature 3 lt gt 20 6821 F 1 526 fa Pa gt 8 gt 6 gt 5 1 lt gt 22 4 lt 2 5 gt gt gt gt 7 Part 25 pin male Sub D Used in System Controller 8 pin 25 pin 002 0037 0031 cable to 8 pin keyed database migration Aicee E s4 8 position terminal modular jack o EEEN E S4 printer adapter 2S Se 3 Feature 4 lt gt 8 6821 F 1 531 Sees SSeS gt 2 6 lt gt 20 T al i gt 7 8 lt gt 5 B 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Adapter and Cable Identification Table B 1 3 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Part Number ANALYSIS 6510 5605 5600 connection to 6800 C
111. 800 A2 GB33 6800 A2 GE26 690 23502 002 690 25428 002 B 69292 F I Rev D B 69337 Rev A B 69431 Rev C PT1050954 00 Rev C PT1050956 00 Rev A E1 300 34H 62FH 5009E 02 42 040295 00 Rev C COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 3270 Terminal Emulation Option Supplement COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide Altos System 5000 Owner s Guide Altos System 10000 15000 Owner s Guide Fujitsu DX2300 2400 Printers User s Manual Type F Fujitsu DL5600 Dot Matrix Printer User s Manual Fujitsu DL3300 3400 Printers User s Manual DCP MUXi Installation Guide DCP 286 i Installation Guide C 240 245 User s Manual Fujitsu DL3600 User s and Programmer s Manual ProNet 4 16 Network Interface Cards User Guide 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 xiii Introduction OVETVIEW 2 ste nhs wakes bala kalo ee why ba oho neh ees 1 1 Sel cting a Sites ie daa rei Sawa ho Reb nes wey teed ploa 1 5 Gontentsi List ue eee ls ee eM ee aol ee ee tail Makes el 1 6 Overview The COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NMS manages Analog Private Line APL modems switched network modems Data Service Units DSUs and ACCULINK multiplexers The Release 4 2 NMS provides two areas of improvement over previous releases increased database a
112. 97 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration Device Model Serial Number Circuit Name Site Name All letters are converted to uppercase All characters except numbers periods and hyphens are converted to hyphens and successive hyphens are converted to a single hyphen All letters are converted to lowercase All characters except numbers periods and hyphens are converted to hyphens and successive hyphens are converted to a single hyphen If two devices are connected they should have the same circuit name This allows facility profiles to be created for connections which causes the connections to be displayed on the network map A site name can contain any character except the following Space Asterisk Comma Question Mark Hyphen Exclamation Mark Quotation Mark Back slash All letters are converted to lowercase All other characters except numbers periods and hyphens are converted to hyphens and successive hyphens are converted to a single hyphen The site name should be spelled uniformly in all profiles and special attention should be given to the use of spaces and hyphens Otherwise more than one site profile may be created for the same site For example HoustonTX becomes houstontx Houston TX becomes houston tx Houston Tex becomes houston tex Distinct site names should be used whenever devices have different site contact phone num
113. After the ANALYSIS Gateway software is initialized the UNIX prompt appears At this prompt TYPE su Mnms PRESS Enter 2 The Network Management System Menu appears Select Start the system TYPE 1 PRESS Enter 3 When prompted to continue PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 93 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 4 The Network Management System Menu appears TYPE 11 PRESS Enter 5 The UNIX login prompt appears TYPE ffw PRESS Enter 6 When the NMS login screen appears logon as admin 7 Select Utilities from the Tasks menu and then select UNIX from Utilities menu A UNIX window appears 8 At the UNIX prompt TYPE ust nms RNMS bin DCE config65 10 PRESS Enter 9 After reading the database the system displays an ANALYSIS Selection menu Figure 5 9 The letter n represents the number of ANALYSIS systems already installed Maximum ANALYSIS 6510s supported 6 n Analysis 6510 s already installed Do you wish to Add a 6510 to the system Remove a 6510 from the system Change a 6510 s parameters Exit program Enter a number from 1 4 492 13958 01 Figure 5 9 ANALYSIS Selection Menu 5 94 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Adding a 6510 to the 6800 Series NMS The following procedure provides information on adding a 6510 configuration to the 6800 Series NMS 1 To add a new 6510 you must enter a name a port num
114. C 900 diagnostic onto the newly formatted disk To copy the diagnostic device drivers and programs at the A gt prompt TYPE copy a b a The system prompts you to insert a disk in the drive Insert the disk entitled Intelligent Ports Card MS DOS Device Drivers and Diagnostics Version 3 09 into the drive and PRESS Enter b The system will eventually prompt you to insert a disk in Drive B Remove the diagnostic disk insert the newly formatted disk into the same drive and PRESS Enter Steps a and b will alternate until the entire disk has been copied 8 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Running Diagnostics 8 11 You now have to create a config sys file to allow the IPC device drivers to be automatically loaded when the system is booted To do this at the A gt prompt TYPE copy con config sys The cursor will advance to the next line and await input At this point whatever you type on the keyboard will be put into a buffer and then written to a file named config sys Enter the following lines into the config sys file TYPE device ipcl6dos sys buffers 10 files 20 and PRESS Enter after each line When complete PRESS lt F6 gt PRESS Enter to signal end of input Z will appear on the display With the newly created diagnostic disk in the drive boot the system to load the device drivers For the Altos 5000 Figure 8 1 select Option 2 at the Boot Menu to boot from the floppy
115. CCUMASTER Integrator Figure 4 24 to the host processor you will need the following materials e Three 035 0153 0031 cables e Three 002 0039 0031 connectors e Two DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous Full duplex Flow control ON Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 bps e Three 835 5783 0011 cables Host Processor Port Configured age oe UIs OUST oa 0153 0031 a 88557830011 5783 0011 for UAI Port Configured 035 0153 0031 tor Remote lt aq _ 835 5783 0011 p Terminal Port Configured for File Export PPPE EAEAN 0153 0031 m i aeon 835 5783 0011 ACCUMASTER IPC 1600 INTEGRATOR Card 491 13916 CL 002 0039 0031 Connector M DCE Interface Figure 4 24 ACCUMASTER Integrator Remote Connection 4 48 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components To establish the file export connection perform the following steps at the host processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured for file export 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE device To establish the UAI connection perform the following steps at the host processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured for the UAI 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the
116. Connect the 002 0039 0031 or 002 0053 0031 connector to the 002 0040 0031 or 002 0053 0031 connector to link the two ports 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 8 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System MALE TO FEMALE Null MODEM 035 0153 0031 FEMALE TO MALE Null MODEM 035 0153 0031 491 13284 Figure 8 4 Port to Port Connections d Torun the test TYPE SPIOTEST SIOx SIOy Where SIOx represents the ID number of the transmitting port and SIOy represents the ID number of the receiving port PRESS Enter e When the test is finished you will be returned to the MS DOS operating system If the system hangs while running this test you will have to reboot Then check to see that the driver is properly installed and the cabling is correct 12 The third diagnostic tests the transmit circuit of a particular serial port If the previous test produced a negative result you can use this test to determine the functionality of the transmit circuit To run this test you must have a terminal connected to a port as described in the first test Once you have this perform the following steps a Torun the test TYPE CTEST SIOx Where SIOx is the ID number of the transmitting port PRESS Enter b When the test is finished you will be returned to the MS DOS operating system 8 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Running Diagnostics IPC 1600 Diagnostic Program The IPC 1600 diagnostic consists of six test
117. ERIAL SERIAL Network Printer Compatible with a single DCP MUXi only 8 control channels 494 13051b 04 Figure 1 1 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports and UIP 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 1 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation AT amp T Mail Alert Log Printer or NetView PC ACCULINK Multiplexer ACCULINK Multiplexer Command and Event Interface Automatic Trouble Report Interface UAI AMI Alarms AMI File Export UUCP C 839A Dial Backup System Controller Monitor Keyboard Mouse H z l E l P T o el Hi ALTOS s K 5 i A SYSTEM y 7 15000 6 N A g ol JENN Host o 0 x C a i PARALLEL SERIAL frit DCX Multiplexer Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation AT amp T Mail Basic Feature Workstations
118. ESS Enter 13 To continue TYPE y PRESS Enter 14 To continue TYPE c PRESS Enter The following message appears xxxx Data Base Initialization xxxx followed by several console messages indicating the initialization of the INFORMIX OnLine Once completed the following message appears xxxx Data Base Initialization Completed xxxx XXXXXXXXXXXXXxxxStarting Database migrationxxxxxxxxxxxx The database restore consists of files directories used with the INFORMIX database and the INFORMIX database itself To perform a database restore the NMS system must not be running Checking NMS system please wait Please insert tape labeled Database Files Directories Backup Type c to continue or q to quit and then press Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 37 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 15 Insert the proper tape in the cartridge drive and TYPE c PRESS Enter The following messages appear Checking files directories please wait Removing old files directories please wait Restoring files directories please wait Restore of files directories completed Please remove tape and insert the tape containing the INFORMIX database backup Remove the tape labeled Database Files Directories Backup and insert the INFORMIX database backup tape in the cartridge drive The system prompts Press Return to continue PRESS Return Select the following options und
119. Enter NOTE Consult your Network Administrator to determine if values other than the default are to be entered for the Internet address netmask broadcast address and DOMAIN name The following steps assume that the defaults are used except where otherwise required The system prompts Please enter the following information in order to configure pro0 Enter the internet address of this interface TYPE internet address in the form nnn nnn nnn nnn Where nnn is a number from 1 to 255 PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the netmask for this interface default 255 255 0 0 PRESS Enter 5 38 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The system prompts Does the interface use a broadcast address of all 1 s y n default y PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the broadcast address for this interface default nnn 255 255 255 PRESS Enter The system asks for verification of the previously entered values Interface Address Netmask Broadcast Address Are these values correct y n If the values are not correct respond n The system returns to Step 12 If the values are correct TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter DOMAIN name for node name or enter return to net COM PRESS Enter to select net com The system prompts nn Pseudo ttys are currently configured do you want to 1 Add Pseudo tty 2 Remove Pseud
120. Enter Create a password for the ffw login You can choose your own password for the login or let the installation program generate one for you The default is no password PRESS Enter The system prompts for a new password Choose to enter your own password TYPE the password you want PRESS Enter TYPE the same password again PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 23 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 11 Create a password for the nms login You can choose your own password for the login or let the installation program generate one for you The default is startmenu PRESS Enter The system prompts for a new password Enter the default or choose a new password TYPE the password you want PRESS Enter TYPE the same password again PRESS Enter A message then appears telling you that the preinstallation phase of the installation is complete At this point you are ready to begin the actual installation of the Release 4 2 software The system displays the following prompt Insert the cartridge tape containing the NMS system files Type install when ready or q to quit Ignore the request to insert the tape You have already inserted Volume 6 and Volume 7 TYPE install PRESS Enter The installation begins It will take about ten minutes As the installation ensues a series of status messages appears on your screen indicating the specific installation and post insta
121. Fifth and Sixth Full Feature Workstations To install a fourth fifth and sixth full feature workstation you will have to connect each workstation to the network hub Figure 4 6 shows what the network will look like with the additional workstations To connect the fourth fifth and or sixth full feature workstations you will need one modular cable 035 0116 5031 for each workstation When you have this equipment perform the following steps 1 Connect one end of the 035 0116 5031 cable to the jack on the EtherLink II card in a full feature workstation as shown in Figure 4 6 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0116 5031 cable to a port on the network hub unit 3 Repeat this procedure for each of the other two full feature workstations if necessary Host Processor Network Hub Unit Ethernet Card User Interface Processor 035 0116 5031 Ethernet Card 035 0116 5031 Console Console Full Feature Full Feature Workstation Workstation 035 0116 5031 EtherLink II Card Full Feature Workstation 494 13900a 02 Figure 4 6 Local Area Network with Additional Full Feature Workstations 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Altos 15000 Full Feature Workstation Configuration The COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS on an Altos 15000 can have up to 24 full feature workstations The system console on the host cannot be use
122. HERE 6800 Series Network Management System User Documentation in addition to this manual COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Configuration Guide COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Management and Configuration Guide COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Command Reference Manual COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Command Quick Reference Guide COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 3270 Terminal Emulation Option Manual COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Reports and Trouble Tracking Customization Guide 3Com EtherLink II 16 TP and EtherLink I 16 Adapter Guide Full Feature Workstations Altos 486DX 33 processor Ethernet Hub Unit required to support Altos SX 20 or any 386 processor supported by users of previous NMS releases which may include e One StarLAN 10 Network Access Unit optional for users of previous NMS releases Basic Feature Workstations Altos 486DX Altos SX 20 or any processor supported by the previous NMS releases as follows e AT amp T 6386SX EL 6386 SX 6386 WGS 6286 WGS 6312 WGS 6300 WGS with associ
123. Installable Circuit Cards 2 30 2 6 IPC 1600 Memory Switch Settings DSD 0 000 000 0000 2 40 2 7 DCP MUXI I O Address Switch Settings 00 0000 2 41 228 Contipuration Piles Misti Mitte Gel eh Pa EY oe ae hae ees 2 46 2 9 Token Ring I O Address Switch Setting 00 0 0 ee eee eee 2 52 2 10 6386 25 Circuit Cards to Be Removed 0 eee ee eee 2 54 3 1 DL3600 MENUI Settings 0 0 0 2 ee eee 3 10 3 2 DL3600 HARDWARE Settings 0 0 00 eee 3 11 3 3 Memory Card DIP Switch Settings 00 00 eee ee eee 3 14 3 4 Serial Interface Card Settings Switches 1 5 eee 3 16 3 5 Serial Interface Card Settings Switches 6 8 0 0 0 0 0c 3 16 3 6 C ITOH C 240 Setting Changes 0 0 0 0 ce eee 3 17 3 7 Printer Functions Printout 00 0 eee eee 3 18 4 1 Cascaded Hub Cable Modifications 0 0 0 eee eee eee 4 14 4 2 NMS Printer Models 0 0 eee cece eee nee 4 18 5 1 Altos 5000 Basic Network Configuration Parameters 004 5 4 5 2 Altos 15000 Basic Network Configuration Parameters 0005 5 5 5 3 NMS Parameters Menu Options 00 0 0 eee eee eee 5 29 6 1 Host Processor Start Up Reset and Shutdown Modifications 6 1 6 2 UIP Start Up and Shutdown 0 cee eens 6 1 A 1 Modem Hardware and Configuration O
124. KER To connect the pre 3 K version of the 719 NETWORKER the following materials are required e Two 035 0153 0031 cables e 002 0039 0031 connector e 002 0021 0031 connector To connect the 719 NETWORKER to the host processor perform the following steps 1 Connect one end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured as the event port 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0021 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0021 0031 connector to any unused data channel port on the 719 NETWORKER 4 Connect one end of the other 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured as the external systems port 5 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to a 002 0039 0031 connector 6 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to an unused data channel port on the 719 NETWORKER 4 34 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components To support the command port connect the 719 NETWORKER to the 74x multiplexer as follows Connecting the 719 NETWORKER to the 74x Multiplexer The connection between the 74x multiplexer and the 719 NETWORKER serves as the external supervisory data link SDL for transmitting alert and supervisory information between the network and the host processor This is only used when a pre 3 K version of the 719 NETWORKER is used with the 74x multiplexer To connect a 719 NETWORKER to a 74x multiplexer you will need an 835 5783 0011 cable To establi
125. Management System 20 The system prompts Select network configuration 1 Grafpoint s own built in TCP IP 2 FTP Software s PC TCP 3 Sun Microsystem s PC NFS ver s 3 5 3 9 4 Beame and Whiteside BW TCP 5 Woolongong s Pathway TCP Enter selection of q to Quit 1 PRESS Enter 21 The system then prompts Select Network Interface 9 Packet Driver Enter selection or q to Quit TYPE 9 PRESS Enter Will you be using more than one Network board in your machine with more than one packet driver loaded y n q n PRESS Enter NOTE If you are using basic network configuration check the IP address in Table 5 1 Otherwise consult with your System Administrator to ensure entering the correct IP address Enter this system s IP address TYPE IP address in format xxx xxx xxx xxx where xxx is a number from 1 to 255 inclusive PRESS Enter NOTE Consult with Network Administrator to verify correct subnet mask Enter a subnet mask 255 0 0 0 PRESS Enter 5 74 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 22 23 24 25 26 The system asks Would you like to specify your gateway entries now y n q n PRESS Enter Would you like to add a name server y n n PRESS Enter If a HOSTS file does not exist please specify the path where it will reside Default C XONE HOSTS PRESS Enter The s
126. N22 30 Introduction Selecting A Site Select a site that provides easy access for cabling to the network and also provides adequate work area for the system operators The site should meet the following environmental conditions e Temperature 40 F to 90 F 5 C to 32 C e Humidity 20 to 80 noncondensing e Power Input voltage range is determined by a voltage selection switch on the rear panel of the chassis The switch can be set manually to either 115 Vac or 230 Vac Power output 395 watts for System 5000 Power output 420 500 watts for System 15000 Power supply fuse type internal only rating 1OA 250V e Physical Specifications Altos System 5000 Height 26 5 inches 67 3 cm Width 8 inches 20 3 cm Depth 19 inches 48 3 cm Weight 75 lbs Altos System 15000 Height 26 5 inches 67 3 cm Width 16 inches 40 6 cm Depth 19 inches 48 3 cm Weight 90 Ibs 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 1 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Contents List The following hardware and software are supported by the 6800 Series NMS Host Altos System 15000 Four 16 Mb ECC memory modules Three 520 Mb SCSI II hard disk drives 150 Mb SCSI cartridge tape drive 3 5 inch floppy drive VGA controller card Ethernet Interface IPC 1600 ports card Two DCP MUXi cards PS 2 mouse AT keyboard Host Altos System 5000 33 Eight 4 Mb SIMMs Two 520 Mb SCSI hard disk drives 150 Mb SCSI cart
127. NMS full feature workstation needs to know about the other processors on the network that it will communicate with This information is stored in a file KONE HOSTS which must contain the name of each processor and its associated IP address To configure the full feature workstation for proper communication on the LAN you must do the following 1 If using the basic network configuration for the Altos 5000 platform supplied with the NMS TYPE COPY XONE WS BAS XONE HOSTS PRESS Enter Stop here There are no further steps in the basic network configuration process 5 82 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 2 If configuring any Altos 15000 or customizing your network configuration for an Altos 5000 or connecting to an existing LAN consult your Network Administrator for valid IP address information and perform the following steps TYPE EDIT XONE HOSTS PRESS Enter Add the IP address and NMS host processor name to the KONE HOSTS file in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn host name Where nnn is a number from to 255 inclusive and host name is the name of the NMS host processor Ifthe full feature workstation is to communicate with a UIP add the IP address and UIP name to the KONE HOSTS file in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn host name Where nnn is a number from to 255 inclusive and host name is the name of the NMS host processor NOTE For the 15000 platform the division of f
128. NMS host processor or UIP perform the following steps 1 At the prompt initiate a shutdown and automatic reboot by entering the following commands TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE shutdown g0 y i6 PRESS Enter The system reboots at the following message Type CONTROL d to proceed with normal startup or give root password to enter system maintenance TYPE root password PRESS Enter When the UNIX root prompt appears TYPE custom PRESS Enter The custom installation menu displaying Products Currently Installed appears The command Install should be highlighted at the top of the screen If it is not use the Ii keys to highlight it and PRESS Enter The product selection menu appears Using the IT keys select A New Product and PRESS Enter The install option menu appears Select Entire Product and PRESS Enter Insert the Token Ring Host UIP Application floppy into the floppy drive when instructed to by the custom installation procedure and PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 35 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NOTE Messages indicating that the link kit is only partially installed may be ignored Press Enter if required to by such messages 7 The system asks you to insert the requested volume Do not remove the Token Ring Host UIP Application floppy leave it in the floppy disk drive and PRESS Enter 8 When all files a
129. OL d to proceed with normal start up or give root password for system maintenance 2 To select normal start up press the Ctrl and d keys simultaneously 3 The boot process will continue When the system has fully booted the login prompt will appear on your screen Starting the NMS Application Program Once UNIX has been started you can start the NMS application program To do so perform the following steps 1 At the login prompt TYPE nms PRESS Enter 2 In response the Password prompt will appear TYPE the NMS password the default password is startmenu PRESS Enter The Network Management System Menu is displayed as shown in Figure 6 1 Network Management System Select Start the system Stop the system System status Backup system database Restore system database Enable Disable auto start Change password Download modem firmware file Shutdown UNIX Install PTF Return to Console login Enter Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 491 13839 Figure 6 1 Network Management System Menu 6 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 System Start Up and Shutdown 3 To select Start the system TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The following message displays indicating that the NMS start up was successful Starting the AT amp T Paradyne NMS system Please wait Performing database error check Database error check is continuing please wait Database error check has been completed The AT amp T Paradyne NMS system has
130. OMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installing the Second and Third Hard Disks in the System 15000 To physically install the second and third hard disks in the System 15000 chassis refer to Figure 2 20 and perform the following steps for each disk 1 Attach the 3 5 mounting brackets to the side of the disk 2 Slide the drive into the chassis and attach the SCSI bus ribbon cable using the next connector available on the cable to the 50 pin connector on the drive 3 Attach the power connector to the 4 pin connector on the drive 4 Push the drive into the chassis until it is fully seated and the mounting brackets lock in the chassis 3rd Hard Drive 2nd Hard Drive 1st Hard Drive 494 14509 01 Figure 2 20 Altos 15000 Showing the Hard Disk Bay 2 38 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Installing Additional Memory on the System 15000 Running the NMS requires 64 Mb of memory on the System 15000 The 15000 comes with one 16 Mb module installed Three additional 16 Mb modules must be installed on the memory board see Figure 2 21 NOTE If all four memory modules are not available or working you may on a temporary emergency basis have to use fewer than four The memory banks must be filled in sequence starting with B
131. P MUXi card allows isolation of the diagnostic test to four areas of card operation Selection of any one of these test areas causes a submenu to display with additional selections that test only a specific function of that card area To run the diagnostic program that comes with the Emulex DCP MUXi card you need the disk entitled DCPMUXI Diagnostic that is shipped with the card and a bootable MS DOS disk With these items you can perform the diagnostic program If UNIX is running shut down UNIX using the Shutdown procedure in Chapter 6 The Altos 5000 and Altos 15000 systems do not have the same power up procedure This difference is accommodated in Step 1 1 For the Altos 15000 system insert the bootable disk containing MS DOS and power on the system To do this move the RESET RUN key on the front panel clockwise from RESET to RUN Proceed to Step 4 For the Altos 5000 system insert the bootable MS DOS disk into the disk drive and move the RESET RUN key on the front panel clockwise to the RUN position to reboot the System 5000 if the System 5000 is turned off at this point move the power switch on the rear panel to the ON position instead The System 5000 will run through its normal power up sequence and display the following message Press spacebar to interrupt autoboot 2 PRESS the spacebar immediately The Boot Menu appears see Figure 8 1 3 Select Option 2 to boot from the floppy 4 Once the system has booted insert the d
132. PE 2 PRESS Enter to select Initialize NMS Database The following message appears Do you wish to initialize the NMS database y n n To initialize the NMS database TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears WARNING Initializing the NMS database will replace it with default values Hit lt ENTER gt to continue or lt q gt to quit To continue with the migration process PRESS Enter The menu shown in Figure 7 8 will appear If there is a database from Release 4 0 to be converted to Release 4 2 format TYPE 3 PRESS Enter to select Include Migration Data The following message appears Do you wish to include migration data from a previous NMS y n n To proceed TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears Enter the previous NMS type sc r1 r2 r3 r3 1 r4 r4 1 Enter the appropriate type TYPE r4 PRESS Enter 7 36 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration The original menu Figure 7 8 appears with the selected type in parentheses after Option 3 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition 2 Initialize NMS Database 3 Include Migration Data R4 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices cont To Continue quit To abort If you wish to modify the NMS parameters Enter number 1 2 3 4 cont or quit 493 13960b 01 Figure 7 8 Original Menu Showing Selected Type R4 12 To rebuild the NMS database indices TYPE 4 PR
133. PHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 3 TYPE 2 no Enter necessary Several status messages appear followed by the prompt Boot 4 To begin the automatic boot process PRESS Enter Several status messages appear followed by Insert Volume 2 Floppy and Volume 3 Cartridge Tape and press lt Return gt 5 Remove the Volume 1 floppy and insert the required floppy and tape then PRESS Enter Several status messages appear followed by the menu in Figure 5 3 This is a completely automated installation procedure The following options are available 1 Install the Operating System 2 Exit Installation Please enter your choice 1 2 494 13955 01 Figure 5 3 Installation Procedure Menu Installing UNIX on Host Computer 5 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Please specify Hardware Configuration 1 Hardware configuration I Single hard disk UIP 2 Hardware configuration II Two or more hard disks NMS HOST 3 Exit Installation Please enter your choice 1 3 494 13956 02 Figure 5 4 Hardware Configuration Menu Installing UNIX on Host Computer 6 To proceed TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The menu in Figure 5 4 appears on a 5000 platform Item 2 reads as follows Hardware Configuration II two hard disks NMS Host 7 For the host computer TYPE 2 PRESS Enter If you are loading an Altos System 15000 the system prompts Enter the SCSI Host Adapter number
134. PRESS Enter The system prompts Select next level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE appropriate number for aaa PRESS Enter 5 32 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The system prompts for confirmation Add chain altos_tcp gt aaa y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The system displays status messages and then request Please enter the following information in order to configure en0 Enter the internet address of this interface TYPE internet address in the form nan nnn nnn nnn Where nnn is an integer from 1 to 255 PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the netmask for this interface default 255 255 0 0 NOTE Consult your System Administrator to determine whether to specify a net mask a broadcast address or DOMAIN name different from the default Choose the default when using the basic network configuration as described in the Network Pre Installation Preparation section PRESS Enter The system prompts Does the interface use a broadcast address of all 1 s y n default y PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the broadcast address for this interface default nnn nnn 255 255 PRESS Enter The system asks for verification of the previously entered values Interface Address Netmask Broadcast Address Are these values correct y n 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 33 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System If the values are not c
135. Removing the Front Panel 2 34 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Installing the MPX Processor The Altos 15000 supports up to four 486 50 modules These modules are attached to the main processor card see Figure 2 18 which plugs into S bus slots on the motherboard see Figure 2 19 The Altos 15000 is shipped with one processor present The second CPU module must be installed at the customer site The Altos 15000 has four S bus slots next to the ten general purpose slots These S bus slots are the four unnumbered slots at the front of the Altos 15000 system unit These slots hold the CPU board and memory boards and each slot is limited to a particular type of board S bus Slot 1 is the front most slot and contains the CPU board holding both CPUs S bus Slot 4 is the fourth slot in from the front and contains the memory board see Figure 2 19 Prior to installing the MPX you must have the following parts e Intel486 DX CPU CACHE Module e Five hexagonal separator posts approximately 7 16 long e Three hexagonal nuts 1 8 in diameter e Five Phillips head screws approximately 3 16 long J5 EFI t Fe ee e A O foo Ji Jl J LJ J 494 14507 01 Figure 2 18 Altos 15000 Main Processor Card and MPX 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 35 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Manage
136. S Main Menu is displayed select Restore system database and follow the steps for performing a System Database Restore as specified in Chapter 4 of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide This action will ensure that the tape produced by the backup in Step 1 is readable as the process of migration will destroy the existing 3 0 3 1 database on disk 3 Do not proceed with the Migration until you have a valid readable Backup Migrating the Database NOTE The NMS application must not be running To migrate the NMS database perform the following steps 1 At the Console Login prompt TYPE root PRESS Enter 2 At the Password prompt TYPE root password PRESS Enter 7 26 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration 3 At the pound sign prompt TYPE ksh usr nms adm installDb PRESS Enter The AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters menu Figure 7 5 appears AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition 2 Initialize NMS Database 3 Include Migration Data 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices cont To Continue quit To abort If you wish to modify the NMS parameters Enter number 1 2 3 4 cont or quit 492 13960 Figure 7 5 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters Menu Release 3 0 3 1 Database Migration 4 Ifthe INFORMIX OnLine partition has not been initialized since NMS installation TYPE 1 PRESS Enter to select Initialize ONLINE Pa
137. SS Enter The formatting process is complete when the following message appears The software installation of the 3rd hard disk is complete 5 Return to multi user mode TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE shutdown g0 y i6 PRESS Enter The system automatically reboots 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 27 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Initializing the NMS Database CAUTION This action destroys the database Do not initialize the database unless this is a first time installation To install the 4 2 Release for the first time you must create and initialize the NMS database To do this perform the following steps 1 TYPE root NOTE You cannot initialize the database from any other login PRESS Enter TYPE root password PRESS Enter 2 Once you are logged in TYPE cd usr nms adm PRESS Enter Then TYPE _ installDb PRESS Enter NOTE Do not reboot the system after executing InstallDb The initialization parameters will be lost Rebooting should be done after the 6800 has been started up for the first time 5 28 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The menu in Figure 5 5 appears AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition 2 Initialize NMS Database 3 Include Migration Data 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices cont To Continue quit To abort 497 13957 01 Figure 5 5 AT amp T Paradyne NMS
138. SVEMM386 EXE 2048 M4 The Paradise Windows Accelerator Video card has been tested with the GrafPoint X One package The Altos 386 SX20 internal video card is incompatible with the GrafPoint X One package and must be replaced The mouse pointer speed may need to be adjusted according to the user s preferences To accomplish this perform the following steps once X One is installed and running 1 PRESS Alt SysRq 2 The X One main menu appears use the YT keys to select the Setup menu item 3 The Setup menu appears select Mouse 4 The Mouse Settings window appears Click the sensitivity level up to increase the mouse speed or click the level down to reduce the speed To exit from the Mouse Settings window click on the exit quit button at the top right of the window 5 Click the right mouse button on the window s top bar and choose quit from the pull down menu NOTE You can also convert the 6820 NMS host processor to a full feature workstation for the 6800 Series NMS See Chapter 7 Performing Migration for details There are many different configurations for the NMS full feature workstation Among the most frequently used configurations are a 386 based or 486 based processor using an EtherLink II card a 386 based or 486 based processor using a StarLAN 10 NAU card or the same processors using a Proteon Token Ring card This section contains multiple independent procedures These procedures must be combined to
139. TR printer can be used locally if the customer requires a duplicate copy of alert reports This local printer is the Fujitsu DX2300 or C ITOH C 240 The diagram in Figure 4 12 illustrates the dedicated ATR printer connection To set up the dedicated ATR printer perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0040 0031 connector to the serial port of the dedicated ATR printer Refer to Appendix A Modem Settings for information on optioning the 3810 38811 3820 or 2224CEO modems 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Data Communications Equipment This section explains how to connect the following data communications equipment to the host processor e DATAPHONE II modems DSUs and multiplexers e COMSPHERE modems and DSUs e ACCULINK multiplexers There are two ways to connect these devices to the host processor e To connect modems and DSUs use the control channels on the DCP MUXi network monitor card s that was installed in the host processor e To connect multiplexers use the serial ports on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor The modems and DSUs connect to the system using the control channels on the DCP MUXi network monitor cards The Altos 5000 platform comes wit
140. The AT amp T Paradyne NMS system has been successfully started Press RETURN to continue 21 To continue PRESS Enter The Release 4 2 6800 NMS Main Menu appears 22 To return to the Console Login prompt TYPE 11 PRESS Enter 23 At the Console Login prompt TYPE nms PRESS Enter TYPE The full feature workstation password PRESS Enter The NMS application is brought up and the NMS login window appears 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 31 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Checking the Migrated Database Following NMS start up the integrity of the migrated data should be verified The following procedures may be executed for that purpose 1 11 Bring up the System Management window and execute the Create Network Map crnm command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for details on all commands Following completion of the Create Network Map crnm command bring up the network map window and inspect the network map visually NOTE Circuit names and device addresses are not displayed on the Release 4 2 network map Device names and site names are displayed Execute the Display Device Profile dsdp command to verify profiles for three devices Verify the accuracy of the information Execute the Display Site Profile dssp command to examine profiles for three sites Verify the accuracy of the information Execute the Displ
141. The console consists of a VGA display unit a standard 101 key keyboard and a mouse These are all attached to ports that are located on the rear panel Figure 4 1 indicates the exact location of each port on the rear panel of the Altos System 5000 Figure 4 2 indicates the exact location of each port on the interior top panel of the System 15000 COM2 Mouse Keyboard Base I O Board COM1 LPT1 Port AGC Video Board Display Unit 491 13855 Figure 4 1 Altos System 5000 Display Unit Keyboard and Mouse Ports 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Mouse Keyboard Display Unit 494 14504 01 Figure 4 2 Altos System 15000 Display Unit Keyboard and Mouse Ports Altos 5000 Full Feature Workstation Configuration A COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS on an Altos System 5000 can have from one to six full feature workstations The first full feature workstation is the display unit and keyboard that comes with the Altos System 5000 This display unit and keyboard serve as both console on the host processor and a full feature workstation NOTE Users of previous releases of NMS should refer to the Full Feature Workstation section of Chapter 2 when setting up full feature workstations whic
142. The multiplexer power supply is plugged in and the ac outlet is on e The multiplexer is connected to the appropriate port on the host processor Command Port Failure Communication between the command port and a multiplexer can fail because of hardware problems in the multiplexer or because of an incorrect network administration port NAP speed Multiplexer Problems The NMS will issue the following alert if the cables to the command port are disconnected power to the multiplexer control processor is lost or the control processor is no longer operational pollpf Multiplexer polling port is down The frequent display of this alert may indicate that the multiplexer is continually resetting itself and a multiplexer hardware problem exists NOTE If other cards for example the channel card fail you will continue to receive alarms and the network will not be disrupted Beyond the first node communication will be handled routinely by the network In general this alert is reported only when communication to the first node is lost When you receive this alert you should perform the following steps 1 Check the hardware connections as described in the section entitled General Troubleshooting Procedures 2 Check the multiplexer communication connection between the node and the host processor To check the link to the first node send out a nondisruptive command such as the Hardware Module Summary hms command If the
143. Utility ECU to configure the System 5000 s resources to match all circuit cards in the system For instructions on how to run the ECU refer to the section EISA Configuration Utility You must load the ANALYSIS Gateway software as described in Chapter 5 Loading and Restoring Software Input Output Controller Memory Interrupt Request IRQ Starting Address Starting Address Level Jumper Switch SW1 Switch SW2 Set to 5 1234567 8 1234567 8 pr Pa a Ma a a OFF OFF 2B0 D2000 491 11591a 01 Push Switch to the Indicated Position gy Figure 2 5 IPC 900 Switch and Jumper Locations 2 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Preinstallation Steps for the 3270 Terminal Emulation Package This upgrade package consists of an Emulex DCP 286i card and an octopus cable assembly that splits the signal from the board to four individual circuits To configure the DCP 286i card refer to Figure 2 6 and perform the following steps 1 2s Set the DIP switch labeled SW1 to the I O address 27C Set the IRQ to 9 by positioning the jumper on the jumper pair labeled 2 on block J6 Block J6 is on the main card near the card edge connector below the bottom of the childboard Setting the jumper for IRQ 2 is the same as setting the IRQ to 9 Change the settings on block J4 shown in Figure 2 6 to set the local processor block enable jumper to disable Move the jumper from block
144. X One Setup is now finished 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 67 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Create a HOSTS file that has the same name as the one you specified before you start X One See the Installation amp Operation Guide for more details X One Install Complete Press any key to continue PRESS Enter Installing the NMS Full Feature Workstation Application Software with EtherLink II Card A special program is provided to help you install the full feature workstation application software on your Altos 486DX 33 Altos SX 20 or a 386 based processor To install the software perform the following steps 1 Turn on your system Insert your working copy of the disk labeled 6800 FFW Application Volume into Drive A At the C gt prompt TYPE cd C VXONE PRESS Enter TYPE a install PRESS Enter The current directory should be AXONE If current directory is not XONE Please break out of the installation by typing Ctrl C Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system displays many messages including the following significant ones Loading fonts Loading configuration script Loading packet driver For further information on installation and startup Please refer to the C VXONEVREADMEE file Installation Completed Determine if the workstation connects to the host or a UIP either uip 1 or uip 2 5 68 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Res
145. a A a bane 4 3 Altos 5000 Full Feature Workstation Configuration 4 4 Connecting the Second Full Feature Workstation 4 6 Connecting the Third Full Feature Workstation 4 8 Connecting the Fourth Fifth and Sixth Full Feature Workstations 4 8 Altos 15000 Full Feature Workstation Configuration 4 10 Connecting the Basic Configuration 0 0 0 0 ee eee 4 10 Connecting Additional Full Feature Workstations 4 11 Cascading Network Hub Units 0 00 cee eee eee ee 4 12 Basic Feature Workstation 0 0 00 cece cece eee ences 4 14 Connecting a Local Altos 486DX 33 an Altos SX 20 or an AT amp T 6386S X EL 3 4 ees bed oe hae ed ote ted Seve ewes Dees 4 16 Connecting a Local AT amp T 6286 or 6386 22 eee ee eee 4 17 Connecting a Remote Altos 486DX 33 an Altos SX 20 or an AT amp T 6386 SXIBD oe eaten ea eee ia kets be aM ee Lede 4 17 Connecting a Remote AT amp T 6286 or 6386 0 eee eee 4 17 Pinters eisrean eee Si eh ee ae 4 18 Connecting a Local System Printer 00 00000000005 4 19 DE3400 DL3600 eri een dea eae ee baa ea wee bee tee 4 19 DES O00 222 8 eds a a ap Rese eae Bad Saas PRINS A ee 4 20 Connecting a Remote System Printer 000 000005 4 20 Connecting an Alert Log Printer 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 4 20 DX2300 0c hee pi ed a a TEARS bos een dte Ss 4 20 CDAD e a
146. abeled DS2 set the IRQ to 11 with switches 1 through 8 2 On the bank labeled DS1 set the I O address to 110 with switches 9 through 11 3 On the bank labeled DS1 set the memory address to FOO000 see Table 2 6 with switches 1 through 8 Table 2 6 IPC 1600 Memory Switch Settings DSI Switches 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON X x x X OFF X X X x 2 40 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors 4 On the jumper labeled J1 check that the jumper is on Pins 2 and 3 to set the local program memory to 16 Kb 5 Follow the instructions under Installing Circuit Cards in the System 15000 to install the IPC 1600 card in Slot 2 of the System 15000 Preinstallation Steps for the DCP MUXi Cards on the System 15000 To prepare the DCP MUXi cards for installation on the System 15000 refer to Figure 2 7 and perform the following steps 1 Remove two jumpers from each card the first at position E32 E33 interrupt request and the second at position E37 E38 transparent mode interrupt You may store a jumper for future use such as running diagnostics by placing it on one pin only 2 Verify that all other jumpers on the cards are as shown in Figure 2 7 3 On the block SW1 set the I O addresses as shown in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 DCP MUXI I O Address Switch Settings Description 1 2 3 4 DCP MUXI 1 Slot 4 on on off off DCP MUXI 2 Slot 5 on on on off
147. al for a UIP connected to an Altos 5000 host An IPC 1600 must be installed on the first UIP which is connected to an Altos 15000 This installation is performed at the customer site Token Ring Package The Token Ring package provides support for customers with sites where there is an existing Token Ring Local Area Network The Token Ring package replaces the standard Ethernet transport layer and supports SNMP trap importation and cut through to X11 R4 applications No preinstallation actions are needed for the Token Ring Network Interface Card but you must install the driver software and run the EISA Configuration Utility 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 25 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Preinstallation Steps for the IPC 1600 Upgrade Card To configure the IPC 1600 card refer to Figure 2 14 and perform the following steps 1 On the bank labeled DS1 set the memory address to E10000 with switches 1 through 8 2 On the bank labeled DS1 set the I O address to 110 with switches 9 through 11 3 On the bank labeled DS2 set the IRQ to 11 with switches 1 through 8 4 On the jumper labeled J1 check that the jumper is on Pins 2 and 3 to set the local program memory to 16 kb 5 Follow the instructions under Field Upgrade Procedures to install the IPC 1600 card in Slot 8 of the UIP 6 Once you have installed the card you must run the EISA Configuration Utility to configure the System 5000 s resources to match t
148. ank 1 upwards Bank 3 Bank 1 l l Bank 4 Bank 2 494 14510 Figure 2 21 Altos 15000 Memory Board and Memory Modules To install the three memory modules refer to Figure 2 21 and perform the following steps 1 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the memory board from S bus Slot 4 by unscrewing the board s metal bracket from the chassis and sliding the board out Save the screw for later 2 Position each memory module with the connector just meeting the pins on the board Be careful not to bend any pins Press firmly until the module is properly seated 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 39 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NOTE The memory module can be installed in two possible ways The correct way does not interfere with either the metal bracket on the board or any other memory module If you have any such contact between modules or with the metal bracket gently remove the module reverse it and reinstall 3 Slide the memory board into the slot from which it came ensuring that the board s connectors are firmly seated in the bus slots 4 Using the saved screw reattach the memory board s metal bracket to the chassis Preinstallation Steps for the IPC 1600 Card on the System 15000 To configure the IPC 1600 card refer to Figure 2 14 and perform the following steps 1 On the bank l
149. anuary 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 System Start Up and Shutdown Overview Overview Starting UNIX on the Host Starting the NMS Application Program Shutting Down the NMS Application Program Shutting Down UNIX on the Host Starting UNIX on the UIP Starting the UIP Application Program Shutting Down the UIP Application Program Shutting Down UNIX on the UIP This chapter provides the start up reset and shutdown procedures for the host processor and the UIP As shown in Table 6 1 and Table 6 2 each procedure involves a two step process Table 6 1 Host Processor Start Up Reset and Shutdown Modifications Host Start up Host Reset Host Shutdown Step 1 Start UNIX Step 1 Shut Down NMS Step 1 Shut Down NMS Step 2 Start NMS Step 2 Start NMS Step 2 Shut Down UNIX Table 6 2 UIP Start Up and Shutdown UIP Start Up UIP Shutdown Step 1 Start UNIX Step 1 Shut Down UIP Step 2 Start UIP Step 2 Shut Down UNIX 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 6 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Starting UNIX on the Host To start the UNIX operating system perform the following steps 1 With the RESET key in the RUN position turn on the power switch on the host processor The UNIX system will proceed to boot and as it boots it will display a series of self check and diagnostic messages on the console screen After these messages have displayed the following message will appear Type CONTR
150. are phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 B COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Notices WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT
151. are using a p189x or p199x board you must configure the board using the system s reference disk If you are using a p139x board command line options are used to configure the iobase interrupt vector etc This utility will help you by editing these command line options into the config sys file for you Press ENTER to continue ESCAPE to go back to previous selections To continue PRESS Enter The selection menu for board type appears Select the type of board you are using p139x p1390 p1391 or p1392 p189x p1890 or p1892 p199x p1990 Using the 17 keys select p139x p1390 p1391 or p1392 and PRESS Enter The system prompts for the Interrupt Vector with a default of 5 PRESS Enter The system prompts for the DMA Channel with a default of 5 PRESS Enter The system prompts for the Base I O Address with a default of 0A20 PRESS Enter The system prompt for transmission speed Use the LT keys to select either 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps depending on the speed of any existing Token Ring network or the site standard and PRESS Enter The system prompts for the type of cable you are using Use the JT keys to select either UTP for unshielded twisted pair or STP for shielded twisted pair depending on whether you have installed the RJ45 cable or the Token Ring coaxial cable and PRESS Enter A confirmation window appears for the preceding selected values and the system prompts Satisfied wi
152. ary 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components To establish the file export connection that will provide device profile site profile and facility profile information perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured for file export Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0040 0031 connector Connect the 002 0040 0031 connector to the appropriate port on the ACCUMASTER Integrator To establish the UAI connection that will transmit alarms perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured for UAI Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0040 0031 connector Connect the 002 0040 0031 connector to the appropriate port on the ACCUMASTER Integrator To establish the ACCUMASTER cut through connection that is used by the Integrator operator to cut through to the 6800 Series NMS perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured as a remote terminal Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0040 0031 connector Connect the 002 0040 0031 connector to the appropriate port on the ACCUMASTER Integrator 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 47 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Connecting Remotely To connect a remote A
153. assword PRESS Enter TYPE cd usr nms RNMS Install A65 10 PRESS Enter TYPE Install PRESS Enter 2 The install script scans for th availability of interrupts I O addresses and memory addresses The system displays the message Installing NMS Multiple ANALYSIS 6510 support Searching for available interrupts Searching for available starting addresses Searching for available starting controller memory addresses 5 90 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 3 After the searches are complete the system displays the message Confirm The current system configuration will support only 1 IPC 900 board If installation continues 1 board will be configured Strike ENTER when ready or ESC to stop To continue PRESS Enter 4 The system prompts for the values to configure the IPC 900 card Please enter the following system configuration information for IPC 900 board The available interrupt s for the IPC 900 Board are IRQ 2 IRQ 3 default IRQ5 IRQ 10 IRQ 15 Type the interrupt number and strike the ENTER key or type Q to cancel installation Striking ENTER alone will select the default For the IRQ TYPE 5 PRESS Enter NOTE The list of available IRQs as well as the I O addresses and memory addresses is determined dynamically Depending on the boards installed in the host the IRQ I O and memory output may vary However the installer should always enter the values li
154. ated software Printers System Printers Fujitsu DL5600 DL3400 or DL3600 Alert Log Printer Fujitsu DX2300 C ITOH C 240 Automatic Trouble Report Printer Fujitsu DX2300 C ITOH C 240 Local Copy Printer C ITOH C 240 1 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors OVEIVIEW 2 oraa aaa aed OY oan Heres oa gt ee eles eet ede hee Altos System 5000 Host 2 0 0 cee een eee Hard Wares tiie scat Ate Mee cd EEE A A dae A E he Circuit Cards i050 sires et tie gee NS Phe A E Ns ob 4 eas Opening the System 5000 Host 0 00s eee eee eee Preinstallation Checks for the Integral Ethernet Card Optional Host Upgrade Packages 00 cece eee eee eee Preinstallation Steps for the Automatic Backup and Restore Package Preinstallation Steps for the ANALYSIS NMS Package Preinstallation Steps for the 3270 Terminal Emulation Package Preinstallation Steps for the 16 Control Channel Package Preinstallation Checks for the Token Ring Card Optional Host Upgrade Procedures 00 c eee eee eee Installing the Third Hard Drive in the System 5000 Installing Circuit Cards in the System 5000 0000 Installing the Octopus Cable Assembly 0 00005 Connecting the Ethernet Card to the Network Converting Host Processor R3 x to R4 2 0 0 e eee eee eee Closi
155. ature workstations connected through a TCP IP local area network to the host processor or UIP e Basic feature workstations connected to either the host processor or UIP e Three types of printers connected to the host processor System printer Alert log printer Dedicated Automatic Trouble Report ATR printer e Data communications equipment connected to the host processor COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Model 2 APL modems COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units COMSPHERE 3800 Series DDD modems COMSPHERE 3900 Series APL modems DATAPHONE II APL and DDD modems DATAPHONE II DSUs ACCULINK multiplexers e External systems connected to either the host processor or UIP DATAPHONE II System Controller 300 400 DATAPHONE II 839A Dial Backup Unit Paradyne 4400 Series Service Restoration Carrier Paradyne 840 850 DCX multiplexers Computer systems requiring VT100 emulation 4 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components e NetView PC connected to the host processor e Automatic Trouble Report feature connected to the host processor e ACCUMASTER Integrator connected to the host processor e ANALYSIS Network Management System connected to the host processor e StarKeeperNetwork Management System connected to the host processor e Bytex Unity Management System UMS connected to the host processor e COMSPHERE SNMP Manager connected to a TCP IP Network System Console
156. ay Facility Profile dsfp command to examine facility profiles associated with three devices If the ACCULINK Network Manager ANM is installed execute the List Facility Profile sfp command selecting T1 for the facility type and m2 for Device s Compare the screen results with a hard copy output from the List Facility Profile sfp command on the source system If the ANM is installed execute the Hardware Module Summary ims command on three multiplexer devices Execute the Device Health Status dhs command on available device types e g three DATAPHONE II devices three COMSPHERE devices and three ANALYSIS devices Run Alert History reports to list Historical Alerts using the Detailed Alert Report dar and Alert Report Summary ars commands If user group permissions have been customized use the SQL Customization Package to examine the command_view table Correct any incomplete migration of data and account for the new capabilities of Release 4 2 specifically that all Network Control commands can now have customized user group levels Likewise if alert text or alert group names have been customized redo the customization after the migration is completed When the migration is completed execute the Edit Alert Monitoring State edams command to turn on polling NMS will then automatically acquire the current feature packages Versions for the multiplexer network if ANM is installed 7 32 January 1997 6800 A2 GN2
157. be reused in the new host processor The DCP 2861 and IPC 900 can only be used in an Altos 5000 host If an IPC 1600 card is present and it is being transferred to the host processor remove it now If an IPC 1600 card is present and is being used in the UIP do not remove it or modify it The strap settings are correct IfaStarLAN NAU card is present remove it from the processor Check the Integral Ethernet card referring to the sections Preinstallation Checks for the Integral Ethernet Card and Connecting the Ethernet Card to the Network Upgrade the memory as indicated in Table 2 4 Refer to the section Installing Additional Memory on the System 5000 UIP Replace all processor covers reboot and run the EISA Configuration Utility and follow the steps for installing the UNIX operating system and the UIP Release 4 2 software as indicated in Chapter 5 Loading and Restoring Software Connecting the Ethernet Card to the Network The Integral Ethernet card used on most NMS processors requires additional equipment before it can be connected to the Local Area Network LAN Connect an Allied Telesis 210T transceiver to the Ethernet card s AUI connector using a 15 pin Ethernet extender Connect the transceiver to the LAN s network hub unit Closing the Altos 5000 UIP The procedures for closing the Altos 5000 UIP are the same as those for the 5000 host Refer to the section Closing the System 5000 for precise instruction
158. beled 6800 NMS Application Volume 6 into the floppy drive and the tape labeled 6800 NMS Application Volume 7 into the tape drive PRESS Enter A series of status messages appears showing that the installation program is reading and processing the contents of the floppy disk 6 The following message appears Installing NMS Release 4 2 7 At this point the installation program will check for the existence of a previous release of the NMS If a previous release of NMS is found the system prompts regarding how to remove it If an active workstation is found the system prompts regarding how to remove it 5 22 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 8 Create a password for the support login The system prompts you for password information The default is help85 This is the standard password that should be used Installing the support login 1 Pick your own password 2 Pronounceable password will be generated for you To pick your own password TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system prompts for a new password TYPE help85 PRESS Enter TYPE help85 PRESS Enter Create a password for the admin login You can choose your own password for the login or let the installation program generate one for you The default is osffw1 PRESS Enter The system prompts for a new password Enter the default or choose a new password TYPE the password you want PRESS Enter TYPE the same password again PRESS
159. ber and a count of local terminals Begin by selecting the appropriate entry TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system prompts for the name of the system to be added Any combination of lowercase letters digits hyphens and dots may be entered Enter Analysis 6510 name 15 characters max TYPE ANALYSIS name PRESS Enter This name displays on the 6800 Series NMS user interface as the ANALYSIS external system After entry of the system name the system prompts for the IPC 900 port that will be used to interface with the ANALYSIS NMS Select port number from list 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TYPE IPC 900 port number PRESS Enter After the port number is selected the system prompts for the number of 6510 terminals attached to the ANALYSIS controller How many local terminals 1 6 are configured on this 65102 TYPE the number of terminals physically connected to the ANALYSIS NMS PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 95 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NOTE The total number of local terminals configured determines the number of 6800 Series NMS cut through sessions to an individual ANALYSIS NMS The following rules apply NUMBER OF LOCAL TERMINALS NUMBER OF CUT THROUGHS ALLOWED 1 5 2 6 6 number of local terminals On the ANALYSIS side you will be asked as a part of the syssetup procedure to enter the number of permitted cut throughs It is important that you enter the same
160. bers or are to be positioned at different locations on the network map Using the same site name in such instances will result in only one phone number being migrated and only one site being created and displayed on the network map 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System If a site name is not found one will be generated using the significant data from the site contact phone number If this data is unavailable the device will be mapped to an unknown site Site Contact Phone The country code if present area code and local exchange portion of the phone number determine the positioning of the site on the Release 4 2 network map Standard area codes and local exchange information should therefore be used in all phone numbers If the area code and or local exchange information is missing or invalid the site will be positioned together with all other such sites at the unnamed location Sites having 800 area codes will also be placed at the unnamed location A leading 1 in the phone number is not necessary and will be ignored The country code for the United States 001 is assumed by default so that U S numbers do not need to be specified in international format International phone numbers that were correctly interpreted by the Release 1 network map i e the devices appeared at the correct location already conform to the required format for Release 4 2 and require no modifi
161. bove under DL3400 DL3600 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable directly to an available port on the IPC 1600 card To use the COM port you must first connect the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0054 0031 connector 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0040 0031 connector 3 Connect the 25 position end of the 002 0040 0031 connector to the RS 232 serial port on the printer Connecting a Remote System Printer Only the DL5600 can be connected remotely It requires connection to a serial port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor Two 2224CEO DDD modems are also required To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 At the host processor end connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available serial port on the IPC 1600 card 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local modem 4 Connect one 2224CEO DDD modem to the Network Channel Terminating Equipment NCTE Option the modem appropriately 5 At the printer end connect one end of the 835 5783 0011 cable to the serial port on the DL5600 6 Connect the other end of the 835 5783 0011 cable to the remote modem 7 Connect the modem to the NCTE Option the modem appropriately See Appendix A Modem Settings for information on optioning the 3810 38811 3820 or 2224CEO modems Connecting an Alert Log Printe
162. card into its original slot in the chassis and press firmly until the card is fully seated 7 Attach the main processor card metal bracket to the chassis with the saved screw Installing the Second and Third Hard Disks on the System 15000 Installation of the second and third hard disks on the System 15000 consists of three parts e Preinstallation setting and verifying switches on the drive e Installing the drive in the System 15000 chassis e Formatting the disk and establishing the file systems The first two parts are documented in the following sections The last part is described in the section Formatting the Third Hard Disk in Chapter 5 The second hard disk is automatically formatted as part of installing UNIX Preinstallation Steps for the Second and Third Hard Disks on the System 15000 To prepare the second and third hard disks for installation on the System 15000 refer to Figure 2 4 and perform the following steps 1 Locate the terminating resistor socket marked as CN6 and remove the terminating resistor if there is one present The System 15000 does not use a terminating resistor 2 Locate the jumper switch block marked as CHN1 and set the jumpers as shown in Figure 2 4 3 Locate the jumper switch block marked as CHN7 and set the jumpers as shown in Figure 2 4 The CHN7 switch block sets the drive s SCSI ID The second hard disk must have an ID of 1 the third must be 2 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 37 C
163. cation In all other cases format international numbers as follows Precede the entire phone number with a pound sign to identify it as an international number Follow this with a contiguous sequence of digits comprised of the international country code and if it exists the city code No non digits spaces hyphens letters should appear between the country and city codes Refer to the International Dial Codes section of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide for a list of country and city codes If additional digits are entered following the country and city code they must be preceded by a non digit to delimit them from the above For example The United Kingdom has the country code 44 and Belfast has the city code 232 country and city codes vary in length A device located in Belfast could be correctly positioned via any of the following phone numbers 44232 44232 555 1212 the hyphen is the delimiter 44232 555 1212 the space is the delimiter However the following examples would be incorrect 44 232 city and country codes are not contiguous 44 232 555 1212 same as above 44232555 1212 delimiter is missing after city and country codes 7 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration e In the Release 4 2 database the first three digits of the 44232 combination are placed in the country code field and the remainder are p
164. ccess Meat eee octets heen read ater ee E E a N 4 21 Connecting the Dedicated Automatic Trouble Report Printer 4 21 Data Communications Equipment 0 0 0 0 c ee eee eee eee 4 22 Connecting Modems and DSUs 0 0 c cee eee eee 4 22 Using a Hubbing Device 0 0 0 eee 4 23 Connecting Locally 0 0 e cee eee eee eee 4 24 Connecting Remotely 0 0 eee cee eee 4 26 Connecting ACCULINK Multiplexers 00 0000 4 26 Configuration Options 0 0 eee cee eee eee eee 4 28 Connection Procedures 0 0 eee cece eee 4 32 External Systems Tree rrn a i bee eo ae Oe 5 RET Rs ee oS 4 35 Connecting a Local System Controller 0 00 00 000005 4 37 Connecting a Remote System Controller 0000 4 37 Connecting a Local Dial Backup Control Unit 4 38 Connecting a Remote Dial Backup Control Unit 4 38 Connecting a Local Service Restoration Control Unit 4 39 Connecting a Remote Service Restoration Control Unit 4 39 Connecting a Local DCX Multiplexer 0 0000 4 40 Connecting a Remote DCX Multiplexer 0000 4 40 Connecting a Computer System Requiring VT100 Emulation 4 41 Connecting Locally yeh ee peed ees a goes ek eat 4 41 Connecting Remotely 0 0 cece cece eee ee 4 42 A DA e OE cnet A we bene tienes T delice Abe E EE 4 4
165. ccess is not essential nearly all of the functionality built into the multiplexer menu system is available through 6800 Series NMS commands If users need to access the internal menu system of the multiplexer they can connect a terminal to a 74x NAP Figure 4 19 shows the connections for one local ACCULINK multiplexer Host Processor 035 0153 0031 External Systems _ Port Command ACCULINK MUX Port 035 0153 0031 IPC 1600 Card 002 0021 0031 Connector 493 13911 01 Figure 4 19 Connections for One Local ACCULINK Multiplexer Connection Procedures This section explains how to make the various connections required to implement the four configurations described above Connecting the 74x Multiplexer to the Host Processor To connect a 74x multiplexer to the host processor you must connect to one NAP on the 74x A NAP can be configured as either a Supervisory NAP or an Event Datagram NAP The Supervisory NAP connects to the external systems port on the host processor and the Event Datagram NAP connects to the command and event ports The 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Management and Configuration Guide 6800 A2 GB48 explains how to configure multiplexer ports as either a supervisory NAP or Event Datagram NAP The following procedures explain how to connect each of these NAPs 4 32 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Connecting an External Systems Port To connect a Sup
166. cessor Parallel Port 035 0155 0031 LPT1 _ System Printer DL 5600 or DL 3400 DL 3600 E Alert Log Printer DX 2300 C 240 sl _ System Printer DL 5600 Serial Port COM1 035 0153 0031 come 035 0153 0031 Alert Log Printer or MS E Dedicated ATR Printer DX 2300 C 240 a System Printer SS E DL 5600 035 0153 0031 035 0153 0031 DDD Modem DDD Modem 835 5783 0011 IPC 1600 Card E 002 0054 0031 Connector E Remote System Printer RSS 002 0040 0031 Connector DL 5600 CI 002 0039 0031 Connector 493 13904 02 Figure 4 12 Printer Connections Connecting a Local System Printer The local system printer can be either the Fujitsu DL5600 or DL3400 DL3600 Follow the appropriate procedure below DL3400 DL3600 The DL3400 DL3600 is a parallel printer that can only be connected to the LPT1 port on the host processor 1 Connect the 25 pin connector of the 035 0155 0031 cable to the LPT1 parallel port on the host processor Secure the connection with the captive screws 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0155 0031 cable to the matching Centronics port on the DL3400 Use the spring clips to secure the connection 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 19 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System DL5600 The DL5600 offers both serial and parallel connections It can be connected to any available port on the host processor If you use the parallel port follow the instructions shown a
167. chapter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NOTE Database migration from a System Controller to Release 4 2 NMS is still possible but is outside the intent of this document Contact your Field Service Representative for assistance in migrating from a System Controller CAUTION If you are migrating from a host whose name is not unix or a UIP whose name is not uip 1 you must reinstall both UNIX and NMS on those processors When reinstalling you must specify the name s from the previous NMS The NMS database contains the name of the processor host or UIP from which it received an alarm or alert The name of the database must match the name s of the processor s currently connected to the NMS Introduction To Migrating Databases The following sections explain how to migrate the NMS database from each of the following systems to Release 4 2 of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS 6820 or 6830 Release 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS 6820 Release 2 COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS Release 3 x COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS Release 4 x Although the specific procedures vary for each of these migration paths the overall methodology is the same and entails these four activities 1 2 4 Cleaning up the database Backing up the database Migrating the database Checking the migrated database The remaining sections of this chapter
168. ckup and Restore package is always present on the Altos 15000 host To format the third hard disk perform the following steps 1 After rebooting the processor when the following message appears Type CONTROL d to proceed with normal startup or give root password to enter system maintenance TYPE root password PRESS Enter At the UNIX system prompt TYPE cd usr nms adm PRESS Enter TYPE _ install3hda PRESS Enter NOTE If the disk has already been installed and formatted the following message appears The 3rd hard disk is already installed Skip the remaining steps and proceed to Step 5 5 26 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software For 5000 systems only if the third hard disk is not installed the following prompt appears Do you want to install a 3rd hard disk y n q TYPE y PRESS Enter To terminate disk formatting at this point type n or q and go to Step 5 For 5000 and 15000 systems the following message appears Installing the 3rd hard disk Please wait When this portion of the formatting process is complete the system automatically reboots 3 Re enter system maintenance mode when the following message appears Type CONTROL d to proceed with normal startup or give root password to enter system maintenance TYPE root password PRESS Enter 4 At the UNIX system prompt TYPE cd usr nms adm PRESS Enter TYPE _ install3hdb PRE
169. correct follow the procedure in Step 4 to change them 7 Once the MENU1 and HARDWARE settings are correct you must save them if you do not save them your selections will be lost when the printer s power is turned off To do this a Press the ONLINE button to return the main function menu b Press the MODE button until the cursor is positioned next to SAVE END c Press the FF button to save your selections and exit the SETUP mode 3 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers Fujitsu DL3600 The Fujitsu DL3600 is a multicolor 24 pin dot matrix printer The printer communicates with the host processor through a parallel Centronics interface the interface receptacle is positioned at the right rear corner of the printer Modifying the default printer settings requires use of the front control panel buttons This panel is shown in Figure 3 4 To modify the default settings perform the following steps 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and plug the power cable into an outlet DO NOT SWITCH ON THE POWER YET Load continuous form paper into the printer For detailed instructions consult the Fujitsu DL3600 User s and Programmer s Manual that comes with the printer 2 Put the printer in SETUP mode by pressing and holding down the MODE button and switching the printer s power on The SETUP mode menu will be printed as shown in Figure 3 5 To view the menu fully pull the clear plastic cover over th
170. correct configuration data in CMOS Memory size in CMOS invalid SETUP will attempt to correct these errors through auto configuration Hit any key to continue PRESS Enter 11 The main SETUP screen appears PRESS Esc The system reboots 12 At the prompt Boot turn off the machine Preinstallation Checks for the Integral Ethernet Card The Integral Ethernet card is installed at the factory but the user should check that the settings on the card are properly configured 1 Check the jumper settings on the Ethernet card Confirm that the 7 pin dip jumper is set between U7 and U8 to set the card for Thick net transmission see Figure 2 3 2 Be sure that the Ethernet card is properly seated in the unnumbered slot above Slot 1 and the cable is connected to the J5 and J1 pin clusters 2 24 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Optional UIP Upgrade Packages Several optional packages can be added to the Altos System 5000 User Interface Processor UIP These packages are installed at the customer s location Serial Port Upgrade Package for the UIP The AT amp T Intelligent Ports Card Model 1600 IPC 1600 provides the UIP with 16 extra serial ports to connect to basic feature workstations or external devices These ports are housed in an external cable assembly device that connected to the IPC 1600 card If the customer has a large network this package may be a necessity This package is option
171. cts to P4 T Da to Show Cable P3 Ports 9 16 Connectors P3 Connects to P3 491 13022 Figure 2 11 16 Port Cabinet Assembly 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 19 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System P3 or P4 80 Pin Header Pin 41 7 IPC 1600 Circuit Card Lead 1 ifi een 16 Port Ribbon Cable Assembly Cable P4 Connects to P4 Ports 1 8 Cable P3 Connects to P3 Ports 9 16 491 13023 Figure 2 12 80 Pin Headers P3 and P4 Connector Identification 5 Locate a convenient area to place the cable assembly unit close to the host processor so that the ports are easily accessible for connecting devices The cabinet must be located within about seven cable feet the length of the fanout module cable assembly of the host computer The cabinet can be installed on the floor or table or wall mounted 6 Route the ribbon cables behind the wire frame assembly of the cabinet with the lead 1 identifiers to the left as shown in Figure 2 13 The connectors on the fanout module and the ribbon cables are keyed for proper alignment Be sure the retaining clips are properly secured when connecting the ribbon cables to the fanout module 7 Connect the ribbon cable nearest the front of the wire frame assembly to the fanout module connector for Ports 9 through 16 Next connect t
172. custom method If one existing local area network is not a constraint the values in Table 5 2 should be entered Table 5 2 Altos 15000 Basic Network Configuration Parameters Processer IP Address Node Name 6800 NMS host processor 1 1 1 1 unix 6800 UIP 1 1 1 1 2 uip 1 6800 UIP 2 1 1 1 3 uip 2 1st full feature workstation 1 1 1 4 ws1 2nd full feature workstation 1 1 1 5 ws2 24th full feature workstation 1 1 1 27 ws24 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 491 13897 Figure 5 1 Cartridge Tape Drive Inserting the Software Media The host processor and UIP have both a cartridge tape drive and floppy disk drive The cartridge tape drive is shown in Figure 5 1 UNIX Software for the Host Processor To install the UNIX Operating System on the host computer s hard disk you need the following software e A floppy disk labeled 6800 NMS Application Volume 1 e A floppy disk labeled 6800 NMS Application Volume 2 e A cartridge tape labeled 6800 NMS Application Volume 3 e A floppy disk labeled 6800 NMS Application Volume 4 e A cartridge tape labeled 6800 NMS Application Volume 5 WARNING When reloading the software on a system that was previously active you must backup the databases Loading UNIX software destroys all user data on the hard disk Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator
173. d A 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Adapter and Cable Identification OE Ra Tea 2 sto oats eh aed ad oaks Behe lee wel heb ek B 1 Overview Table B 1 provides adapter cable descriptions usage descriptions and pin information for each cable and adapter described in this guide All adapters and cables are identified in numeric sequence by their part number NOTE In Table B 1 the connector part number information includes the previous cable identifier information This information is to be used for crossreference purposes only Only cables that meet the latest National Electric Code NEC and or Canadian Electric Code CEC requirements may be used Table B 1 1 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Rha irae Description Usage Pin Diagram Part 25 pin female to 25 pin For remote connection of Pin to pin 002 0019 0031 female gender changer ANALYSIS 5600 to 6800 female gender Connects Port 1 of an changer ANALYSIS 5600 to a Feature 835 4613 2511 cable Also used in migration of System 6821 F 1 017 Controller database and in 6821 F1 516 control channel upgrades 6821 F 1 531 6821 B1 133 6821 B1 135 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 B 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Table B 1 2 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Part Number Feature Number Description Usage Pin Diagram Part 10 pin modular jack to For
174. d TYPE azinstall PRESS Enter The following installation instructions appear on the screen 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 81 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 25 26 27 28 The Token Ring Packet Driver installation requires the XONE Xserver software package by GrafPoint to be installed on this processor before install the Token Ring Packet Driver Press the Ctrl key and the letter C Ctrl C to exit or Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The following message appears About to add the files I BMTOKEN COM and STARTPKT BAT to C XONE PACKET directory Press the Ctrl key and the letter C Ctrl C to exit or Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The following message appears About to add the line C XONE PACKET STARTPKT to the AUTOEXEC bat file Press the Ctrl key and the letter C Ctrl C to exit or Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system displays the following confirmation The line has been appended to C AUTOEXEC bat Remember to reboot the processor for these changes to take effect End of Token Ring Packet Driver Installation Press the reset button to reboot the full feature workstation At the end of the boot process the message IBMTOKEN initialization complete appears signifying that the NIC has initialized opened and inserted itself into the ring correctly Network Configuration of Full Feature Workstation The
175. d as a full feature workstation The basic Altos 15000 configuration supports two UIPs and both UIPs can double as full feature workstations Consequently by definition the Altos 15000 comes with two full feature workstations You can add as many full feature workstations to the network hub and connect additional hubs to support the upper limit of workstations The maximum configuration of full feature workstations has seven full feature workstations configured to the host three configured to UIP 1 and 14 full feature workstations configured to UIP 2 The host UIPs and full feature workstations are connected via an Ethernet local area network The Altos 15000 platform does not support token ring applications The connection process is done is three stages e Stage 1 Connect the Altos 15000 host to the two Altos 5000 UIPs via a network hub e Stage 2 Connect up to four additional dedicated full feature workstations to the network hub e Stage 3 Connect additional network hub units to the first hub to support the full 24 full feature workstation limit Connecting the Basic Configuration To connect the two UIPs you have to establish a TCP IP Ethernet network Figure 4 7 shows what this network would look like for an Altos 15000 platform User Interface Processor 1 Host Processor Network Hub Unit Ethernet Card Altos 5000 035 0116 5031 User Interface Processor 2 Ethernet Card 035 0116 5031
176. d for a new password At the prompt if you choose to enter your own password TYPE the password you want PRESS Enter TYPE the same password again PRESS Enter 5 52 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 11 Create a password for the uip login You can choose your own password for the login or let the installation program generate one for you The system default is startmenu PRESS Enter A message describing acceptable passwords appears followed by the prompt for the new password To enter your own password TYPE the password you want PRESS Enter TYPE the same password again PRESS Enter A message then appears telling you that the preinstallation phase of the installation is complete 12 When the preinstallation is completed you are ready to begin the actual installation of UIP software The installation program prompts you to install the cartridge tape containing the UIP files The required floppy and cartridge tape have previously been inserted into the drives TYPE install PRESS Enter The installation takes about five minutes As the installation proceeds a series of status messages appear indicating specific installation activity that is taking place After the message Building NMS fonts appears you are prompted as follows What is the name of the NMS HOST machine TYPE the name of the NMS host processor unix is the default PRESS Enter The status messages
177. deh eatin oat a p 5 60 Installing the NMS Full Feature Workstation Application Software with EtherLink I Card 0 00 e eee eee ee 5 68 Installing GrafPoint X One Software Package with a StarLAN 10 NAU 5 70 Installing the NMS Full Feature Workstation Application Software with StarLAN 10 NAU 0 0 02 eee 5 76 Installing the Token Ring Software on the Full Feature Workstation 5 78 Network Configuration of Full Feature Workstation 5 82 Configuring Full Feature Workstation with a Router Network 5 83 Installing Full Feature Workstation Software on a Sun WOrkstaton A522 sere la daa hh Bie Aaah Met ADs ake de agi il ay 5 85 Generic X Terminal stir ee haa eee ie ae VEN Phat 5 86 Basic Feature Workstation Software 0 0 c eee cee eee eee 5 86 Installing MS DOS 0 0c cece nee 5 87 Installing Microsoft Windows 0 cee cee eee eee eee 5 88 Installing NMW Software 0 0 eee cece eee 5 88 Installing the ANALYSIS Gateway Option 5000 Systems Only 5 90 Mristal lati oni sth cites ch tea ace cat taal SNS a oa bia ae tn E A 5 90 Configuration vee eae le hae he ia Rohe ees 5 93 Adding a 6510 to the 6800 Series NMS 0 20000005 5 95 Changing 6510 Parameters 0 0 cece eee ee eee 5 97 Removing a 6510 Configuration 0 000000 e ee 5 99 Setting Data Rates 0 cece enn 5 100 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997
178. e following steps Insert the GrafPoint X One Installation disk into the drive and TYPE Azinstall PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the floppy drive to use A PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the destination drive to use C PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the destination directory to use VXONE PRESS Enter If the directory IXONE does not exist the system prompts The directory C XONE does not exist OK to create it y n y PRESS Enter The system asks a series of questions to which you should reply as follows Do you wish to install the fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts Do you wish to install the standard set of fonts including MISC and 75DPP y n y PRESS Enter Do you wish to install the 100DPI fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you wish to install the OpenWindows fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter 5 70 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Do you wish to install the DecWindows fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you wish to install the TGRAF fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you wish to install the Kanji fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter Make sure the X ONE disk labeled Install is in the floppy drive Press ENTER to continue or q to Quit PRESS Enter After some time marked by a line of dots on the screen the system prompt
179. e 2 15 until the locking pins on the underside of the cover disengage Lift the cover straight up and set it aside 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 31 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 494 14500 01 Figure 2 15 System 15000 Removing the Top Cover 2 Slide the right hand side cover upwards about 1 and swing the cover outwards pivoting on the rear edge as shown in Figure 2 16 3 Disengage the rear edge of the right side cover and lift it from the chassis and set it aside 4 Remove the left side cover by lifting it by the fingerhold built into the top portion of the cover and set the cover aside 5 Open the door on left front of the chassis and remove the two Phillips head screws just inside the hinge see Figure 2 17 Save the screws for later 6 Disengage the door spring from the pin on the lower pivot of the door hinge 7 Remove the left side cover by lifting it by the fingerhold built into the top portion of the cover and set the cover aside 2 32 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors 1 Panel slides up 1 2 Panels 494 14501 Figure 2 16 System 15000 Removing the Side Panel 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 33 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System I L wy 494 14581 Figure 2 17 System 15000
180. e A network hub unit Figure 4 4 e Two modular cables 035 0116 5031 e AUI adapter NOTE ALL devices on the network must have link integrity enabled If any part of the network is reusing StarLAN equipment these StarLAN devices must have link integrity switches and you must set link integrity to enabled Any older StarLAN network equipment which does not have the link integrity option switch must be replaced 4 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components MW Allied Telesis CentreCOM MR810T IEEE 802 3 10 BASE T 8 PORT MICRO REPEATER WITH AUI MV Allied Telesis 8 l CentreCOM MR810T 7 6 5 4 3 2 IEEE 802 3 10 BASE T LA ee LA LA LA LA MICRO REPEATER WITH AUI x x x x X x X X 493 14257 Figure 4 4 Network Hub Unit Once you have this equipment assembled perform the following steps 1 Connect the network hub unit power cord to a non switched outlet 2 Connect the AUI adapter to the Ethernet card on the host processor 3 Connect one end of a 035 0116 5031 cable to the AUI adapter 4 Connect the other end of a 035 0116 5031 cable to a port on the network hub unit 5 Connect one end of a 035 0116 5031 cable to the jack on the EtherLink II card in the full feature workstation 6 Connect the other end of the 035 0116 5031 cable to a port on the network hub unit NOTE To ensure that the TCP IP netwo
181. e Altos System 15000 will not power on unless the top cover is fully engaged 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 43 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 494 14503 Figure 2 23 System 15000 Top Cover Locking Pins Top Cover Locking Pins 2 44 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Running CMOS Setup on the Altos 15000 Once the circuit cards are configured and installed the system date and time and memory ranges for add on cards should be set This procedure requires the system to be restarted using the following steps 1 Power on the system and repeatedly PRESS Ctrl Alt Esc The BIOS Setup Utility menu appears Using the JT keys select System Configuration Setup and PRESS Enter PRESS Page Down Page 1 of the System Configuration will appear Using the JT keys select the correct date and time Page 2 of the System Configuration appears At the bottom of the page is a field Memory OFOO000H 0F FFFFFH Using the lt keys change the value System to Add on Card PRESS Esc A confirmation box appears to save the CMOS data PRESS Enter The main BIOS Setup Utility menu appears PRESS Esc The system automatically reboots 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 45 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System EISA Configuration Utility The EISA Configuration Utility ECU is a program that is shipped with
182. e edited can be selected by locating the bridge on the network map and clicking on each facility connected to it The Edit Facility Profile edfp command can be activated directly from the network map via the menu presented for each facility For each facility connected to a tributary device update the Device Name or Device Address field for the bridge endpoint to show the actual control modem instead Then use the Delete Facility Profile dlfp command to delete the facility connecting the control modem to the bridge 6 Device names are displayed on the Release 4 2 network map rather than addresses You may wish to edit device profiles to incorporate the device address into the name If there is no device name the system will assign one 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Facility names are displayed on the Release 4 2 network map rather than circuit names since facilities are physical entities whereas circuits are logical entities For multiplexer devices circuit names when available are used for the facility name To make circuit information more visible you may wish to edit the facility profiles using the Edit Facility Profile edfp command to incorporate the circuit name into the facility name Alternatively the circuit name may be entered into the comments field of the facility profile Devices colocated with the unnamed site may be repositioned by editing the city coun
183. e numbers supported by the NMS and PRESS Enter after each one When the list is complete or if there are none TYPE done PRESS Enter After migration completes the following message appears Now rebuild the NMS database indices When the pound sign prompt appears TYPE exit PRESS Enter to return to the Console Login prompt At the Console Login prompt TYPE nms PRESS Enter TYPE The nms password the default is startmenu PRESS Enter The Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS menu appears To continue TYPE 1 PRESS Enter to select Start the System The following message appears Starting the AT amp T Paradyne NMS system Please wait 7 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration 23 24 25 The system performs database error checking and then starts the NMS When the start up is complete the following message appears The AT amp T Paradyne NMS system has been successfully started Press RETURN to continue To continue PRESS Enter The Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS menu appears To return to the Console Login prompt TYPE 11 PRESS Enter At the Console Login prompt TYPE nms PRESS Enter TYPE The full feature workstation password the default is no password just press Enter PRESS Enter The NMS application is brought up and the NMS login window appears Checking the Migrated Database Data Integrity Verification Following NMS start up the in
184. e printer server cccc is the name of the remote printer on the remote printer server NOTE The variables aaaa and cccc can be but do not have to be the same name 3 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers 11 Add the following line to the NMS host processor s etc hosts file for each remote printer server processor with one or more remote printers IP address remote_host_name Where IP address is the internet address of the NMS host processor remote_host_name is the official name of the remote printer server processor NOTE Be sure that the NMS host processor name is entered into the ust spool p rhosts and etc hosts files on the remote processor The entry in the etc hosts file is in the form IP_address local_host_name The entry in the usr spool Ip rhosts file is in the form local_host_name Remote Printing with the BSD UNIX Print Spooler To establish the remote printer connections with a printer server running BSD UNIX perform the following steps 1 Logon to the NMS host as root and TYPE mkdev rlp PRESS Enter NOTE The command mkdev rip can only be run ONCE Running the command more than once will result in an incorrect lp configuration requiring a complete reinstallation of the UNIX system on that processor If remote line printing has already been installed a message appears with the prompt Do you wish to continue TYPE n PRESS
185. e roller completely forward 3 SETUP mode consists of a number of functions The first function MENU1 consists of 21 individual printer settings These settings along with their correct values are specified in Table 3 1 The red cursor on the plastic print guide is positioned under the current function Other functions may be selected by repeatedly pressing the MODE button To begin changing the settings of a particular function press the FF button Select the MENU1 function by pressing the MODE button until the red cursor is positioned under the printed MENU1 tag ONLINE PAPER OUT ONLINE 492 14081 Status Indicators Buttons Figure 3 4 DL3600 Front Control Panel 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System OFFLINE SETUP MODE Fe as oe eS We The red cursor indicates the option to be selected The selected option is underlined SAVE amp END function must be selected to exit setup mode Following list shows how buttons function in setup mode ACTION on lt lt FUNCTIGN gt gt menu ACTION on lt ITEM gt menu ONLINE Reprint lt lt FUNCTION gt gt menu F F Select function L F Select function MODE Move cursor to next function Move cursor to next option Select option amp print next item Select option amp print previous item Figure 3 5 DL3600 SETUP Mode Opening Menu
186. ector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to one of the local DCE devices Perform the following steps at the remote end 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to the TERM IN port on the SRCU 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to the 002 0032 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0032 0031 to the null modem connector 4 Connect the null modem connector to the remote DCE device See Appendix A Modem Settings for further information on optioning 3810 3811 3820 or 2224CEO modems for this application Connecting a Local DCX Multiplexer To connect a local 840 850 DCX multiplexer you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0040 0031 connector To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or UIP 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0040 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0040 0031 connector to the MIU attached to the DCX multiplexer Connecting a Remote DCX Multiplexer To connect a remote DCX multiplexer you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector 4 40 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components e Two DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous Full duplex Flow control ON Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 0
187. ed from the previous NMS Do you also wish to migrate fault data y or n y To transfer historical fault data or to skip fault transfer TYPE yorn PRESS Enter The following message appears Enter the previous NMS type sc300 sc400 6820r1 6830r1 restore Enter the previous NMS type TYPE 6820r1 or 6830r1 PRESS Enter The following message appears Insert the migration cartridge tape containing the Backup data you downloaded before upgrading your NMS Please enter ready when done Insert the backup cartridge tape into the Release 4 2 6800 NMS host computer Then TYPE ready PRESS Enter The following message appears Data Upload Completed Successfully You may now remove the cartridge tape Save it for a backup Please enter ready when done 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 20 21 22 Remove the backup cartridge tape label it and store it in a secure place To continue TYPE ready PRESS Enter As the migration process proceeds the system displays status messages at various stages reporting the progress of the migration to that point You will now be queried for 741 multiplexer node numbers as follows In order to migrate the Multiplexer device profiles accurately please provide the node numbers for all 741 Multiplexers Please enter a node number or done to end the list List all 741 multiplexer nod
188. el group tables are transferred Databases Migrated The following databases will be migrated Device Profiles Vendor Profiles Site Profiles Facility Profiles User Profiles System Configuration Data External System Configuration Data Workstation Data Filter Values Alert Monitoring States Alert Colors and Alert Group Attributes ATR Phone Directories Historic Alerts Network Summary Categories and Labels Trouble Tickets Routines Alert Driven Routines Port Configuration Scheduled items 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 25 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System The following databases will not be migrated e Reports Trouble Tickets customized with 4GL or SQL e The active alerts database will not be migrated as the Release 4 2 NMS generates up to date active alert data at start up Cleaning Up the Database To ensure that those databases not migrated are rebuilt the customer should back up any customized Trouble Tickets and Trouble Inventory Reports to a removable medium Backing Up the Database The NMS database must be backed up to a cartridge tape prior to migrating it from Release 3 0 3 1 to Release 4 2 1 From the 6800 NMS Main Menu select Backup system database and follow the steps for performing a System Database Backup as indicated in Chapter 4 of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide 2 When the backup is complete and the 6800 NM
189. em Administrator menu appears Using the lt gt keys select Printers and PRESS Enter 3 Select Configure and PRESS Enter 4 Select Add and PRESS Enter 5 The printer addition table appears You must fill in the fields as follows Printer name local name for remote printer Comment optional text Class name blank Use printer interface Existing Name of interface network Connection Direct Device Name dev null Device Hardwired Require banner no Fill in the applicable fields and press return after each field Press return for empty fields too and be sure that the entire form is completed 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 19 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System When all fields are completed and after a message appears in the highlighted line PRESS Esc to return to the Printer Configuration menu and PRESS Esc Select Schedule and PRESS Enter Select Accept and PRESS Enter TYPE local name for remote printer PRESS Enter PRESS Esc At the Printers Schedule menu select Enable and PRESS Enter TYPE local name for remote printer PRESS Enter PRESS Esc Exit from sysadmsh by PRESS Esc twice select Quit and PRESS Enter Open the file usr spoolNp remote for edit and add the following line aaaa usr spool Ip bin rlpcmd bbbb usr bin lp d cccc Where aaaa is the local name of the remote printer bbbb is the name of the remot
190. er settings These settings are shown below along with the correct value for each setting j 5 POWER POWER On Indicator E PAPER OUT Pushbuttons LETTER FONT1 MENU1 DRAFT FONT2 MENU2 Status Indicators Ea oOo CE 492 12819 02 Figure 3 2 DL3400 Front Control Panel 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System O POWER PAPER OUT SETUP MODE Push button functions BUTTON ACTION lt ONLINE gt Return to FUNCTION menu lt F F gt Select option and move down lt L F gt Select option and move up lt MODE gt Move to next option Operation The cursor red on the plastic card guide indicates the option to be selected The selected option is underlined Saving and Exiting 490 12826 Press lt ONLINE gt then lt F F gt FUNCTION SAVESEND PANEL MENU MENU2 HARDWARE LIST DEFAULT SELF TST HEX DUMP V ALNMNT TOF ADJ Figure 3 3 DL3400 SETUP Mode Opening Menu 4 To print the first setting press the FF button To print each additional setting press the FF button repeatedly Each time you press the button an additional setting will be printed Print all 22 settings and compare the values with the values shown below If any of the values on the printer do not match change them accordingly The following explains how to do this a The value that is under
191. er specified information associated with the unnamed site will not be migrated from Release 2 to Release 4 2 The user must re enter any such information after the migration is complete The following databases will not be migrated e The active alerts database will not be migrated because the Release 4 2 NMS generates up to date active alert data at system start up e Routines e Network Control Task scheduled items e Network Control Task results queue e Alert Driven Routines e Reports Trouble Tickets customized with 4GL or SQL Cleaning Up the Database Since the databases not migrated were drastically redesigned in Release 3 1 the customer should print a hard copy of routines and scheduled items to assist in recreating these items if necessary For scheduled items perform the List Schedule Items ssi command to assist in rebuilding them For facility profiles facility types and ACCULINK validation perform the List Facility Profile sfp command For Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tickets that have been customized back up the files and copy them to a removable medium Backing Up the Database The data to be migrated to the Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS is downloaded to a cartridge tape using the backup utility provided on a Release 4 2 migration diskette The data is then uploaded to Release 4 2 via a cartridge tape and the migration utility of Release 4 2 Data transfer is nondestructive no data on the source NMS i
192. er the INFORMIX menu e Archive e Restore The system will ask a series of questions respond accordingly The system will prompt Do you have another level of tapes to restore y n TYPE n PRESS Enter The system will prompt Is there a logical log tape to restore y n TYPE n PRESS Enter When the base INFORMIX menu appears select Exit Now rebuild the NMS database indices When the pound sign prompt appears TYPE exit PRESS Enter to return to the Console Login prompt 7 38 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration 19 At the Console Login prompt TYPE nms PRESS Enter TYPE The nms password the default is startmenu PRESS Enter The Release 4 2 6800 NMS Main Menu appears To continue TYPE 1 PRESS Enter to select Start the System The following message appears Starting the AT amp T Paradyne NMS system Please wait The system performs database error checking and then starts the NMS When the start up is complete the following message appears The AT amp T Paradyne NMS system has been successfully started Press RETURN to continue 20 To continue PRESS Enter The Release 4 2 6800 NMS Main Menu appears 21 To return to the Console Login prompt TYPE 11 PRESS Enter 22 At the Console Login prompt TYPE nms PRESS Enter TYPE The full feature workstation password PRESS Enter The NMS application is brought up and the NMS login window appears 680
193. erials Required To connect COMSPHERE 3400 3800 and 3900 Series modems and 3600 Series DSUs DATAPHONE II APL and DDD modems and DSUs you will need the following materials e An 035 0147 5031 cable DB25 male to DB25 female e Two DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous Full duplex Flow control ON Bit rate of 1200 bps e An 035 0184 5031 cable DB25 male to CC10 female e An 035 0185 5031 cable DB25 male to 6 position modular 4 26 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Connection Procedures To connect APL and DDD modems and DSUs remotely to the host processor perform the following steps at the host processor end 1 Connect the 035 0147 5031 cable to the octopus cable attached to the DCP MUXi card in the host processor 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0147 5031 cable to the local DCE device Perform the following steps at the remote end when connecting to a COMSPHERE device 1 Connect the 035 0185 5031 cable to the CCIN DCOUT jack on the hubbing device When connecting to a 4000 Series ICC or a 3000 Series Carrier use the CCIN jack on the carrier 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0185 5031 cable to the remote DCE device Perform the following steps at the remote end when connecting to a DATAPHONE II APL or DDD modem or DSU 1 Connect the 035 0184 5031 cable to the CC OUT jack on the device 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0184 5031 cable to the rem
194. ervisory NAP on the 74x multiplexer to the external systems port on the host processor you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect the 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured as the external systems port 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to a 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the NAP on the 74x multiplexer that has been configured as the Supervisory NAP Connecting an Event or Command Port To connect an Event Datagram NAP on the 74x multiplexer to the event or command port on the host processor you will need the following materials e Two 035 0153 0031 cables e Two 002 0021 0031 connectors To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect 035 0153 0031 cables to the IPC 1600 ports that are configured as the event port and the command port 2 Connect the other end of each 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0021 0031 connector 3 Connect one 002 0021 0031 connector to the NAP on the 74x multiplexer configured as the command port 4 Connect the other 002 0021 0031 connector to the NAP on the 74x multiplexer configured as the event port Connecting the Current Version 719 NETWORKER The 719 NETWORKER can connect to the host processor one of two ways depending on the version of the firmware To determine the firmware configura
195. eters At the end of the installation of the NMS software the user simply copies the supplied files to the proper hosts file to utilize the basic configuration Table 5 1 Altos 5000 Basic Network Configuration Parameters Processer IP Address Node Name 6800 NMS host processor 1 1 1 1 unix 6800 UIP 1 1 1 2 uip 1 1st full feature workstation 1 1 1 3 ws1 2nd full feature workstation 1 1 1 4 ws2 3rd full feature workstation 1 1 1 5 ws3 4th full feature workstation 1 1 1 6 ws4 5 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Customized Network Configuration Where the NMS will be installed at a site with an existing local area network the Network Administrator there may require that the NMS node names and IP addresses follow the standards of that site This custom installation is also required for the Altos 15000 If the NMS has not been factory installed the node names and IP addresses can be set during the normal NMS installation procedures For processors where the NMS software has been factory installed the host and UIP processors can be modified using netconfig a program designed for just this purpose On full feature workstations the GrafPoint X One software must be reinstalled following the instructions in this chapter and setting the IP address at the proper point in the installation process For the 15000 platform the IP address and node names must be entered via one
196. etwork Management System To connect a cascaded hub you must modify a modular cable part number 035 0116 5031 Alter the cable by making the changes indicated in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Cascaded Hub Cable Modifications End 1 Connects To TD Pin 1 RD Pin 3 TD Pin 2 RD Pin 6 RD Pin 3 TD Pin 1 RD Pin 6 TD Pin 2 The modified cable is used to connect the network hubs together After connecting one end of the modified cable to a port in the first network hub connect the other end to a port in the second hub Then for each full feature workstation perform the following steps 1 Connect one end of the 035 0116 5031 cable to the EtherLink II card in the full feature workstation 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0116 5031 cable to a port on the network hub unit Basic Feature Workstation Basic feature workstations can be connected to the host processor or UIP either locally or remotely over private or switched lines On the Altos 5000 platform the host processor can support up to three basic feature workstations If the UIP is installed eight more workstations or up to a total of eleven basic feature workstations can be supported On the Altos 15000 platform the host processor supports six basic feature workstations and UIP 1 can support twelve basic feature workstations to a total of eighteen basic feature workstations NOTE The 6800 Series NMS supports the AT amp T 6386 and
197. execute the Hardware Module Summary hms command on three ACCULINK devices Execute the Device Health Status dhs command on available device types e g three DATAPHONE II devices and three COMSPHERE devices Run Alert History reports to list Historical Alerts using the Detailed Alert Report dar and Alert Report Summary ars commands When the migration is complete execute the Edit Alert Monitoring State edams command to turn on polling NMS will then automatically acquire the current feature packages Vversions for the multiplexer network if ANM is installed Profile Data Changes and Corrections 1 The Edit Profile commands Edit Site Profile edsp Edit Device Profile eddp Edit Facility Profile edfp and the Identity id command provide mechanisms for changing or correcting the migrated data The following is a list of changes to consider When migration completes successfully the messages sent to the console can be reviewed to take note of any warning messages as follows cd usr tmp pg migrate err pg migrate out The above files are eventually deleted by the NMS The warning messages indicate any significant deletions or modifications of profiles or fields You should determine if corrective action is necessary If 3600 Series DSUs are managed by the NMS the Release 4 2 network commands for these devices will fail if the Model Number field is not populated This can be done automatically via an
198. ey or enter q to quit TYPE the UNIX activation key found on the Serial Number card attached to the Release Notes PRESS Enter NOTE If either the serial number or activation key is entered incorrectly the system prompts you again for the information If you quit at either of these steps you must start the installation process from the beginning 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 43 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 8 Once the correct serial number and activation key are entered the system completes the base UNIX installation and displays the following message Please assign a password for super user account root You can choose whether you pick a password or have the system create one for you 1 Pick a password 2 Pronounceable password will be created for you Enter choice default is 1 TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system prompts New password TYPE your chosen password PRESS Enter The system prompts Re enter new password TYPE your chosen password again PRESS Enter The system displays several status messages followed by Installation and configuration of the Altos SCO UNIX System V Operating System is now complete Remove the filesystem Volume 2 floppy and the cartridge tape Volume 3 after the system is shutdown and press lt RETURN gt to restart the system Safe to Power Off or Press Any Key to Reboot CAUTION Do not remove the boo
199. figuration function PRESS Alt Enter TYPE x Select Save configuration and exit by pressing the s key The following message appears Your configuration has been saved If you need to change any switch or jumper setting or install any boards and options turn off your computer and do so right now If not Press Enter to reboot restart your system PRESS Enter The system reboots 2 50 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Full Feature Workstation Preinstallation Checks for the EtherLink II Card The 3COM EtherLink II Card is installed at the factory for workstations from Paradyne but the user should check that the settings on the card are properly configured 1 Check the jumper settings on the EtherLink II card see Figure 2 27 Confirm that a The I O Base Address jumper at J3 is set to 300 b The Memory Address jumper at J3 is set to C8000 c The Data Mode jumper at J5 is set to 16 bit transmission 2 Be sure that the EtherLink II card is properly seated 300 M O H FE X HE E Pe zs 20 BS og 20 00 o 1 oo 2000 oo ag w x e000 A 2 e o Dcooo OO a 83 O l O AAAAALAAOLOADAAN JAOAOOOAADAAAOOOOCOOCOONANII 493 14256 uw 8 16 je DATA MODE Figure 2 27 EtherLink Il Card Jumper Settings 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 51 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Netwo
200. fits into the EISA connector Press firmly but carefully to engage the connector pins Repeat this procedure for each circuit card you intend to install When you have installed all circuit cards secure the card s metal bracket to the chassis with the screw saved from Step 3 Closing the System 15000 When all the necessary hardware and circuit cards are installed in the Altos System 15000 the EISA Configuration Utility ECU must be run to configure the internal resources of the processor to match the circuit cards physically installed Before running the ECU you must close the System 15000 and attach the power cable monitor mouse and keyboard To close the System 15000 perform the following steps 1 2 Replace the front cover ensuring that the top and side clips are properly engaged Re connect the door spring to the pin at the bottom of the door hinge Reattach the two Phillips head screws inside the door hinge Replace the left side cover Hook the right side cover rear edge around the end of the chassis with the cover at about a 30 degree angle out from the chassis Swing the right side cover inward towards the chassis and slide it down until the bottom edge locks in place Place the top cover on the chassis making sure that the locking pins on the cover underside are positioned in the locking slots Slide the cover towards the front of the chassis until the locking pins see Figure 2 23 engage NOTE Th
201. ge appears System name removed from the system 5 The ANALYSIS Selection menu appears again see Step 1 for menu To remove additional 6510 s return to Step 1 To exit the procedure TYPE 4 PRESS Enter 6 When asked to display the system summary TYPE 4 PRESS Enter 7 Reset the host computer For additional information refer to Chapter 6 System Start up and Shutdown Setting Data Rates The default data rate for the physical link between the 6800 Series NMS and the ANALYSIS NMS is 9600 bps This rate may be changed as follows e For the ANALYSIS controller run syssetup following the procedures in the ANALYSIS 6510 Automated Network Management System Reference Manual For the 6800 Series NMS edit the port configuration for the port connecting the ANALYSIS controller using the Edit Port Configuration edpc command In the input form for the edpc command change the number in the speed field Changing the number in this field changes the data rate The initial data rate is 9600 Valid data rates are 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 The recommended data rate for local connections is 9600 bps For remote connections the recommended data rate is the highest rate of your data communications equipment If an invalid rate is entered the system uses the initial rate set CHANGES IN RATES DO NOT TAKE EFFECT UNTIL THE SYSTEM STOPS AND NMS IS RESTARTED YOU MUST RESET THE ANALYSIS NMS FOR THE CHANGES TO TAKE EFFECT 5 100 J
202. h a single DCP MUXi which supports eight control channels An optional DCP MUXi can be added for sixteen control channel support Each control channel can connect up to 256 control devices and each control device monitors the health and status of its own network A control channel can be collocated with the host processor or it can be remotely located via switched or private lines The devices that can be connected to a control channel are categorized by service class e Analog Private Line APL Individual or carrier mounted modems connected to a control channel e Digital Data Service DDS Individual or carrier mounted DSUs connected to a control channel e Direct Distance Dialing DDD Individual or carrier mounted switched network modems connected to a control channel The ACCULINK multiplexers connect directly to the host processor via the serial ports on the IPC 1600 card The following sections explain how to connect modems DSUs and ACCULINK multiplexers Connecting Modems and DSUs The following devices all connect to the control channels on the DCP MUXi card in the host processor e COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Model 2 APL modems e COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSUs e COMSPHERE 3800 Series DDD modems e COMSPHERE 3900 Series APL modems e DATAPHONE II APL and DDD modems e DATAPHONE II DSUs 4 22 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Standalone COMSPHERE devices require a hubbing device to con
203. h previously used StarLAN as the means of connecting full feature workstations NOTE This connection process describes the standard TCP IP Ethernet configuration On the Altos System 5000 an alternative network configuration is also supported Token Ring cards can be inserted in the host UIP and full feature workstation for Token Ring support The configuration rules that follow apply to this alternative hardware configuration as well 4 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components If the customer wants to install additional full feature workstations this will have to be done via a local area network Up to five workstations can be connected to the network for a total of six The connection process is done in three stages depending on how many workstations the customer ultimately installs The following explains Stage 1 Connect a Second Full Feature Workstation To connect a second full feature workstation you must perform the following activities Connect the network hub unit to the Ethernet card in the host processor using an AUI adapter Install a 3COM 3C503 EtherLink II card in the full feature workstation may be factory or field installed see Chapter 2 Preparing the Processors for more details Connect the full feature workstation to the network hub unit Stage 2 Connect a Third Full Feature Workstation To connect a third full feature workstation you
204. hange WSNAME to the name of the workstation Look for the line beginning with CONN_HOST and change NMSHOST to the name of the host machine if you are connected to the host or to the name of the UIP machine if you are connected to the UIP Save the file and exit the editor If not installing the Token Ring package do the following steps If you are installing the Token Ring package continue with the next section Installing the Token Ring Software on the Full Feature Workstation TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE edit autoexec bat PRESS Enter The DOS editor displays the file At the end of the file add the following line C XONE PACKET STARTPKT Save the file and exit the editor program Reboot the processor to ensure that all changed parameters are properly loaded 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 77 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installing the Token Ring Software on the Full Feature Workstation The GrafPoint X One server software must be installed prior to the installation of any software on the full feature workstation X One must be configured for use with a packet driver For more information please refer to the section Installing GrafPoint X One Software Package with a StarLAN 10 NAU To install the NIC driver and LAN support program perform the following steps 1 Power up the full feature workstation and insert the Proteon distribution floppy labeled p5025 ProNet 4 16 Diag amp Drv
205. he bottom and facing opposite the memory plug This is the only way the SIMM can fit into the socket b Firmly press the SIMM into the socket c When the SIMM is seated properly in the socket tilt it back with the pegs showing through the guide holes press firmly until it snaps into place with the plastic arms on each side of the socket holding it securely CAUTION If any difficulty is encountered in fitting the SIMM into the socket getting the guide pegs into the guide holes on the SIMM or snapping the plastic arms securely in place you may have the SIMM facing the wrong direction or it may be the wrong part 6 Reinstall the memory board into memory Slot 0 in the processor from which it was removed by gently pushing it back until it is firmly seated in the slot 7 Screw the hold down screw back into the processor 8 Replace the processor side cover tighten down the screws and power on the processor with the on off switch 9 When the system boots the following messages appear Invalid configuration information please run SETUP program Select 1 to boot from Hard Disk Select 2 to boot from Floppy Select 3 to boot from Tape Select 4 to enter BIOS setup Enter option TYPE 4 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 23 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 10 The following messages appear Errors have been found during the power on self test in your computer The errors were In
206. he following steps 1 Backup the Release 3 x user data 2 Power off the Altos 5000 processor 3 Ifa StarLAN card is present remove it Replace the slot cover 4 Ensure that the Ethernet card is properly configured a Remove the Ethernet card from the unnumbered slot above Slot 1 b Check the jumpers at U7 amp U8 See Figure 2 3 to be sure that the card is configured for THICK NET c Replace the Ethernet card being sure that it is properly seated in its original slot above Slot 1 d Connect the cable to the J5 and J1 pin clusters 5 If the 6800 host processor is to be used with SNMP Manager cut through replace the STB Powergraph video card with an ERGO 1 Mb video card if not already installed 6 If the 6800 host processor has a DCP286i 3270 Emulation card reconfigure that card to change the IRQ from 10 to 9 see Figure 2 6 7 Replace all processor covers power up the Altos 5000 and follow the steps for installing the UNIX operating system and NMS Release 4 2 software indicated in Chapter 5 Loading and Restoring Software Closing the System 5000 At this point all the necessary hardware and circuit cards should be installed in the 6800 Series NMS The next step in the installation process is to run the EISA Configuration Utility to configure the internal resources of the System 5000 to match the circuit cards you just installed However before you can run this program you must close the System 5000 and attach
207. he host processor s hard disk you need the following e A floppy disk labeled 6800 NMS Application Volume 6 e A cartridge tape labeled 6800 NMS Application Volume 7 Installing the NMS Software To install the NMS Software perform the following steps 1 At the unix login TYPE root enter password if any NOTE The system cannot be installed from any other user login 2 Set the system date and time by entering the command date MMDDhhmmyy where MM is the month DD the day hh the hour 24 hour system mm the minute and yy the last two digits of the year this is optional 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 3 Set the proper time zone by entering the command etc tz The system asks Are you in North America y n TYPE y as appropriate PRESS Enter The system displays a list of time zones for the specified continent and prompt Enter the number that represents your time zone or enter q to quit TYPE the number of the appropriate time zone PRESS Enter The system asks Does daylight saving time summer time apply at your location y n TYPE y orn as appropriate to your location PRESS Enter 4 You are now ready to execute the installpkg command and begin the installation process To do this TYPE installpkg PRESS Enter The installation program prompts you to insert a floppy disk into the disk drive and press Enter 5 Insert the disk la
208. he nature of the malfunction These power up tests however have only limited diagnostic capabilities Therefore Altos also provides a diagnostic program to identify hardware failures that cannot be detected by the power up tests This program called the SDX Diagnostic consists of a series of system confidence tests that check the operation and configuration of the machine s internal components You should run this program any time you suspect a problem in the system s hardware In addition a diagnostic diskette is shipped with each of the circuit cards installed in each system You should run these programs any time you suspect a problem with a particular circuit card The following sections provide step by step instructions for running these programs 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 8 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System SDX Diagnostic Program To run this program you need the disk entitled SDX System 5000 or SDX System 10000 15000 that is shipped with the Altos 5000 or 15000 respectively Perform the following steps Select Select Select Select Enter option Before running this test shut down UNIX and move the RESET RUN key to the RESET position Refer to Chapter 6 of this manual for the shutdown procedure for both the Altos 5000 and Altos 15000 systems The Altos 5000 and Altos 15000 systems do not have the same power up procedure This difference is accommodated in Step 1 1 Fo
209. he other ribbon cable for Ports 1 through 8 8 The fanfold module snaps into the wire frame assembly from the front of the assembly see Figure 2 13 Put the slot on the left side of the fanout module over the wire tab on the left side of the wire frame assembly Next slide the right side of the fanfold module into the wire frame assembly until the two slots on the right of the module engage with the wire tabs 2 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors First Fanout Bushing for Wall Mounting Module or Feet for Table Position Integrated Wire Management Loops 16 Modular Cables val Me va Mt i i i Hl J 2 80 Conductor Ribbon Cables 491 13856 Figure 2 13 IPC 1600 Ports Cabinet Assembly Altos System 5000 UIP The Altos 5000 User Interface Processor UIP can connect to either an Altos 5000 or 15000 host The UIP memory configurations are different depending on which is the host processor see Table 2 4 The Altos 5000 UIP can be configured with an IPC 1600 Serial Ports card and or a Proteon P1990plus Token Ring Network Interface Card The Token Ring card is optional and replaces the Integral Ethernet card on the Altos 5000 UIP The IPC 1600 Serial Ports card is conditionally optional That is it is required on the first UIP of an Altos 15000 NMS but is optional on an Altos 5000 NMS Circuit Cards Table 2 3 shows the location of the standard and optional circuit cards when installed i
210. he requirements of this circuit card For instructions see the section entitled EISA Configuration Utility 7 You must reload the UIP software to specify that the IPC 1600 has been installed see Chapter 5 Loading and Restoring Software for details Ribbon Cable Connections P3 Ports 9 16 and P4 Ports 1 8 Local Program Memory Size Select Jumper J1 DS1 DS2 110987654321 37654321 OFF Hal set Ory MBM cates Poston M IRQ 11 491 13021 02 1o E10000 Figure 2 14 IPC 1600 Switch and Jumper Locations and Settings 2 26 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Preinstallation Checks for the Token Ring Card The Proteon P1990P s Network Interface Card requires no jumper or switch settings on the card All settings are configured using the EISA Configuration Utility Optional UIP Upgrade Procedures Once you have obtained the desired field upgrade package and prepared it for installation you can then install the circuit card s in the UIP The procedures for installing circuit cards in the UIP are the same as those for installing in the Altos System 5000 host processor Refer to the sections Installing Circuit Cards in the System 5000 and Closing the System 5000 Converting Altos 5000 Processors to Release 4 2 UIPs Altos 5000 processors from previous releases of NMS can be converted to UIPs for Release 4 2 NMS The steps taken depend on what use the System 5000 had under the previou
211. heduled frequency This package requires the installation of a third hard disk on the host This feature provides the capability to maintain a hot spare system ready to run at short notice The ANALYSIS NMS the 3270 Emulation and the 16 Control Channel packages for the Altos System 5000 require the installation of circuit cards in the host processor The following sections describe each upgrade package and explain how to configure the strap settings on the circuit cards and third hard disk For instructions on installing the circuit cards see the section entitled Optional Host Upgrade Procedures NOTE The 16 Control Channel package cannot be installed on the Altos System 5000 in conjunction with either or both of the ANALYSIS or 3270 Emulation packages The Automatic Backup and Restore package consists of both hardware and software installation The hardware installation requires installing a third 520 Mb hard disk on the Altos 5000 host processor with preinstallation steps as well as actually installing the physical drive in the Altos 5000 disk bay The software portion of this package is documented in the section Formatting the Third Hard Disk in Chapter 5 2 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Preinstallation Steps for the Automatic Backup and Restore Package To prepare the third hard disk for installation on the System 5000 refer to Figure 2 4 and perform the following steps 1
212. her processors with which it must communicate The names and IP addresses are stored in a hosts file on each processor On the 5000 platform there are two methods of configuring the local area network basic and custom The basic method provides a simple predefined set of node names and IP addresses which match the addresses established when the processors are put together at the factory The custom configuration method allows the individual installing the NMS to set his her own node names and IP addresses according to the standards of the particular site On the 15000 platform the custom method of installation is required Basic Network Configuration For the 5000 platform the 6800 NMS software is distributed with a basic network configuration which is intended for those users who have a configuration of host UIP and or full feature workstations which were configured at the factory and do not have a pre existing local area network to which the NMS will be connected The basic network configuration uses the default parameters indicated in Table 5 1 If the NMS software including TCP IP is being installed on site the network configuration parameters must be entered by the installer To facilitate the network configuration of the processors the 6800 NMS software comes with pre configured files that can be copied into the hosts file for the NMS host processor UIP and full feature workstations These files contain the default param
213. hin an acceptable time try again later check the NAP speed Communication cannot occur if the NAP speed is incorrect To check the NAP speed do one of the following e If you are using a 74x multiplexer check the NAP configuration at the multiplexer and change it if necessary e If you are using a 719 NETWORKER at the ASCII terminal connected to the 719 check the configuration via the 719 menu C 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Maintaining Multiplexers Event Port Failure Failures associated with the event port are usually caused by faulty connections or software configuration errors Software configuration errors may also cause event log printer problems Faulty Connections When there is a problem with the connection to the event port the following alert is issued evtpf Multiplexer event port is down When this alert appears perform the following steps 1 Check the hardware connections as described in the section entitled General Hardware Procedures 2 Check the NAP speed Communication cannot occur if the NAP speed is incorrect To check the NAP speed do one of the following e Ifyou are using a 74x multiplexer check the NAP configuration at the multiplexer and change it if necessary e If you are using a 719 NETWORKER at the ASCII terminal connected to the 719 check the configuration via the 719 menu Once the problem is fixed the alert will automatically clear If the alert remains the NMS may
214. hrough a serial interface Five functions must be modified to properly communicate with the host processor Table 3 6 provides the information for modifying these functions The NMS Status in the table is the setting to which the given function will be changed Table 3 6 C ITOH C 240 Setting Changes ee Function Menu No Default Status Menu No NMS Status 01 EMULATION 01 IBM PRO PRINTER 02 EPSON FX 800 XL 18 SKIP 02 INVALID 01 VALID PERFORMANCE 22 TEAR OFF 02 VALID 1SEC 01 INVALID 28 INTERFACE 01 PARALLEL 02 SERIAL 29 PROTOCOL 01 READY BUSY 02 XON OFF To modify printer functions perform the following steps 1 While holding down the FM button press the POWER button on the right side of the printer to turn on the power When you release the FM button the SET UP mode is selected All the current function settings are printed then FUNC NO 01 is printed Press the LF button the appropriate number of times to select the function you want to change The NLQ 1 lamp is on Press the FM button MENU Select mode is selected No printing occurs The NLQ 2 lamp turns on Press the LF button to select the appropriate MENU NO For example with the SKIP PERFORATION function you would press the LF button once to select 01 VALID Press the FM button to return to Function Select Mode Repeat Steps 2 through 5 as many times as needed to cycle through the functions and their associated menu items Whe
215. ices A Modem Settings 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee A 1 B Adapter and Cable Identification usuusu euneun B 1 C Maintaining Multiplexers 00 0 0000 C 1 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 iii List of Figures Figure Page 1 1 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports and UIP 1 3 1 2 High Capacity 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports and TWO UIPS 55s daitcie a det oh Reso Se eee A AS Gee te van dy de teas Pn a ete oe 1 4 2 1 System 5000 Cover Fasteners 20 eee cee eee 2 5 2 2 System 5000 Disengaging Cover Locking Pins 0008 2 6 2 3 Integral Ethernet Card 0 ee eee ee ene 2 7 2 4 Second and Third Hard Disk Jumper Settings 0 000 2 9 2 5 IPC 900 Switch and Jumper Locations 0 0 0 0 0020s eee 2 10 2 6 Emulex DCP 286i Switch and Jumper Locations 2 12 227 DI CP MUXE Card 3 so 05 HA os ete Ss a Sa A E AA 2 13 2 8 Altos 5000 Disk Bay ssccccicc suet sia Sigs BR SEAN LG Sere ote a alates 2 15 2 9 System 5000 Expansion Slots 0 0 nuaren reure 2 16 2 10 Emulex DCP MUCi Circuit Card and Cable Assembly 2 17 2 11 16 Port Cabinet Assembly 0 0 00 2 19 2 12 80 Pin Headers P3 and P4 Connector Identification 004 2 20 2 13 IPC 1600 Ports Cabinet Assembly 00 0 0 eee eee eee 2
216. icking the button The Main Menu for the 6800 Series NMS is displayed in the Manager window The Manager window is shown in Figure 6 4 6 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 System Start Up and Shutdown Manager System Management Network Control Routines Queue Results Scheduled Items enter select i cr ae Go PrevMenu Mai oMenujg Prev Form Figure 6 4 Manager Window 10 Check the system date and time and change them if necessary TYPE sdt PRESS Enter The Set Date Time command is sdt It will prompt you for the correct date and time Enter them in the proper format MM DD YY and HH MM SS and PRESS Enter The results of the Set Date Time sdt command appear on a results form For information on the other tasks listed in the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu window Figure 6 3 see the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide Shutting Down the NMS Application Program To shut down the NMS application program perform the following steps 1 On the full feature workstation point the mouse at the Logoff command button and click the mouse button Verify that you want to log off by clicking on Yes All windows close and the Login window appears Press the right mouse button and select Quit Select OK The login prompt appears Point the mouse at the gray screen and click the mouse button The Workspace menu appears Highlight Quit with the mouse and then point t
217. ie sale oe 8G Dies Installing the Second and Third Hard Disks in the System 15000 Installing Additional Memory on the System 15000 Preinstallation Steps for the IPC 1600 Card on the System 15000 Preinstallation Steps for the DCP MUXi Cards on the System 15000 Installing Circuit Cards in the System 15000 0 Closing the System 15000 0 eee eee eee Running CMOS Setup on the Altos 15000 0000 EISA Configuration Utility 00 0 eee eee Changing the Token Ring Configuration 00 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Overview Full Feature Workstation 0 0000 cee cece eee ene ae 2 51 Preinstallation Checks for the EtherLink II Card 2 51 Installation of the Token Ring Network Interface Card 2 52 Switching off the Cache on 486DX 0 00 00 2 53 Migrating Host Processor Release 1 or 2 to Full Feature Workstation 2 54 Full Feature Workstation 000 0 c rannau nnen 2 57 Release 4 2 of the 6800 Series Network Management System supports two processors the Altos 15000 and Altos 5000 The Altos 15000 can serve only as an NMS host processor while the Altos 5000 can serve as both host processor and User Interface Processor UIP Most of the internal components required by the NMS in the Altos 5000 processor as well as all the software
218. il the entire disk has been copied 8 You now have to create a config sys file to allow the IPC device drivers to be automatically loaded when the system is booted To do this at the A gt prompt TYPE copy con config sys The cursor will advance to the next line and await input At this point whatever you type on the keyboard will be put into a buffer and then written to a file named config sys Enter the following lines into the config sys file TYPE device ipc drv 2B0 D2000 0 buffers 10 files 20 and PRESS Enter after each line When complete PRESS lt F6 gt PRESS Enter to signal end of input Z will appear on the display 9 With the newly created diagnostic disk in the drive boot the system to load the device drivers At the Boot Menu Figure 8 1 select Option 2 to boot from the floppy During reboot you should see messages referring to the driver for the IPC 900 For more detailed information refer to the AT amp T Intelligent Ports Card Model 900 IPC 900 User s Guide 8 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Running Diagnostics 10 There are three tests that you should run The first test involves outputting two ASCII data patterns to a terminal or printer connected to one of the serial I O ports on the IPC 900 To run this test you need a terminal or printer a 035 0153 0031 cable and a 002 0040 0031 or 002 0052 0031 connector Once you have this equipment perform the following steps a Using the 035
219. install the Kanji fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter Make sure the X ONE disk labeled Install is in the floppy drive Press ENTER to continue or q to Quit PRESS Enter After some time marked by a line of dots on the screen the system prompts Insert the X ONE disk Labeled Fonts Disk 1 Press ENTER to continue or q to Quit Remove X One Install disk insert requested disk and PRESS Enter 5 62 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 11 After some time marked by a line of dots on the screen the system prompts Insert the X ONE disk Labeled Fonts Disk 2 Press ENTER to continue or q to Quit Remove Fonts Disk 1 insert requested disk and PRESS Enter After another period also marked by the line of dots on the screen the following messages appear All files successfully installed The following should be placed in your autoexec bat file SET XONEDIR C VXONE SET DOS4G quiet Would you like X One to add this to your autoexec bat file y n y PRESS Enter The system prompts Ready to execute setup Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system prompts X One Setup Utility Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system prompts Select Mouse type 1 Mouse type device pre loaded driver 2 Microsoft serial mouse 3 Logitech serial mouse 4 Mouse Systems serial mouse Enter selection or q to Quit 1
220. ion keys TYPE serial number from distribution package PRESS Enter The system prompts 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 45 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Enter your activation key or enter q to quit TYPE activation key PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the system node name or enter return to use unix NOTE To use the default network configuration you must enter uip 1 as the system node name and 1 1 1 2 as the internet address TYPE system node name PRESS Enter The following messages appear TCP IP Configuration Complete Altos TCP IP Runtime installation complete The system displays the currently configured chains and then the following menu Available options 1 Add a chain 2 Remove a chain 3 Reconfigure an element in a chain q Quit Select option TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system displays the top level chain descriptions and prompt Select top level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE 1 for altos_tcp PRESS Enter The system prompts Select next level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE 5 for en0 PRESS Enter The system prompts for confirmation Add chain altos_tcp gt en0 y n TYPE y PRESS Enter 5 46 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The following messages appear Adding altos_tcp gt en0 Enable en0 driver Installing ALTOS TCP IP over en0 Please enter the following information
221. ion of the numbers entered For example You have entered for the serial number and for the serial number key Are they correct yn If the information is correct TYPE y PRESS Enter If the information is incorrect TYPE n PRESS Enter 25 If you entered n the system prompts you for the information once more Once the correct information has been entered the INFORMIX OnLine and 4GL Runtime packages are branded and the following message is displayed Branding of INFORMIX files completed Setting password for user informix Password change is forced for informix Choose password You can choose whether you pick a password or have the system create one for you 1 Pick a password 2 Pronounceable password will be generated for you Enter choice default is 1 TYPE 1 PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 17 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 26 27 28 29 30 The system prompts New password TYPE your chosen password PRESS Enter The system prompts Re enter new password TYPE your chosen password again PRESS Enter The system now rebuilds the kernel and installs devices As this transpires the following message appears The UNIX Operating System will now be rebuilt This will take a few minutes Please wait Root for this system build is Once the kernel has been rebuilt the following prompt appears Do you want this
222. isk 3 Do not proceed with the Migration until you have a valid readable Backup Migrating the Database NOTE The NMS application must not be running To migrate the NMS database perform the following steps 1 At the Console Login prompt TYPE root PRESS Enter 7 34 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration 2 At the Password prompt TYPE root password PRESS Enter 3 At the pound sign prompt TYPE ksh usr nms adm installDb PRESS Enter The AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters menu Figure 7 7 appears AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition 2 Initialize NMS Database 3 Include Migration Data 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices cont To Continue quit To abort If you wish to modify the NMS parameters Enter number 1 2 3 4 cont or quit 492 13960 Figure 7 7 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters Menu Release 4 0 Database Migration 4 Ifthe INFORMIX OnLine partition has not been initialized since NMS installation TYPE 1 PRESS Enter to select Initialize ONLINE Partition The following message appears Do you wish to initialize the ONLINE partition y n n 5 To initialize the partition TYPE y PRESS Enter A warning will appear To proceed PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 35 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 11 All user created NMS databases must be initialized in preparation for migration TY
223. isk entitled DCPMUXi Diag Disk into disk drive and TYPE dcpdiagm PRESS Enter The Main Menu is displayed 5 Select the Modify option and PRESS Enter The Configuration Menu is displayed 6 Select the Control address option and PRESS Enter 7 Select the appropriate address and PRESS Enter For valid addresses see Table 2 1 5000 host or Table 2 5 15000 host both are in Chapter 2 NOTE Only one EMULEX DCP MUXi card can be tested at a time Do not mix parameters from two cards 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 8 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 8 Select Start Address and PRESS Enter 9 Select the Correct Window size address combination and PRESS Enter Addresses are listed in Table 2 1 for 5000 host and Table 2 5 for 15000 host All window sizes for the EMULEX DCP MUXi cards are 16KB The Select Window Size menu is displayed 10 Select 16KB and PRESS Enter 11 Exit the configuration menu and return to the Main Menu PRESS Esc 12 Select Run and PRESS Enter NOTE The EMULEX DCP MUxXi diagnostics automatically test to see if the local processor can interrupt the host The EMULEX DCP MUXi cards are configured without using interrupts The diagnostics will erroneously flag this as an error This is not an error so ignore the error message 13 The system prompts Local processor did not interrupt host gt FAIL Pausing on error
224. isplay the Welcome screen Then PRESS Enter to display the Main Menu It is shown in Figure 2 25 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 47 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Main Menu Learn about configuring your computer Configure computer Set date and time Exit from this utility 491 13837 Figure 2 25 Main Menu 4 Use the J key to highlight Configure computer and PRESS Enter The Configure Computer Menu displays as shown in Figure 2 26 Configure Computer Copy configuration CFG files Configure computer basic method Configure computer advanced method Return to the main menu 494 13838 01 Figure 2 26 Configure Computer Menu 5 Use the J key to highlight Configure computer advanced method and PRESS Enter The Configuration files are loaded and verified The program then presents a screen showing your current configuration PRESS Alt s for System 6 Use the 7 keys to highlight Open and PRESS Enter 2 48 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors The following messages appear Current configuration information will be lost if you continue Select lt Ok gt to continue or select lt Cancel gt to return to previous screen 7 Select lt Ok gt using the gt lt keys and PRESS Enter A list of configuration files appears Refer to Table 2 8 for possible file names and applicable configurations Use the LT keys to select the proper
225. it is not a type of Series 700 correct it 3 Ifthe external system name is Series 700 and the problem persists check the port group number The group number identifies an associated group of ports This number must coincide with the group number of the port that is used to communicate with the multiplexer Run the Edit Port Configuration edpc command and check the entry for your group The xx yy designates the actual port that is used on the IPC card 4 Ifthe problem still persists check the NAP speed Communication cannot occur if the NAP speed is incorrect To check the NAP speed do one of the following e If you are using a 74x multiplexer check the NAP configuration at the multiplexer and change it if necessary e If you are using a 719 NETWORKER at the ASCII terminal connected to the 719 check the configuration via the 719 menu If having done all this the problem has not been solved check the host processor for problems associated with IPC 1600 card see Chapter 8 Running Diagnostics 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 C 11
226. k k ok a Board Configuration Ports Card Type IPC 900 Interrupt number 5 I O ports Starting address 2B0 Controller Memory Starting address D2000 EEEE EE os fe of fe of E os he os fe 2 hs fe E os he k os ahs os oe oR hs k ok oe k k k k kk k kkk Is this configuration acceptable y or n If these values are correct indicate yes as follows TYPE y PRESS Enter If the values are incorrect indicate no as follows TYPE n PRESS Enter to reenter the values At this point the installation script modifies some system configuration files and rebuilds the UNIX operating system This takes a few minutes 5 92 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 9 The system displays the following prompt Do you want the kernel to boot by default y n TYPE y PRESS Enter 10 The system displays the following prompt Do you want the kernel environment rebuilt y n TYPE y PRESS Enter 11 Shut down and reboot the system TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE shutdown g0 y i6 The command will shutdown and reboot the system NOTE If you are migrating a database to Release 4 2 you must perform the migration before configuring your ANALYSIS network on NMS Configuration After the ANALYSIS Gateway software is installed the NMS application program must be started and then the configuration data can be entered After the data is entered the NMS system must be rebooted 1
227. kernel to boot by default y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The system will back up the old UNIX and install the new one When this is done the following message appears Do you want the kernel environment rebuilt y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The installation process is now complete The following message appears The kernel has been rebuilt Shutdown and reboot the system The installation of the 6800 NUS APPLICATION VOLUME 5 is now complete Remove the floppy disk and cartridge tape At the prompt TYPE cd PRESS Enter If you are loading an Altos 5000 system go to Step a If you are loading an Altos 15000 system go to Step b a For an Altos 5000 system enter the following command to reboot in multi user mode TYPE shutdown g0 y i6 PRESS Enter 5 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The system prompts INIT Single User Mode Type CONTROL d to proceed with normal startup or give root passwrd for system maintenance PRESS Cntl d When the login prompt appears the procedure on the Altos 5000 is complete b For an Altos 15000 system enter the following command to reboot in single user mode TYPE shutdown g0 y il PRESS Enter The system prompts INIT New run level S INIT Single User Mode Type CONTROL d to proceed with normal startup or give root passwrd for system maintenance PRESS Cntl d When the login prompt appears the procedure on the Altos 150
228. laced in the city code field The country and city codes for Belfast would appear in the Release 4 2 site profiles as 442 and 32 rather than 44 and 232 However this does not cause an error in site placement Although these fields can be revised in the site profile after migration there is no technical need to do so e Except for the delimiters described above non digits in the phone number are ignored Backing Up the Database For both the 6830 and 6820 NMS the data to be migrated is downloaded to a cartridge tape using the Release 1 0 NMS database backup utility This data is then uploaded to the Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS via this backup cartridge tape Data transfer is nondestructive no data on the source NMS is modified or deleted Perform the following steps to backup the database 1 With the Network Management System menu displayed on the Release 1 NMS console select Copy Restore Data The Copy Format List Restore menu appears 2 Select Copy Databases to Removable Medium To do this TYPE c PRESS Enter The User Data Copy menu appears 3 Select All of the Above Databases To do this TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The User Data Copy Medium Selection menu appears NOTE Although not all databases are migrated to the Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS for archival purposes all databases are backed up Once the backup process is completed choose the List Databases Stored on Removable Medium option on the User Data Copy Forma
229. le 2 6 for an Altos 15000 Replace the card and power up the processor Emulex DCP 286i Diagnostic Program for Altos 5000 Systems Only To run the diagnostic program that comes with the Emulex DCP 286i card you need the disk entitled DCP286i Diag Disk Rev A that is shipped with the card and a bootable MS DOS disk With these items perform the following steps 1 Move the RESET RUN key on the front panel clockwise to the RUN position to reboot the System 5000 if the System 5000 is turned off at this point move the power switch on the rear panel to the ON position instead The System 5000 will run through its normal power up sequence and display the following message Press spacebar to interrupt autoboot 2 PRESS the spacebar immediately The Boot Menu displays see Figure 8 1 3 Insert the bootable MS DOS disk into disk drive and select Option 2 to boot from the floppy 4 Once the System 5000 has booted insert the disk entitled DCP286i Diag Disk Rev A into the disk drive and TYPE DCPDIAG2 PRESS Enter The diagnostic s Main Menu displays with the highlight positioned on the option Run 5 To run the program PRESS Enter When the program finishes the system returns to the Main Menu 6 To exit the program and return to MS DOS highlight Exit and PRESS Enter 8 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Running Diagnostics Emulex DCP MUXi Diagnostic Program The diagnostic program that comes with the Emulex DC
230. letion of the migration script perform the following Shutdown the NMS and restart it Turn polling on again with the edams command If your NMS has ANALYSIS systems connected and you wish to change or add systems perform the configuration steps now as specified in the Configuration section Backup the 4 2 database onto new cartridge tapes 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 41 Overview Running Diagnostics OVeIVIEW 2 sisi tees bed oan Pred eld Ug eens ee eee ees 8 1 SDX Diagnostic Program 0 0 cece eens 8 2 StarLAN 10 NAU Diagnostic Program 0 000 e eee eee 8 4 IPC 900 Diagnostic Program for Altos 5000 Systems Only 8 5 IPC 1600 Diagnostic Program 0 0 ccc eee eee 8 9 Emulex DCP 286i Diagnostic Program for Altos 5000 Systems Only 8 11 Emulex DCP MUXi Diagnostic Program 00000 c eee ee eee 8 12 This chapter explains how to use the diagnostic programs that are shipped with the NMS These programs are used to detect and solve hardware problems in the Altos 5000 and 15000 systems and the circuit cards both required and optional that are installed in it Each system comes with a series of built in diagnostics These programs known as the Power On Self Test POST are run automatically every time the systems are turned on and detect certain hardware failures missing equipment and configuration errors If any problems are detected a message displays indicating t
231. levant sections in the MS DOS User s Guide before attempting to install NMW 1 Turn the computer s power on 2 At the C gt prompt TYPE md nmw PRESS Enter to create a directory named NMW 5 88 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 3 Make the NMW directory the current directory To do this TYPE cd nmw PRESS Enter 4 Locate the NMW program disk and insert it into Drive A 5 Copy the NMW program files from the disk in Drive A to the hard disk Drive C To do this at the C gt prompt TYPE copy a nmw PRESS Enter 6 Return to the root directory To do this TYPE cd PRESS Enter 7 Inthe AUTOEXEC BAT file add a path statement or modify its existing path statement to include the NMW directory created in Step 2 If you do not have an AUTOEXEC BAT file you must create one and enter the path in it that includes the NMW directory To perform either task e Use an available text editor such as EDIT or EDLIN to create anew AUTOEXEC BAT file or modify an existing AUTOEXEC BAT file e Use the text editor to enter the following line in the AUTOEXEC BAT file path c nmw or add c nmw to an existing path variable 8 Once you have created a path with the NMW directory in it you must execute the AUTOEXEC BAT file to allow the new path to take effect To do this TYPE autoexec PRESS Enter 9 Torun the NMW program TYPE win rnmw PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 3
232. lication Volume 1 A floppy disk labeled 6800 UIP Application Volume 2 A cartridge tape labeled 6800 UIP Application Volume 3 A floppy disk labeled 6800 UIP Application Volume 4 A cartridge tape labeled 6800 UIP Application Volume 5 With these items perform the following steps 1 Turn on the UIP and make sure the RESET key is in the RUN position The UIP begins the boot process and runs through its internal memory checks When the memory check is over the following message appears Press space bar to interrupt autoboot NOTE If an error message about memory appears ignore it and continue the procedure PRESS the spacebar immediately The menu in Figure 5 6 appears to boot from Hard Disk to boot from Floppy to boot from Tape to enter BIOS setup Enter Option 492 13954 Figure 5 6 System 5000 Boot Menu Installing UNIX on UIP NOTE If this menu does not appear you missed the time out window You must restart the procedure 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 41 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 2 Insert the 6800 UIP Application Volume 1 floppy disk and TYPE 2 no Enter necessary Several status messages appear followed by the prompt shown below Boot 3 To begin the automatic boot process PRESS Enter Several status messages appear followed by Insert Volume 2 floppy and Volume 3 Cartridge tape and press lt Return gt 4 Insert the required flopp
233. lined is the default To change the default press the MODE button until the cursor is positioned on the value you want to replace the default b Press the LF button to select that value The printer will draw a line under the value indicating selection and move the cursor to the next setting c Repeat this procedure for each setting that needs to be changed 3 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Printers QUALITY FONT CHR WIDE CHR HIGH CHAR SPC LINE SPC EMULATE ATTRIB PAGE LG COLOR LEFT END TOP MRGN LANGUGE CHAR SET GRAPH LF PERFRATN WIDTH ZEROFONT DC3 CODE CR CODE LF CODE RGHTEND LETTER COUR 10 NORMAL NORMAL 10CPI 6LPI DPL24C NONE 11INCH AUTOSEL 1COLM 1LINE 13 6INCH NO SLASH ENABLE CR ONLY LF amp CR WRAP 5 When you have changed all necessary MENU1 settings you are ready to access the second SETUP function HARDWARE To do this press the MODE button until the cursor is positioned next to HARDWARE The HARDWARE function consists of six individual printer settings These settings are shown below along with the correct value for each setting PPR OUT PRNT DIR BUZZER WORD LG BUFFER FEEDER DETECT 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 6 Follow the procedure described in Step 4 to print the HARDWARE settings and compare them to the correct settings shown above If any of the settings are in
234. llation activity that is currently taking place After the NMS database summary tables have been created the installation program will prompt How many UIPs do you have 0 1 or 2 TYPE n Where n is the number of UIPs connected to the NMS The possible values of n are 0 1 or 2 PRESS Enter The program prompts for the UIP system name with uip 1 as the default name TYPE the name of the first UIP PRESS Enter The system prompts for confirmation TYPE y PRESS Enter If more than one UIP is to be configured the following message appears Enter the name of UIP2 uip 2 TYPE the name of the second UIP PRESS Enter 5 24 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The system prompts for confirmation TYPE y PRESS Enter NOTE If you plan to use the default network configuration on an Altos 5000 System you must enter uip 1 as the uip name A series of additional messages appears indicating that the kernel files are being updated the configuration file created and the full feature workstation installed The following message appears Do you wish to have the screen saver capability y n n TYPE y for an automatic time out of the CRT PRESS Enter or TYPE n for a continuous display PRESS Enter The installation program displays a message indicating that the post installation phase of the installation is complete At this point the operating system is
235. llation of the following Field Upgrade packages at the customer s location ANALYSIS NMS Package The ANALYSIS NMS package provides cut through to the ANALYSIS 5600 5605 and 6510 network management systems To communicate with these systems an AT amp T Intelligent Ports Card Model 900 IPC 900 must be installed in the host processor 3270 Emulation Package The 3270 Emulation package permits a full feature or basic feature workstation connected to the Altos System 5000 host processor to emulate a 3270 terminal and communicate with a Systems Network Architecture SNA based processor 16 Control Channel Package A second DCP MUXi circuit card for the Altos System 5000 host processor is supported This card provides an additional eight control channels for connecting control devices Token Ring Package The Token Ring package provides support for customers with sites where there is an existing Token Ring Local Area Network The Token Ring thus would operate in place of the default Ethernet transport layer and support SNMP trap importation and cut through to X11 R4 applications No preinstallation actions are needed for the Token Ring Network Interface Card NIC but you must install the driver software and run the EISA Configuration Utility ECU Automatic Backup and Restore Package The Automatic Backup and Restore package provides support for automatically backing up and restoring all the NMS database files and directories on a sc
236. lled on the Sun Workstation after you have ensured that both Sun OS and OpenWindows are properly installed and running You must follow the steps below 1 Place the NMS Application Disk in the floppy drive and login as root TYPE cd usr PRESS Enter TYPE cpio icvd lt dev fd0 PRESS Enter When the files have been copied from the floppy disk TYPE cdnms PRESS Enter TYPE configure PRESS Enter The system prompts Do you want StartUp configured for a server y n allows automatic connections to host oh startup TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts Please enter node name of host where NMS has been loaded TYPE node name of NMS host machine PRESS Enter The system prompts Please enter the node name of the UIP where NMS has been loaded If a UIP has been configured on the NMS TYPE node name of UIP PRESS Enter Otherwise PRESS Enter The system displays the following message The StartUp and StartUpUIP files have been copied to usr bin TYPE eject PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 85 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 7 Remove the floppy disk from the disk drive Generic X Terminal This full feature workstation is intended to be workstation hardware defined by the user which can run MS DOS Version 5 0 and either the GrafPoint X One software product or another manufacturer s X11 R4 server package To allow the 6800 NMS In
237. m 5000 Table 2 5 Altos 15000 Factory and Field Installable Circuit Cards Memory ee Slot Card Address IRQ I O Address Description 2 IPC 1600 FOOOOO FOFFFF 11 110 11F Provides 16 serial ports Field 15m installed 4 Emulex DCP DC000 DFFFF 33C 33F Provides eight control channels that MUXi monitor modem and DSU networks Field installed 5 Emulex DCP D8000 DBFFF 23C 23F Provides a second set of eight control MUXi channels for monitoring networks Field installed 6 ECA 10 6C80 6CAF Supports Ethernet connection to the UIP and the full feature workstation 8 SCSI Controller 14 8C80 8CAF Controls the hard disk s floppy disk and cartridge tape drive 9 Video A0000 C7FFF 9 3B0 3DF Provides VGA level graphics Multiple 2 30 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Opening the System 15000 CAUTION 1 Make sure the ac power cord is not connected to the System 15000 before opening the computer and attempting to perform any field installation activity 2 To prevent static discharge that may damage the hardware wear a ground strap or otherwise ground yourself to the chassis before opening the computer and installing any circuit cards To open the Altos System 15000 and install circuit cards perform the following steps 1 Slide the top cover towards the rear of the chassis approximately 75 as shown in Figur
238. matrix printer To modify its default settings you use the buttons on the front control panel This panel is shown in Figure 3 1 The following procedure explains how to use the front control panel to modify the settings 1 Remove the printer from its carton connect the power cable to the printer plug the power cable into an outlet and turn the printer s power on For detailed instructions consult the Fujitsu DL5600 Dot Matrix Printer User s Manual that comes with the machine 2 Once the printer has been powered on you can modify its settings To do this you must first put the printer in SETUP mode Press the RESET and ONLINE buttons at the same time The message SETUP MODE will appear in the display area of the front control panel This message is then replaced by the message FUNCTN SEL MENU 3 SETUP mode consists of a number of functions The first function is referred to as MENU1 To access this function press the FF button The message MENUI1 will appear in the display area The MENU1 function consists of 22 individual printer settings These settings are shown below along with the correct value for each setting these values are correct for both serial and parallel connections to the host processor LED Indicators Upper Section Labels OPpoweR CALARM ONLINE EXIT FUNCTION ITEM SELECT ONLINE FF LF RESET l 16 digit display SETUP LOAD MICROLF ALT a Pushbuttons Lower Section
239. ment System Main Processor Card Slot Memory Board Slot S bus Slots 494 14508 01 Figure 2 19 Altos 15000 Motherboard and Bus Connectors To install the MPX module perform the following steps 1 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the screw from the card s metal bracket Save the screw for later use Gently disengage the card s bus connectors from S bus Slot 1 and slide the card out of the chassis 2 On the MPX module see Figure 2 18 screw two separator posts into the top middle and top right holes in the card Attach the remaining three separator posts to the top left bottom left and bottom right holes on the MPX module using the hexagonal nuts provided 3 Make sure that the jumper at J5 see Figure 2 18 on the main processor card is placed on Pins 2 and 3 to indicate that two CPUs are present 4 Position the MPX module with its connector mating with the J2 connector see Figure 2 18 on the main processor card and press firmly until the connector is fully seated 2 36 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors 5 From the other side of the main processor card attach the MPX module to the main processor card using the Phillips head screws 6 Slide the main processor
240. ments permit five basic configurations These are explained below 4 28 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components One Local 719 NETWORKER If the configuration includes a 719 NETWORKER running ACCULINK 3 K firmware then all three NMS ports can be connected to the NETWORKER Figure 4 16 Earlier versions of the firmware do not support the command language and consequently must be used in conjunction with the ACCULINK 74x see the One Local ACCULINK Multiplexer and One 719 NETWORKER section for details Host Processor 035 0153 0031 EH CcChannel LT CChannel E LChannel External Systems Port 035 0153 0031 719 NETWORKER Command 035 0153 0031 IPC 1600 Card LL 002 0039 0031 Connector E4 002 0021 0031 Connector 491 13912 Figure 4 16 Connections for 719 NETWORKER to Host Processor 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 29 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Two Local ACCULINK Multiplexers Each 74x multiplexer has two NAPs Consequently if two local 74x multiplexers are used all three multiplexer ports can connect to any three of the four available NAPs The NAPs are then individually configured to provide transmission compatibility Figure 4 17 shows the connections for two local ACCULINK multiplexers Host Processor 035 0153 0031 External Systems 7 Port 035 0153 0031 Command 035 0153 0031 Port IPC 1600 Card ACCULINK MUX LL
241. messages appear TCP IP Configuration Complete Altos TCP IP Runtime installation complete The system displays the currently configured chains and then the following menu 5 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Available options 1 Add a chain 2 Remove a chain 3 Reconfigure an element in a chain q Quit Select option TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system displays the top level chain descriptions and prompt Select top level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE 1 for altos Mtcp PRESS Enter The system prompts Select next level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE n PRESS Enter Where nis 5 on Altos 5000 platform 6 on Altos 15000 platform The system prompts for confirmation Add chain altos_tcp gt aaa y n TYPE y PRESS Enter Where aaa is en0 on Altos 5000 platform enc00 on Altos 15000 platform The following messages appear Adding altos_tcp gt aaa Enable aaa driver If you are installing an Altos 5000 host go to Step 19 Otherwise the following messages appear ALTOS ETHERNET CHANNEL ADAPTER SETUP This utility is used to setup the ECA board device driver You may install or display the driver configuration To install the ECA driver or change the driver configuration there are several parameters that you must supply These are listed as follows a The number of ECA boards installed in the system b The EISA slot number of each ECA board c The Inter
242. mp T Paradyne NMS Parameters Menu Release 4 0 Database Migration 7 35 7 8 Original Menu Showing Selected Type R 00 00 0000 eee eee 7 37 vi January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Table of Contents Figure Page 8 1 Boot Menu t2c345 cea ee eae ee hi es habe 8 2 8 2 SDX Mam Ment 6 2 we ee oe a ee a hae a a SEN 8 3 8 3 StarLAN IRQ Strapping 0 eee cee 8 4 8 4 Port to Port Connections sasa esne a e eects 8 8 8 5 Dip Switch Settings for Memory Address 0 000 eee ee eee 8 9 C 1 Power Connections for 740 Multiplexers without Expansion Shelf C 3 C 2 Power Connections for 740 Multiplexers with Expansion Shelf C 4 C 3 Power Connections for 745 Multiplexers 0 0 0 0 00 eee eee C 5 C 4 4336 Power Supply for 740 Multiplexers 0 000000000000 C 6 C 5 4336 Power Supply Connection for 745 Multiplexers 00 C 7 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 Table of Contents List of Tables Table Page l 1 Processor Configurations 0 0 0 cece eee teenies 1 2 2 1 Altos 5000 Factory and Field Installable Circuit Cards 0 2 4 2 2 DCP MUXi I O Address Switch Settings 00 0000 00000 2 13 2 3 Altos 5000 UIP Factory and Field Installable Circuit Cards 2 22 2 4 Altos 5000 UIP Conversion Matrix 0 0 0 eee ee eee eee 2 27 2 5 Altos 15000 Factory and Field
243. n Usage Pin Diagram Part 25 pin male Sub D to Connects remote DCE See ANALYSIS 835 4613 2511 25 pin male Sub D interface to ANALYSIS 5600 documentation for Paradyne terminal cable via an 002 0019 0031 pinouts controller cable connector Feature 6821 F1 516 Part 8 pin modular cable Daisy chains ANALYSIS Pin to pin 835 4949 0311 hubbing devices Part 25 pin male Sub D to Printers Connects the Pin to pin 835 5783 0011 25 pin male Sub D remote system printer to the M25B cable remote 2224 CEO DDD modem DCX Multiplexers Connects remote DCX multiplexer s MIU to DCE device ANALYSIS Connects ANALYSIS 6510 5605 to DCE device VT 100 Connects computer system requiring VT 100 terminal emulation to the DCE device B 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Maintaining Multiplexers OVELVIEW A i ini Ve bade EE fered ES Usa ee eles ee Bee eed C 1 General Troubleshooting Procedures 0 00 0 e eee eee ee C 1 Command Port Failure 2 0 0 eee eee eee C 2 Multiplexer Problems 00 cee cee cece eee a C 2 NAP Speed i 525 to shai a aoe edd chee tee E a bees C 8 Event Port Failufen teen ni hastx te Senn bie et ee ta de C 9 Faulty Connections iesene hide eo erate es Pee eee ete Fee ogee C 9 Software Configuration Errors 0 0 0 eee ee eee C 9 Event Log Printer Problems 00 c eee eee eee eee C 11 External Systems Port Failure 0 0 eee ee eee C 11 Overview This appendi
244. n all changes required as indicated by Table 3 6 have been entered go to Step 6 Press the ENTER button This exits the SET UP mode and returns the printer to the normal printing mode state No printing occurs 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 17 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System The printer functions should be set as shown in Table 3 7 Table 3 7 Printer Functions Printout Function No Function Menu No Status 01 EMULATION 01 EPSON FX 800 02 FORM LENGTH 12 11 inches 03 LINE SPACING 01 1 6 inches 04 LINE LENGTH 03 80 CHARACTERS 05 CHARACTER PITCH 01 10CPI 06 12 CPI FONT SELECTION 02 FAST FONT 07 FONT SELECTION 01 DATA PROCESSING 08 NLQ 2 SELECTION 01 LETTER GOTHIC 09 POWER ON 01 ON LINE 10 QUIET MODE 02 INVALID 11 AUTOLOADING 02 OFF LINE 12 PRINT DIRECTION 02 BI DIRECTIONAL DP 13 BUFFER FULL 01 LINE FEED 14 LINE FEED ON CR__CODE 02 INVALID 15 CARRIAGE RETURN ON LINE FEED 02 INVALID 16 CAN CODE 01 VALID 17 PAPER EMPTY SENSOR 01 VALID 18 SKIP PERFORATION 01 VALID 19 ZERO CHARACTER 01 NOT SLASHED 20 SELECTION OF RAM 01 PRINT BUFFER 21 ASF 01 NOT INSTALLED 22 TEAR OFF 01 INVALID 23 IBM CHARACTER SET 01 SET 1 24 EPSON CHARACTER SET 01 ITALIC 1 CODE ENABLE 25 EPSON INTERNATIONAL CHA SET 01 AMERICAN 26 SELECT IN SIGN 02 INVALID 27 AUTOFEED XT SIGN 02 INVALID 28 INTERFACE 02 SERIAL 29
245. n equivalent ratios among the processors for best performance Save your changes then exit vi TYPE vi HOME rhosts PRESS Enter Add the names of all workstations connected to the host processor one name to a line Save these changes and exit vi NOTE If a full feature workstation is to communicate with the UIP do not put that workstation s IP address and processor name in the host s etc hosts or rhosts files 3 To change the IP address of a host already configured at the factory TYPE netconfig PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 31 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System The system displays the following menu Available options 1 Add a chain 2 Remove a chain 3 Reconfigure an element in a chain q Quit Select option TYPE 2 PRESS Enter The system displays the current chains including the following 2 altos_tcp gt aaa Select a chain to remove Where aaa is en0 for System 5000 enc00 for System 15000 TYPE 2 PRESS PRESS Enter The system prompts for confirmation Remove altos_tcp gt aaa y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The chain is removed the existing chains are redisplayed followed by the menu of available options You need to reestablish the chain that was just removed TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system displays the top level chain descriptions and prompt Select top level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE 1 for altos_tcp
246. n procedures for both host processors are nearly identical To convert the host processor into a full feature workstation perform the following tasks e Remove unnecessary circuit cards from the processor e Install a3COM 3C503 EtherLink II card or StarLAN 10 Network Access Unit circuit card e Low level format the hard disk e Load MS DOS X One and the full feature workstation software e Install the Paradise Windows Accelerator video card Below is a step by step procedure for the host processor conversion This procedure assumes the reuse of the StarLAN NAU card See Chapter 2 Preparing the Processors for details regarding installation of a 3COM 3C503 EtherLink II card 1 Open the 6386 25 computer The procedure is described in detail in Chapter 2 of the COMSPHERE 6820 NMS Installation and Maintenance Guide 2 Identify the circuit cards that must be removed from the 6386 25 Table 2 10 shows all cards that must be removed 3 Remove each of the cards by removing the chassis screw and gently lifting up the two ends of the card Table 2 10 6386 25 Circuit Cards to Be Removed Release 1 Release 2 Slot Circuit Card Slot Circuit Card 3 IPC 900 2 IPC 900 5 IPC 900 5 DCP 286i 6 DCP 286i 6 IPC 900 IPC 1600 Check Slot 3 to determine if there is a StarLAN 10 NAU installed in the 6386 25 Remove and appropriately option the StarLAN 10 NAU card Follow the instructions below 2 54 January 1997 6800 A2 GN
247. n the Altos System 5000 UIP 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 2 3 Altos 5000 UIP Factory and Field Installable Circuit Cards Memory ee Slot Card Address IRQ I O Address Description 1 Base I O 1000 101F Controls the hard disk s floppy disk and cartridge tape drives Integral 10 1CD0 1CD2 Supports connection to host full Ethernet feature workstations Incompatable with Token ring card 3 Video A0000 C7FFF 46E8 3B0 3DF Provides VGA level graphics 6 Proteon ProNet E 10 EE Optional Provides support for Token Ring Token Ring local area network Card communication with hosts and full feature workstations Incompatible with Integral Ethernet 8 IPC 1600 E10000 E1FFFF 11 110 11F Optional Provides 16 serial ports The IPC 1600 is required on UIP 1 with Altos 15000 host Opening the Altos 5000 UIP The procedures for opening the System 5000 UIP are the same as for the System 5000 host Refer to the section Opening the System 5000 Host for precise instructions Installing Additional Memory on the System 5000 The UIP shipped with Release 4 2 has 32 megabytes of memory If that UIP is connected to an Altos 15000 host it requires an additional 16 megabytes Upgrading from a prior release of NMS may also require additional memory to be installed see Table 2 4 To upgrade the memory on the Altos 50
248. n up procedure prior to Paradyne upgrading to the System 5000 hardware It is the customer s responsibility to verify the accuracy of the database prior to the migration The following databases will be migrated e The device profile database e The link profile database profiles are migrated to facility profiles in this process e The site profile database profiles are automatically created based on information found in migrated device profiles e The historical faults database migration of faults data may be bypassed via a user controlled option e The node connectivity table and channel group information 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System The following databases will not be migrated e Port configuration database e User profile databases e Routines and scheduler databases e Trouble tickets The databases that are not migrated must be manually entered into the Release 4 2 For this purpose print a hard copy of user profiles routines schedules and trouble tickets that need to be migrated Cleaning Up the Database A number of device profile fields in the source NMS database should be checked before migration If the data in these fields is inaccurate incomplete or in a format not suitable for migration the impact may be multiple omissions or inaccuracies in the Release 4 2 database An additional concern is that many fields are converted to a single case
249. name appears in remote_host s etc hosts equiv or etc hosts Ipd file Make sure that remote_printer appears in remote_host s etc printcap file Make sure that remote_printer has a spool directory on remote_host Putting remote_printer in printer description file and creating spool dir Updating LP information done Updating usr spool Ip default done The system then prompts as in Step 4 If you have more remote printers to configure go to Step 4 Ifall remote printers have been configured TYPE q PRESS Enter Add the following line to the local processor s etc hosts file for each remote printer server processor with one or more remote printers IP address remote_host_name Where IP address is the internet address of the NMS host processor remote_host_name is the official name of the remote printer server processor NOTE Remember that you must run rlpconf on the remote host to enter the name of the printer in that system s etc printcap file Ensure that the NMS host processor name is included in the remote processor s etc hosts pd and etc hosts files The entry in the etc hosts file is in the form IP_address local_host_name The entry in the etc hosts pd file is in the form local_host_name 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 3 23 Connecting the Components OVerview 2 seins neste eatin yeas ees Mee ose eles eet hes 4 2 SSEM CONSOLE a has sectace chen Abd a a AE gaia
250. nd of the 835 3564 2511 cable to the terminal port of the computer system requiring VT100 terminal emulation 4 42 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Netview PC Alerts can be exported to the NetView PC If this option is chosen your system cannot be configured with an alert log printer The diagram in Figure 4 21 illustrates the connection You can connect a NetView PC either locally or remotely The following sections explain Connecting Locally To connect to a local Net View PC you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0052 0031 connector To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0052 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0052 0031 connector to the serial port on the NetView PC 035 0153 0031 cx 835 3564 2511 iim aes IBM NetView PC 035 0153 0031 H IBM NetView PC IPC 1600 Card 491 143914 1 DCE Interface LL 002 0039 0031 Connector B 002 0052 0031 Connector Figure 4 21 Netview PC Connection 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 43 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Connecting Remotely To connect a remote NetView PC to the host processor you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector e T
251. nd workstation capacity and a new feature set The current software release is available on two hardware platforms the Altos System 5000 and the Altos System 15000 The fundamental difference between the two platforms is that both the capacity enhancements and the new feature set are available on the Altos 15000 platform and only the new features are available on the Altos 5000 platform The Altos 5000 platform is nearly identical to the hardware configuration seen in Release 3 1 and Release 4 1 Basic optional differences are the Token Ring Local Area Network LAN support third hard disk drive support for automatic database backup and restore and support for 16 control channels with a second DCP MUXi card The Altos 15000 platform consists of a multiprocessor and two mandatory User Interface Processors UIPs This hardware configuration allows a larger number of simultaneous users workstations and devices than previous releases The configuration also supports the new feature set Table 1 1 shows the configurations for the five processors The differences among the processors include the type of LAN which they use to communicate among host UIP and full feature workstations and the availability of the optional feature packages Communication with the basic feature workstations is done through the serial ports on the processors 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 1 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 1 1 Processor
252. nect to the control channels This is explained in the following section All of these devices can be connected to the control channels either locally or remotely The two sections following the description of the hubbing device explain how to connect these devices to the control channels both locally and remotely Using a Hubbing Device For connection to a control channel the COMSPHERE standalone devices must be equipped with the hubbing device The hubbing device permits multiple devices to be daisy chained together The hubbing device is not required for carrier mounted devices Figure 4 13 shows an example of a control channel daisy chain To chain together COMSPHERE standalone devices to a control channel perform the following steps 1 To start the daisy chain connect the control channel to the modular jack marked CCIN DCOUT on the hubbing device connected to the first device 2 To extend the daisy chain to the other devices connect the cable from the CCOUT DCIN jack on the first hubbing device to the CCIN DCOUT jack on the hubbing device connected to the next device 3 Continue to daisy chain devices in this manner as necessary You can daisy chain up to 256 devices in a single control channel DATAPHONE II and COMSPHERE devices can be daisy chained together on the same control channel by connecting the CC OUT jack on the DATAPHONE II modem chain to the CCIN DCOUT jack on the COMSPHERE hubbing device with an 035 0106 0531
253. ng Migration 20 21 22 23 24 25 When the pound sign prompt appears TYPE exit PRESS Enter to return to the Console Login prompt At the Console Login prompt TYPE nms PRESS Enter TYPE The nms password the default is startmenu PRESS Enter The Release 4 2 6800 NMS Main Menu appears To continue TYPE 1 PRESS Enter to select Start the System The following message appears Starting the AT amp T Paradyne NMS system Please wait The system performs database error checking and then starts the NMS When the start up is complete the following message appears The AT amp T Paradyne NMS system has been successfully started Press RETURN to continue To continue PRESS Enter The Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS Main Menu appears To return to the Console Login prompt TYPE 11 PRESS Enter At the Console Login prompt PRESS nms PRESS Enter TYPE The full feature workstation password the default password is no password just press Enter PRESS Enter The NMS application is brought up and the NMS login window appears 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 23 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Checking the Migrated Database Following NMS start up the integrity of the migrated data should be verified The following procedures may be executed for that purpose 1 11 Bring up the System Management window and execute the Create Network Map crnm
254. ng prompt appears Do you want this kernel to boot by default y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The system back up the old UNIX and installs the new one When this is done the following message appears Do you want the kernel environment rebuilt y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The installation process is now complete The following message appears The kernel has been rebuilt Shutdown and reboot the system The installation of the 6800 NMS Application Volume 5 is now complete Remove the floppy disk and cartridge tape At the pompt to initiate a shutdown and automatically reboot the system enter the following commands TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE shutdown g0 y i6 PRESS Enter If no further action is taken the system boots up in multi user mode To speed up the process PRESS Ctrl d when prompted for normal start up 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 49 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System UIP Software The section describes the steps to install the UIP software into the Altos System 5000 The UNIX software must be installed before the UIP software is installed If adding the optional IPC 1600 card to the UIP you need to reload the UNIX and UIP software refer to the earlier section on loading the UNIX Software for the UIP NOTE If the UIP was previously installed and active you must first stop it via the uip login then select Option 2 Stop the System from the NMS Main Me
255. ng the System 5000 0 0 eee eee eee Installing the 16 Port Cabinet Assembly 0000 Altos System 5000 UIP 2 cece ce eee ener eens ircuit Cards Scr 8 ns Meier lcd lath sere i ihe tale Wee eee doa E Opening the Altos 5000 UIP 0 0 eee eee ee Installing Additional Memory on the System 5000 Preinstallation Checks for the Integral Ethernet Card Optional UIP Upgrade Packages 0 00 eee eee eee eee Preinstallation Steps for the IPC 1600 Upgrade Card Preinstallation Checks for the Token Ring Card Optional UIP Upgrade Procedures 0 00 e cee eee eee Converting Altos 5000 Processors to Release 4 2 UIPs UIP Conversion Procedures 0 0 c eee ee eee Connecting the Ethernet Card to the Network Closing the Altos 5000 UIP 02 2 eee Installing the 16 Port Cabinet Assembly 0 0000 Altos System 15000 Sie a id hee Ns Pee a EIEN oh Ges Hardware rs sis s28 08 oped hate oa ee wes Passes Ge ve Wee aes Citcuit Cards sic 8 cede este hice tay hae eee toe La Opening the System 15000 0 0 eee eee ee eee Installing the MPX Processor 0 0 eee e eee ence ene e eee Installing the Second and Third Hard Disks on the System 15000 Preinstallation Steps for the Second and Third Hard Disks on the System 15000 ogee sacha li are ee SN ed a
256. nges you have made to take effect the NMS system must be shut down and then restarted 10 Program execution is completed and the system displays the UNIX prompt You must shut down the NMS system and reboot the host computer See Chapter 6 for detailed instructions on how to reset the host computer Changing 6510 Parameters The following procedure provides information on changing the parameters for an existing 6510 1 The ANALYSIS Selection menu Figure 5 10 is displayed on your screen The letter n represents the number of ANALYSIS 6510 s already configured Maximum ANALYSIS 6510s supported 6 n Analysis 6510 s already installed Do you wish to Add a 6510 to the system Remove a 6510 from the system Change a 6510 s parameters Exit program Enter a number from 1 4 492 13958 01 Figure 5 10 ANALYSIS Selection Menu for Changing 6510 Parameters To change the parameters for an existing 6510 TYPE 3 PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 97 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 2 The system displays the following message Please select the 6510 1 System name 2 Cancel operation Enter a number from 1 to 7 depending on the number of 6510 s configured already TYPE number of the system to be changed PRESS Enter The system prompts you to change the ANALYSIS name port number and the number of local terminals on the ANALYSIS NMS The current parameters dis
257. nto the tape drive then PRESS Enter A series of status messages confirms that the installation program is reading and processing the contents of the floppy disk NOTE If the UIP is active an error message appears indicating that the software cannot be installed At this point the installation program checks for the existence of a previous release of the UIP if this is the first time UIP is being installed on this System 5000 you may skip this step and go directly to Step 5 If the system finds a previous release and the UIP system is active the system terminates the installation and issues a message telling you to stop the UIP and then re execute installpkg If the installation program finds a previous release of the UIP that is inactive the system continues with the installation and check for active workstations If one is found the system displays a message indicating this and asks you if you want to continue To continue you have to terminate the active workstation There are active workstations Do you wish to continue y n y TYPE y PRESS Enter To terminate the installation instead of the active workstation enter n instead Finally the installation program prompts you to remove the previous release To remove it and proceed with the installation The UIP has been previously installed The existing UIP will be removed if you continue Do you wish to continue y n TYPE y PRESS Enter
258. nu To install the UIP software you need the floppy disk labeled 6800 UIP Application Volume 6 and the tape labeled 6800 UIP Application Volume 7 At the UIP login TYPE root PRESS Enter NOTE The system cannot be installed from any other user login Set the system date and time by entering the command date MMDDhhmmyy where MM is the month DD the day hh the hour 24 hour system mm the minute and yy the last two digits of the year this is optional Set the proper time zone by entering the command etc tz The system prompts Are you in North America y n TYPE y as appropriate PRESS Enter The system displays a list of time zones for the area North America if you answered y to the question above and prompt Enter the number that represents your time zone of enter q to quit TYPE the number of the appropriate time zone PRESS Enter 5 50 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The system prompts Does daylight saving time summer time apply at your location y n TYPE y orn as appropriate to your location PRESS Enter Execute the installpkg command and begin the installation process TYPE installpkg PRESS Enter The installation program prompts you to insert a floppy disk into the disk drive and press Enter Insert the disk labeled 6800 UIP Application Volume 6 into the floppy drive and the 6800 UIP Application Volume 7 i
259. number during that procedure as is calculated in this step For example assume you have two local terminals attached to your ANALYSIS NMS Enter 2 in this step and the config6510 program will determine that four cut through sessions are permitted 6 minus 2 4 On the ANALYSIS NMS side you should enter 4 when prompted by the syssetup program for the number of cut through sessions For additional information refer to the ANALYSIS 6510 Automated Network Management System Reference Manual 5 The system prompts you to confirm the information entered in the previous steps Is the information correct y or n q to quit TYPE y if the displayed information is correct PRESS Enter 6 The database is updated and your selection is confirmed with the following message Please wait system name added to system where system name is the name entered in Step 2 7 To exit the configuration process TYPE 4 PRESS Enter 8 To add more 6510 configurations return to Step 1 5 96 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 9 After the requested ANALYSIS controller s is added the system displays the following message Do you wish to see a system summary y or n If you respond with y yes the system displays a list in the following format System Name CC Name Port Cut Throughs name al value value name a2 value value Please note For the cha
260. o OK and click the mouse button 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 6 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 4 To proceed with the shutdown TYPE nms PRESS Enter The system will prompt you to enter the NMS password TYPE the NMS password the default is startmenu PRESS Enter The Network Management System Menu Figure 6 1 displays 5 To select Stop the system TYPE 2 PRESS Enter A list of all running NMS processes displays followed by the message They will be shut down y n n 6 In response TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message displays Shutting down the AT amp T Paradyne NMS The AT amp T Paradyne NMS has been shutdown Press RETURN to continue 7 To continue PRESS Enter The Network Management System Menu Figure 6 1 will be displayed You can use this menu to restart the NMS application option 1 or to shut down UNIX and power down the system option 9 6 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 System Start Up and Shutdown Shutting Down UNIX on the Host Once the NMS application program has been shut down you can shut down UNIX and power down the entire system The following procedure explains how to do this 1 The Network Management System Menu Figure 6 1 displays TYPE 9 PRESS Enter to select Shutdown UNIX The following message displays Are you sure you want to shut down UNIX y n 2 To proceed with the shutdown TYPE y PRESS Enter NOTE Do no
261. o one of the connectors on the octopus cable attached to the DCP MUXi card in the host processor 2 Connect the other end of the 835 3564 2511 cable to the 035 0154 0031 cable 3 Connect the other end of the 035 0154 0031 cable to the CC IN jack of the DATAPHONE II modem For either a 4000 Series ICC housing 4400 Series Model 2 modems or a 3000 Series Carrier housing 3600 Series DSUs 3800 Series DDD modems or 3900 Series APL modems perform the following steps 1 Connect the 002 0025 0031 adapter to one of the connectors on the octopus cable attached to the DCP MUXi card in the host processor 2 Connect the 035 0145 5031 cable to the 002 0025 0031 adapter 3 Connect the other end of the 035 0145 5031 cable to the CCIN jack on the carrier When connecting carriers together in a chain use the 035 0109 0031 cable 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 25 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 035 0147 5031 035 0184 5031 Host Processor DATAPHONE I APL DDD Modem or DSU 035 0147 5031 035 0185 5031 _ _ _ COMSPHERE 3400 Series Modems 3600 Series DSUs 3800 Series DDD Modems Y DoE Interface 3900 Series APL Modems Hubbing Device 5506 06 for 3400 Modems 3600 F3 300 for 3600 3800 and 3900 Devices 493 13908 01 Figure 4 15 Remote Control Channel Connections Connecting Remotely The diagram in Figure 4 15 illustrates remote connections to the control channels Mat
262. o the C VXONE directory Insert the disk labeled Install in drive A Press ENTER to continue or q to Quit Insert the proper disk and PRESS Enter The system responds 1 file extracted from archive Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system prompts Select Network configuration 1 Grafpoint s own builtin TCP IP 2 Beame and Whiteside BW TCP 3 FTP Software s PC TCP version 2 05 4 FTP Software s PC TCP version 2 1 or later 5 6 7 Sun Microsystem s PC NFS ver s 3 5 3 9 Sun Microsystem s PC NFS ver 4 0 or later Woolongong s Pathway TCP Enter Selection or q to Quit 1 PRESS Enter The system then prompts Select Network Interface 4 3COM 3C503 Etherlink II Enter selection or q to Quit TYPE 4 PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 65 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 22 Select connector type 1 Thin net 2 External Transceiver thick net Enter selection or q to Quit 1 TYPE 1 PRESS Enter Enter I O Address in hex 300 TYPE 300 PRESS Enter NOTE If you are using basic network configuration check the IP address in Table 5 1 Otherwise consult with your System Administrator to ensure entering the correct IP address Enter this system s IP address TYPE IP address in format xxx xxx xxx xxx where xxx is a number from 1 to 255 inclusive PRESS Enter
263. o tty Select an option or enter q to quit q If nn is 99 sufficient pseudo ttys are already configured TYPE q PRESS Enter Go to Step 20 If annis less than 99 TYPE 1 PRESS Enter TYPE xx Where xx is a number sufficient to raise the total pseudo ttys to 99 PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 39 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 20 21 22 23 The netconfig options menu described in Step 2 appears TYPE q PRESS Enter The system prompts Do you want to relink the kernel now TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts Do you want this kernel to boot by default y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts Do you want the kernel environment rebuilt y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The relinking of the kernel and rebuilding of the kernel environment takes several minutes Then the following messages appear followed by the UNIX prompt The kernel have been successfully relinked and installed To activate it reboot your system Setting up new kernel environment At the prompt TYPE shutdown y g0 i6 PRESS Enter The system shuts down and reboots with the new configuration 5 40 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Unix Software for the UIP To install the UNIX Operating System on the UIP s hard disk you need the following software Select Select Select Select A floppy disk labeled 6800 UIP App
264. ocessor or UIP you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 10 pin modular to 10 pin modular cable e 002 0039 0031 ACU MODEM adapter Figure 4 28 illustrates the connection for both the host processor and UIP to the Bytex UMS for either the Bytex alerts or cut through Connecting the Host Processor to the Bytex UMS To connect a host processor to the Bytex UMS perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to a port on the IPC 1600 card 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 ACU MODEM adapter 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 ACU MODEM adapter to a port on the Bytex UMS Host Processor Bytex UMS IPC 1600 Card CL 002 0039 0031 ACU MODEM Adapter 492 14084 Figure 4 28 Bytex UMS Connection 4 56 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Connecting the UIP to the Bytex UMS To connect a UIP to the Bytex UMS perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to a port on the IPC 1600 card 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 ACU MODEM adapter 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 ACU MODEM adapter to a port on the Bytex UMS NOTE The connection to the UIP must be used only for cut through 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 57 Loading and Restoring Software OVELVIEW fini nian gos SAY conten oS Use Otel s ee teen 5 2 Order of In
265. of the hard disk 0 1 or type q to quit TYPE 0 PRESS Enter On both 5000 and 15000 platforms the system sets the operating system environment configures the hard disk creates a UNIX partition and divides the partition into file systems and swap space These processes take about fifteen minutes When this is complete the following message appears Altos UNIX System V Operating System Serialization When prompted use the seral number and activation key included with the Altos System V Operating System distribution Enter your serial number or enter q to quit TYPE the UNIX serial number found on the Serial Number card attached to the Release Notes PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 8 The following message appears Enter your activation key or enter q to quit TYPE the UNIX activation key found on the Serial Number card attached to the Release Notes PRESS Enter NOTE If either the serial number or activation key is entered incorrectly the system will prompt you again for the information If you quit at either of these steps you will have to start the installation process from the beginning Once the correct serial number and activation key are entered the system completes the base UNIX installation and displays the following message Choose Password You can choose whether you pick a password or have the system create one
266. ompts for confirmation Remove altos_tcp gt en0 y n TYPE y PRESS Enter 5 The options menu from Step 2 appears again TYPE 1 PRESS Enter 6 The system displays the top level chain descriptions and prompts Select top level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE 1 PRESS Enter 7 The system prompts Select next level of chain to Add or q to quit TYPE 17 for proO for the Proteon 4 16 Token Ring Rapidriver board 0 PRESS Enter 8 The system prompts for confirmation Add chain altos_tcp pro0 y n TYPE y PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 37 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 11 A menu of Proteon board types appears with p199x as the default The Rapidriver supports the following Proteon ProNet 4 16 boards On ISA machines p139x boards p1390 p1391 p1392 On MC machines p189x boards p1890 p1892 On EISA machines p1990 board plus the ISA boards Enter board family p139x p199x p199x or q to quit PRESS Enter The system prompts for the card slot number The following p199x boards have been found in your machine Slot Model Description 6 p1990 base 6000 irq 10 cable utp ring speed 16 Current pro driver slot assignment none Enter slot number 6 or q to quit TYPE 6 the slot number where the NIC is physically installed PRESS Enter The system prompts Restrict OSI and TCPIP broadcasts to the local ring y n or q to quit PRESS
267. onfiguration Parameters dsncp command and select either Event log 1 configuration or Event Log 3 configuration Enter the name or number of the node and check the entries in the following fields e Event log printer node name Check the name of the node to which the event log printer is connected e Event log printer node number Check the number of the node to which the event log printer is connected e Group Check the number of the network administration port NAP or the group that contains the channel on a 719 NETWORKER to which the 6800 Series NMS is connected e Events sent to Event Log Printer Check the status of the event type Only event types designated active are sent to the NMS If values are incorrect in any of these fields correct the entries using the Change Node Configuration Parameters chncp command External Systems Port Failure You may encounter a communication problem when you try to connect to a multiplexer using the External Systems task This type of problem is not identified by an alert To resolve the problem perform the following steps 1 Check the hardware connections as described in the section entitled General Troubleshooting Procedures above 2 Make sure the external system name you used to open the cut through connection is an external system configuration for the Series 700 multiplexer Run the Edit External System Configuration edesc command and check for your external system name entry If
268. onnects 035 0153 0031 cable to local DCE Bytex Switch Connects 035 0153 0031 cable to Bytex port NetView PC Remote IBM NetView PC connection to 6800 Connects 035 0153 0031 cable to local DCE interface ATR Connection Remote connection of ATR Line Printer to 6800 Connects 035 0153 0031 to local 2224 CEO DDD modem External Systems Connects to Series 700 multiplexers For local and remote connection of System Control SRC 839A DCX Multiplexer Bytex UMS and computer systems requiring VT100 Terminal Emulation ACCUMASTER Integrator StarKeeper Connects 035 0153 0031 to local and remote applications Feature Number Description Usage Pin Diagram Part 10 pin keyed modular System Printer For remote 10 pin 25 pin 002 0039 0031 jack to 25 pin male system printer connection to eee gt 6 10 position male Sub D ore ere 2 lt gt 22 ACU MODEM R cable to loca OS ate 8 adapter 2224 CEO DDD modem ae eee or Feature Workstations For remote Denan gt 7 ea basic feature workstation Gigs se E R gt 3 ree ee connection to 6800 Connects 7 ________ 52 6821 F 1 530 Sea cable to local ee a Be Q nnn gt 4 ANALYSIS Remote OE gt 1 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 B 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Table B 1 4 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Part Number Feature Number Description Usage Pin Diagram Part 10 pin male
269. orkstations To connect additional workstations you need to connect a dedicated workstation to the network hub unit The display units and keyboards on the two UIPs serve as the first two full feature workstations Figure 4 8 shows what the network looks like with five dedicated full feature workstations To connect the full feature workstations to the network hub unit you need a modular cable part number 035 0116 5031 Perform the following steps 1 Connect one end of the 035 0116 5031 cable to the EtherLink II card in the full feature workstation 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0116 5031 cable to a port on the network hub unit 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Host Processor ECA Altos 15000 Full Feature Workstation Full Feature Workstation Full Feature Workstation Full Feature Workstation Network Hub Unit User Interface Processor 1 035 0116 5031 c EtherLink II Card a EtherLink II Card i EtherLink II Card E EtherLink II Card Ethernet Card C Console Altos 5000 Full Feature Workstation User Interface Processor 2 Ethernet 035 0116 5031 Card Console Altos 5000 Full Feature Workstation E Full Feature EtherLink II Workstation H Card 494 14583 Figure 4 8 Altos 15000 Configuration for Additional Full Feature Workstations Cascading Network Hub Units If more than se
270. ormation as general guidelines Different values are possible and other modems may be used Configuring 3810 3811 and 3820 Modems To configure 3810 3811 and 3820 modems perform the following steps at both the host and remote ends of the modem pair 1 2 Select Configure from DCP using the right arrow key Select Factory using the right arrow key If the modem is used for ATR select UNIX dial using the right arrow key If the modem is used for remote workstation access select Async dial using the right arrow key Select Edit F1 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 A 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems 10 11 Select DTE Interface Select Async DTE_rate using the F1 key Using the right arrow key select the rate that matches what was set in the port configuration on the NMS Verify the Error Control Mode is set to V4 MNP of Buffer Press Double Arrow Up to save settings The LCD prompts Save Straps Yes No Press F1 for Yes and F1 again for Active If using 3830 modems use your DTE interface to set the modem options as indicated in the above steps Hardware Option Settings for the 2224 CEO The 2224 CEO modem has eight hardware option switches accessible from the front panel The option switch bank S1 is located under a cover near the left end of the front panel to the right of the speaker grill To access the switches slide the cover upwards The option switches sho
271. orrect respond n The system again requests entry from the Internet Address If the values are correct TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter DOMAIN name for node name or enter return to use net COM Where node name is the name of the system on which you are installing PRESS Enter The system prompts 99 Pseudo ttys are currently configured do you want to 1 Add Pseudo tty 2 Remove Pseudo tty Select an option of enter q to quit q TYPE q PRESS Enter The system displays TCP IP Configuration Complete followed by the Available Options Menu You should TYPE q PRESS Enter The system prompts Do you want to relink the kernel now TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you want this kernel to boot by default y n TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you want the kernel environment rebuilt y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The following messages appear to complete this process The kernel has been successfully linked and installed To activate it reboot your system 5 34 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software TYPE cd PRESS Enter TYPE shutdown g0 y i6 PRESS Enter The command will shutdown and reboot the system Installing Token Ring Software on the NMS Host UIP The Token Ring package is an optional feature that can only be installed on an Altos 5000 platform Do not proceed with this procedure unless the Token Ring LAN feature was purchased To install the Token Ring software on the
272. ot is necessary To go into the system maintenance mode TYPE root password PRESS Enter Insert the 6800 NMS Application Volume 4 floppy disk and 6800 NMS Application Volume 5 cartridge tape At the prompt TYPE installpkg PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System The system prompts for the tape and floppy and asks Strike ENTER when ready or ESC to stop PRESS Enter After the disk and tape are read the following message appears Done reading tape The system continues TCP IP Runtime Serialization Enter your serial number or enter q to quit CAUTION The serial number and activation key entered must be unique across all TCP IP nodes on the network to which the host is connected The TCP IP daemon will shut down for both nodes having equal serial number or activation keys TYPE serial number from distribution package PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter your activation key or enter q to quit TYPE activation key PRESS Enter Several status messages appear and the system then prompts Enter the system node name or enter return to use unix NOTE If you plan to use the default network configuration you must enter unix as the system node name and 1 1 1 1 as the internet address PRESS Enter to accept the default node name or TYPE system node name PRESS Enter The following
273. ote DCE device Materials Required To connect a 4400 Series Analog Private Line modem with the Poll Only Trib feature to the host processor you need the following materials e Two 035 0185 5031 cables 25 pin male to 6 pin modular e A 4400 F1 59 871A adapter 6 pin female to 6 pin female Connection Procedures To connect a 4400 Series APL modem with the Poll Only Trib feature perform the following steps 1 Connect the 25 pin connector end of the 035 0185 5031 cable to the octopus cable attached to the DCP MUXi card in the host processor 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0185 5031 cable to the 871A adapter 3 Connect the 6 pin end of the second 035 0185 5031 cable to the 871A adapter 4 Connect the 25 pin end of the second 035 0185 5031 cable to the CC IN of the 4400 Series APL modem Ensure that the connection from the modem with the Poll Only Trib feature runs from the DC OUT of that modem to the CC IN of the device s to be polled Set the address of any such polled device s one level lower than the Poll Only tributary Ensure that the modem using the Poll Only Trib feature is optioned as a tributary modem You must add the addresses of the device s you want to poll to the Poll Only Trib s DC poll list by accessing the PLIST menu from the LOCAL menu on the SDCP connected to the Poll Only Trib 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 27 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Connecting ACCULINK Multiplexers
274. other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the 2224CEO or 3810 modem 4 Connect the 2224CEO or 3810 modem to the Network Channel Terminating Equipment NCTE Refer to Appendix A Modem Settings for information on optioning 3810 3811 3820 or 2224CEO modems for this application Host ATR Connection at AT amp T Paradyne Technical Assistance Center Processor 035 0153 0031 A A ae Np o e fe 2224CEO Line Printer DDD Modem 491 13905 IPC 1600 Card LL 002 0039 0031 Connector Figure 4 22 ATR Connection 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 45 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System ACCUMASTER Integrator You can connect the ACCUMASTER Integrator either locally or remotely Figures 4 23 and 4 24 illustrate the connections The following explains Connecting Locally To connect a local ACCUMASTER Integrator Figure 4 23 to the host processor you will need the following materials e Three 035 0153 0031 cables e Three 002 0040 0031 connectors Host Processor Port Configured for UAI Port Configured for Remote Terminal Port Configured for File Export IPC 1600 Card LCL 002 0040 0031 Connector 035 0153 0031 035 0153 0031 035 0153 0031 CT CT CT ACCUMASTER INTEGRATOR 491 13915 Figure 4 23 ACCUMASTER Integrator Local Connection via UAI and File Export 4 46 Janu
275. own in Figure 2 1 Screw type Locking Pins EE 491 13841 Figure 2 1 System 5000 Cover Fasteners 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 2 Slide the cover towards the rear about one half inch to disengage the locking pins as shown in Figure 2 2 3 Lift the cover from the chassis and set it aside oo Hg MHE lo 491 13842 Figure 2 2 System 5000 Disengaging Cover Locking Pins 2 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Preinstallation Checks for the Integral Ethernet Card The Integral Ethernet Card is installed at the factory but the user should check that the settings on the card are properly configured 1 Check the jumper settings on the Ethernet card Confirm that the 7 pin dip jumper is set between U7 and U8 to set the card for Thick net transmission see Figure 2 3 2 Be sure that the Ethernet card is properly seated in the slot above Slot 1 and the cable is connected to the J5 and J1 pin clusters U7 U8 U9 THICK THIN 493 14255 Figure 2 3 Integral Ethernet Card 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Optional Host Upgrade Packages There are several optional features that the customer can elect to add to the NMS These features require the insta
276. play in brackets The following message appears Enter Analysis 6510 name 15 characters max system name TYPE the new system name PRESS Enter Select port number from list 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TYPE the new port number PRESS Enter How many local terminals 1 6 are configured on this 6510 value TYPE the new number of local terminals PRESS Enter The system displays the information entered in Step 3 and prompts you for confirmation You have entered the following information ANALYSIS 6510 name name Port Number value Number of local terminals value Is the information correct y or n q to quit TYPE y or nif the information is not correct PRESS Enter If you enter n no the three prompts shown in Step 3 are displayed again enabling you to enter information If you enter y yes the following message appears parameters successfully changed The ANALYSIS Selection menu appears For additional changes return to Step 1 To exit the procedure TYPE 4 PRESS Enter 5 98 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software When asked to display the system summary TYPE n PRESS Enter Reset the host computer Refer to Chapter 6 System Start up and Shutdown Removing a 6510 Configuration The following procedure provides information on removing a 6510 configuration from the 6800 Series NMS database
277. provide detailed instructions for performing these activities for each migration path 7 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration NOTE If there are any 741 nodes in your network you must know the node number before executing the migration procedure If you do not know which nodes are 741 nodes execute the Hardware Module Summary hms command to each 740 configured node in your network this command causes a node to identify itself Release 1 Database Migration When a customer migrates the database from the Release 1 NMS to the Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS all device profile and historical alarm information is transferred to the appropriate databases Facility profiles are automatically generated for multiplexers based on device profile link profile and node connectivity information Site profiles are automatically created based on site name and location information in the earlier device profiles Channel group tables are also transferred However trouble tickets and routines are not transferred The following features were supported by Release 1 but are not supported by Release 4 2 e The ability to increase the font size of the Network Control window e Doubleclicking on windows to enlarge font size e Multiple profile edits e Search device profile e The ability to place trouble tickets and database report commands within routines Databases Migrated NOTE The customer should perform the clea
278. provides information and procedures for connecting the external NMS components to the host and if present to the User Interface Processor UIP Chapter 5 Loading and Restoring Software This chapter provides procedural information for installing the required software for the host processor User Interface Processor UIP full feature workstations and basic feature workstations Chapter 6 System Start up and Shutdown This chapter provides procedural information for starting and shutting down UNIX on the host the NMS applications program the User Interface Processor UIP application program and UNIX on the User Interface Processor UIP Chapter 7 Performing Migration This chapter provides procedural information for migrating previous NMS release databases to Release 4 2 of the 6800 Series NMS 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 xi COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Chapter 8 Running Diagnostics This chapter provides information on how to use the diagnostic programs that are shipped with the NMS These diagnostic programs are used to detect and solve hardware problems in the Altos System 5000 the Altos System 15000 and in the circuit cards installed in these systems Appendix A Modem Settings This appendix describes the settings for hardware and software configuration of modems connecting remote NMS devices Appendix B Adapter and Cable Identification This appendix provides information for each adapter
279. pted remove Disk 3 PRESS Enter The system reboots MS DOS 5 0 is installed and running Installing the GrafPoint X One Software Package with EtherLink II Card To install the GrafPoint X One Server program and associated software perform the following steps 1 Insert the GrafPoint X One Installation disk into the drive and TYPE A install PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the floppy drive to use A PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the destination drive to use C PRESS Enter The system prompts Enter the destination directory to use VXONE PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 61 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System If the directory KONE does not exist the system prompts The directory C XONE does not exist OK to create it y n y PRESS Enter The system asks a series of questions to which you should reply as follows Do you wish to install the fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter The system prompts Do you wish to install the standard set of fonts including MISC and 75DPP y n y PRESS Enter Do you wish to install the 100DPI fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you wish to install the Open Windows fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you wish to install the DecWindows fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you wish to install the TGRAF fonts y n n TYPE y PRESS Enter Do you wish to
280. ption Switch Settings A 2 B 1 Adapter and Cable Identification 0 0 0 eee eee eee B 1 C1 NMS Commands croas iane n en ended hike ase Agha Reba eules S C 10 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 ix Preface Objectives And Reader Assumptions Abstract The COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide provides detailed instructions for installing and maintaining new network management systems and for migrating from existing Release 1 2 3 x or 4 1 6800 Series NMS systems to the Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS This guide was written to assist technical personnel at customer sites and Paradyne service technicians This guide is organized into the following chapters and appendices Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS hardware and software components describes site selection and provides a contents list of the hardware and software supported by the 6800 Series NMS Chapter 2 Preparing the Processors This chapter identifies the Altos System 5000 and System 15000 internal circuit cards and slots their field upgrade packages and procedures for installation It also provides information and procedures for running configuration utility programs Chapter 3 Preparing the Printers This chapter provides information for configuring and connecting printers supported by the NMS Chapter 4 Connecting the Components This chapter
281. ptionally load any required peripheral software packages for the Altos 5000 platform e ANALYSIS Gateway Option e 3270 Terminal Emulation e Token Ring Option 5 Run the migration procedure using the backed up existing database 6 Backup the new migrated database 7 Load the ACCULINK Network Manager Application software Release 4 3 0 8 Restore the migrated database First time installation order is simpler To properly install th NMS on the host processor for the first time follow the order of general steps defined below 1 Load the seven volume set of 6800 NMS Application software Release 4 2 2 Load the PTF base software Release 4 2 1 3 Optionally load any required peripheral software packages for the Altos 5000 platform e ANALYSIS Gateway Option e 3270 Terminal Emulation e Token Ring Option 4 Load the ACCULINK Network Manager Application software Release 4 3 0 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Network Preinstallation Preparation The NMS host processor user interface processor UIP and full feature workstations communicate over a local area network which requires some consideration and preparation prior to installing the various NMS software packages Each processor must have in addition to the TCP IP software both a node name and an inter processor IP address assigned to it Also each processor must know the node names and IP addresses of the ot
282. r DX2300 The Fujitsu DX2300 can be connected to the COM1 or COM2 serial ports or to an available serial port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor Use the 002 0054 0031 connector if you are connecting to a COM port on the host processor 4 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0040 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0040 0031 connector to the RS 232 serial port on the DX2300 C 240 The C ITOH C 240 can be connected to the COM1 or COM2 serial ports or to an available serial port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor Perform the following steps to connect this printer 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor Use the 002 0054 0031 connector if you are connecting to a COM port on the host processor 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0040 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0040 0031 connector to the RS 232 serial port on the back of the C 240 printer Connecting the Dedicated Automatic Trouble Report Printer The Automatic Trouble Report ATR feature is primarily used to send alert reports to the Paradyne technical assistance center The dedicated A
283. r end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the DCE device 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 53 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System StarKeeper Network Management System This section explains how to connect the StarKeeper NMS to the host processor for cut through operation Figure 4 27 illustrates a local connection for the StarKeeper NMS You can connect the StarKeeper NMS either locally or remotely Connecting Locally To connect a local StarKeeper NMS to the host processor you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector e 002 0051 0031 connector e 035 0152 0031 cable Host Processor 035 0153 0031 oo WH 035 0152 0031 035 0153 0031 035 0152 0031 lt i Starkeeper IPC 1600 Card 491 13919 CI 002 0039 0031 Connector HEM 002 0050 0031 Connector YA 002 0051 0031 Connector DCE Interface Figure 4 27 StarKeeper Connection 4 54 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the 002 0051 0031 connector 4 Connect one end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to the 002 0
284. r the 16 Control Channel Package To prepare the DCP MUXi card for installation in the System 5000 host processor refer to Figure 2 7 and perform the following steps E39 E 46 o 5B E48 E37 E33 OO e ol E32 3 29 a E44 E45 E31 Joo gt 28 E43 E34 owm 494 14511 01 Figure 2 7 DCP MUXi Card 1 Remove two jumpers on the card one at position E32 E33 interrupt request and the other at position E37 E38 transparent mode interrupt You may store a jumper for future use such as running diagnostics by placing it on one pin only 2 Verify that all other jumpers on the card are in the factory default positions 3 Verify that the I O address is set on the card at block SW1 as shown in Table 2 2 Table 2 2 DCP MUXi I O Address Switch Settings SWI Description 1 2 3 4 DCP MUXi Control Channels 9 16 on on on off 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 4 When you have installed all cards in the processor you must run the EISA Configuration Utility to configure the System 5000 s resources to match the requirements of this circuit card For instructions refer to the section EISA Configuration Utility Preinstallation Checks for the Token Ring Card The Proteon P1990 5 Network Interface Card requires no jumper or switch settings on the card All settings are configured
285. r the Altos 15000 system insert the disk labeled SDX System 10000 15000 and power on the system To do this move the RESET RUN key on the front panel clockwise from RESET to RUN The SDX program loads showing several rows of c s and d s on the screen When the SDX Main Menu appears as shown in Figure 8 2 proceed to Step 4 For the Altos 5000 system insert the disk entitled SDX System 5000 into the floppy drive and move the RESET RUN key on the front panel clockwise from RESET to RUN if the Altos 5000 system is turned off move the power switch on the rear panel to the ON position instead The system runs through its normal power sequence and displays the following message Press spacebar to interrupt autoboot PRESS the spacebar immediately The Boot Menu appears as shown in Figure 8 1 to boot from hard disk to boot from floppy to boot from tape to enter BIOS setup 491 13836 Figure 8 1 Boot Menu 3 Select Option 2 to boot from the floppy The SDX program will load As this happens several rows of c s and d s will appear on the screen followed by the SDX Main Menu as shown in Figure 8 2 8 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Running Diagnostics ACS Main Menu SDX Version Vx xx Main Menu Run system confidence tests Utility programs Display test summary Display error history Exit System Diagnostic Executive SDX xEnter Command and Press lt Retn gt 494 138
286. re read the following screen appears Executing Proteon ProNet 4 16 LLI RapiDriver Disk Init Script Installing the pro driver After installing the Proteon ProNet 4 16 LLI RapiDriver Disk please use netconfig or mkdev lt driver gt to add drivers into your system Press return to continue PRESS Enter 9 The system prompts Press any key to continue PRESS Enter 10 The Products Currently Installed menu appears TYPE q 11 Using the JT keys select yes to exit the custom install procedure 12 Remove the floppy disk from the drive remain in system maintenance mode and continue the installation of the Token Ring feature with the section Configuring the Token Ring Network on the Host UIP Configuring the Token Ring Network on the 5000 Host UIP To configure the network for the installed Token Ring card on an Altos 5000 processor perform the following steps 1 At the UNIX prompt TYPE netconfig PRESS Enter 5 36 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 2 The currently configured chains and the following options menu appears Available options 1 Add a chain 2 Remove a chain 3 Reconfigure an element in a chain q Quit Select option TYPE 2 PRESS Enter 3 The list of the currently configured chains reappears the chain altos_tep gt en0 appears in the list for the existing Ethernet driver in the TCP IP kernel configuration TYPE 2 PRESS Enter 4 The system pr
287. re ready to access the second SETUP function HARDWARE To do this press the FF button again The message HARDWARE will appear in the display area The HARDWARE function consists of 13 individual printer settings These settings are shown below along with the correct value for each setting only eight of the settings apply to a parallel connection SETTING SERIAL PARALLEL SPEED NORMAL NORMAL PPR OUT DETECT DETECT PRT DIR BI DIR BI DIR BUZZER ON ON WORD LG 8 BIT 8 BIT BUFFER 8KBYTE 8KBYTE FEEDER NONE NONE INTRFCE SERIAL PARALLEL FORMAT 8NONE 1 BAUD RT 9600 PROTOCOL XON XOF DSR IGNORE DUPLEX FULL 6 Follow the procedure described in Step 4 to scroll through the HARDWARE settings and compare them to the correct settings shown above If any of the settings are incorrect follow the procedure in Step 4 to change them Once the MENU1 and HARDWARE settings are correct you must save them if you do not save them your selections will be lost when the printer s power is turned off To do this press the FF button until the message FUNCTN SAVE appears in the display area Then press the RESET button The message SAVING NOW will appear followed by the message FUNCTN SAVE The modified settings have now been saved in the printer s memory Press the ONLINE button to return the printer to the ONLINE mode The message ONLINE READY will appear in the display area 3 4 January 1997
288. return to use net COM Where node name is the name of the system on which you are installing PRESS RETURN The system prompts 32 Pseudo ttys are currently configured do you want to 1 Add Pseudo tty 2 Remove Pseudo tty Select an option of enter q to quit q TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system prompts How many pseudo ttys you want to be created or enter return to use 67 PRESS RETURN The system displays the currently configured chains again followed by the Available options menu TYPE q PRESS Enter The system prompts to relink the kernel Do you want to relink the kernel now TYPE n PRESS Enter The system then prompts Is there an IPC1600 card installed in the system y n If the optional IPC 1600 card providing additional serial ports is installed in the UIP TYPE y PRESS Enter If the optional IPC 1600 card is not installed in the UIP TYPE n PRESS Enter 5 48 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 20 For a negative response the following message appears The IPC 1600 ports card software driver will be removed from the system Continue y n To continue TYPE y PRESS Enter The system now rebuilds the kernel and installs device names As this transpires the following message appears The kernel will now be rebuilt This will take a few minutes Please wait Root for this system build is Once the kernel is rebuilt the followi
289. ridge tape drive 3 5 inch floppy disk drive VGA controller card Ethernet Interface IPC 1600 ports card DCP MUXi card PS 2 mouse AT keyboard 1 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Introduction User Interface Processor Altos System 5000 33 Processor Eight 4 Mb SIMMs for UIP with System 5000 host Twelve 4 Mb SIMMs for UIP with System 15000 host One 520 Mb SCSI hard disk drive 150 Mb SCSI cartridge tape drive 3 5 inch floppy disk drive VGA controller card Ethernet Interface PS 2 mouse AT keyboard Optional Components AT amp T IPC 900 required for ANALYSIS NMS support on Altos 5000 host only AT amp T IPC 1600 required for serial interface support on the Altos 5000 UIP only Emulex DCP 286i required for 3270 Terminal Emulation support on Altos 5000 host only Proteon Token Ring EISA Network Interface Card for Altos 5000 host and UIP processors replacing Ethernet Interface Proteon Token Ring ISA Network Interface Card for Altos full feature workstations replacing Ethernet interface Emulex DCP MUXi card for additional eight control channels on Altos 5000 host processor NMS Application Software 6800 NMS Application Software Release 4 2 Volumes 1 7 ACCULINK Network Management Software Release 4 3 Volumes 1 2 PTF Host and UIP Software Release 4 2 1 License Agreements NMS License Agreement Online Serial Number Card 4GL Serial Number Card 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 1 7 COMSP
290. rk Management System Installation of the Token Ring Network Interface Card To install the optional ProNet p1392 Network Interface card NIC in the full feature workstation refer to Figure 2 28 and perform the following steps 1 2 Power down the workstation Remove the workstation s cover follow the manufacturer s instructions to expose the internal circuit cards Remove the 3COM EtherLink II card or any other network interface card s that may already be installed in the workstation Ensure that the p1392 on board switches for the I O address are in the factory default positions as indicated by Table 2 9 Insert the ProNet Model p1392 NIC into the selected slot Make sure that the card is firmly seated in the bus interface slot Secure the card in the processor using the saved screw Replace the workstation s cover Attach the unshielded twisted pair UTP cable to the RJ45 port on the installed ProNet NIC Attach the other end of the cable to the site s MAU Table 2 9 Token Ring I O Address Switch Setting 0 Switches Address 2 3 4 5 6 0A20 ON ON ON ON ON ON 2 52 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors 494 14512 Figure 2 28 Proteon p1392 Card Switching off the Cache on 486DX If the 486DX full feature workstation has not been configured at the factory with its cache switched off you may notice the following s
291. rk Management Systems 5 Ifthe control processor s LED display shows a 2 perform the following steps NOTE If this is a dual or redundant control processor configuration the impact of this failure is less damaging Even so perform the following steps to correct the fault as soon as possible a Check the control processor configuration using the Display Multiplexer Components Configuration dsmcc command If the control processor was taken out of service due to failed diagnostics go to the next step b Check the alerts for a control processor failure The alerts display on the network monitor or network map 6 Ifthe control processor s display shows a 9 make sure that the control processor s Enable Disable switch is set to Enable If the switch is set correctly the control processor may have failed or its fuse may have blown Contact your service technician for assistance Refer to your multiplexer service manual for ordering information 7 If the control processor s LED display shows a lowercase t followed by a two digit trouble code this indicates a sanity fault If the trouble code remains after a power up or a reset write down the code and contact your service technician For information on these codes refer to your 740 or 745 ACCULINK Multiplexer Service Manual as appropriate NAP Speed If a command is sent to the first node and the following alert is issued Node XXX No response received wit
292. rk Summary Categories and Labels Trouble Tickets Routines 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 33 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System e Alert Driven Routines e Port Configuration e Scheduled Items The following databases will not be migrated e Reports Trouble Tickets customized with 4GL or SQL e The active alerts database will not be migrated as the Release 4 2 NMS generates up to date active alert data at start up Cleaning Up the Database To ensure that those databases not migrated are rebuilt the customer should back up any customized Trouble Tickets and Trouble Inventory Reports to a removable medium Backing Up the Database The NMS database must be backed up to a cartridge tape prior to migrating it from Release 4 0 to Release 4 2 1 From the 6800 NMS Main Menu select Backup system database and follow the steps for performing a System Database Backup as indicated in Chapter 4 of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide 2 When the backup is complete and the 6800 NMS Main Menu is displayed select Restore system database and follow the steps for performing a System Database Restore as specified in Chapter 4 of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide This action will ensure that the tape produced by the backup in Step 1 is readable as the process of migration will destroy the existing 4 0 database on d
293. rk operates efficiently always use the shortest cord possible to connect each device to the network hub unit 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Connecting the Third Full Feature Workstation To connect a third full feature workstation you will need to connect a UIP to the network hub unit that you installed to connect the second full feature workstation The display unit and keyboard on the UIP will serve as the third full feature workstation Figure 4 5 shows what the network will look like with the UIP connected and serving as third full feature workstation To connect the UIP to the network hub unit you will need a modular cable 035 0116 5031 Perform the following steps 1 Connect the AUI adapter to the Ethernet card on the UIP 2 Connect one end of the 035 0116 5031 cable to the jack on the AUI adapter 3 Connect the other end of the 035 0116 5031 cable to a port on the network hub unit Host Processor Network Hub Unit Ethernet Card User Interface Processor 035 0116 5031 Ethernet Card 035 0116 5031 Console Full Feature Workstation Console Full Feature Workstation 035 0116 5031 EtherLink II Card Full Feature Workstation 494 13900a 02 Figure 4 5 Local Area Network with UIP 4 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Connecting the Fourth
294. rminal Emulation IPC 1600 Card 491 13913 DCE Interface imm 002 0032 0031 Connector LL 002 0039 0031 Connector La 25 Position Null Modem Connector ZZA 002 0051 0031 Connector BL 002 0040 0031 Connector 002 0040 0031 or 002 0052 0031 Connector HM 002 0050 0031 Connector Figure 4 20 External Systems Connections 4 36 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Connecting a Local System Controller The instructions that follow apply to the DATAPHONE II System Controller as well as the ACCULINK Network Manager To connect a local System Controller you will need the following materials 035 0153 0031 cable 002 0039 0031 connector 002 0051 0031 connector 035 0152 0031 cable To establish the cut throughs perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the next available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor or in the UIP Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the 002 0051 0031 connector Connect one end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to the 002 0051 0031 connector Connect the other end of the 035 0152 0031 cable to one of the user ports on the System Controller or ACCULINK Network Manager Connecting a Remote System Controller To connect a remote System Controller or an ACCULINK Network Manager to the host processor you will need the following materials
295. rovides eight control channels that can be MUXi used to monitor modem and DSU networks Host only 5 Emulex DCP D8000 DBFFF 23C 23F Optional Provides additional eight control MUXi channels to monitor modem and DSU networks Host only 6 Proteon ProNet 10 Optional Provides support for Token Ring Token Ring local area network communication with UIPs Card and Full Feature Workstations Incompatible with Integral Ethernet 7 Emulex 6A0000 6BFFFF 9 27C 27F Optional Supports 3270 Terminal Emulation DCP 286i Host only 8 IPC 1600 E10000 E1FFFF 11 110 11F Provides 16 serial ports 2 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Opening the System 5000 Host To open the Altos System 5000 and install the memory and circuit cards you will need a 2 Phillips screwdriver and a 25 nut driver Once you have these tools perform the following steps CAUTION 1 Make sure the ac power cord is not connected to the System 5000 before opening the computer and attempting to perform any field installation activity 2 To prevent static discharges that may damage the hardware wear a ground strap or otherwise ground yourself to the chassis before opening the computer and installing any circuit cards 1 Using the 2 Phillips screwdriver loosen the two screw type fasteners locking pins that secure the cover to the chassis The fasteners are located on the rear panel near the right side edge as sh
296. rs 640x480 16 colors 640x480 displayed in 640x816 virtual space 16 colors 640x480 displayed in 1088x480 virtual space 16 colors 800x600 16 colors 640x480 256 colors 800x600 256 colors SAAN BRWNe Enter selection or q to Quit 15 TYPE 7 PRESS Enter Select Monitor Size 1 11 inch 14 inch 15 inch 16 inch 17 inch 19 inch 21 inch other PANAMEYWD Enter selection of q to Quit 1 5 72 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software TYPE appropriate number PRESS Enter The system prompts Please verify settings Mouse settings Graphics Info Graphics board settings Monitor settings Are these settings correct y n q y If these settings are not correct TYPE n PRESS Enter The system starts again at Step 10 If the settings are correct PRESS Enter The system responds Settings saved the file C XONE hardware cfg Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system prompts Xsetup need to copy the graphics driver vga dvr from the X One diskette to the C XONE directory Insert the disk labeled Install in drive A Press ENTER to continue or q to Quit Insert the proper disk and PRESS Enter The system responds 1 file extracted from archive Press any key to continue PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 73 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network
297. rs for P139x NIC into the floppy drive TYPE a install a c PRESS Enter The system displays the following The program will now make a directory on your hard disk named PROINST and copy several files including the documentation files to that directory from the distribution diskette The Proteon Installation Configuration and Diagnostic Program will then be run from your hard disk DO NOT REMOVE THE PROTEON DISTRIBUTION DISKETTE UNTIL YOU ARE ASKED TO DO SO Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The installation program and files are copied to the workstation s hard disk This process takes several minutes When the installation banner appears the system prompts Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The installation function selection menu appears Select a Function Configure Install NIC and NetWare Drivers Run Proteon Diagnostic Program Install Proteon LAN Support Program Microsoft LAN Manager Driver Installation Instructions IBM LAN Server Driver Installation Instructions View ReadMe File X eXit Install Using the 17 keys select Install Proteon LAN Support Program and PRESS PRESS Enter The system prompts for temporary space accept the default C PTEMP and PRESS PRESS Enter The Proteon LAN Support Setup screen appears Proteon LAN Support Setup 5 78 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The Setup Program prepares your system with Proteon
298. rtition The following message appears Do you wish to initialize the ONLINE partition y n n 5 To initialize the partition TYPE y PRESS Enter A warning will appear To proceed PRESS Enter 6 All user created NMS databases must be initialized in preparation for migration TYPE 2 PRESS Enter to select Initialize NMS Database The following message appears Do you wish to initialize the NMS database y n n 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 27 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 11 To initialize the NMS database TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears WARNING Initializing the NMS database will replace it with default values Hit lt Enter gt to continue or lt q gt to quit To continue with the migration process PRESS Enter The menu shown in Figure 7 5 will appear If there is a database from Release 3 0 or 3 1 to be converted to Release 4 2 format TYPE 3 PRESS Enter to select Include Migration Data The following message appears Do you wish to include migration data from a previous NMS y n n To proceed TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears Enter the previous NMS type sc r1 r2 r3 r3 1 r4 r4 1 Enter the appropriate type TYPE 13 orr3 1 as appropriate PRESS Enter 7 28 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration The original menu Figure 7 6 appears with the selected type in paren
299. rupt Number IRQ shared among all ECA boards 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Before you continue you should make sure that your boards are correctly configured for the settings you are choosing If you wish to go back and reconfigure your boards using the EISA Configuration Utility Diskette or read the ECA documentation answer n to the next question Do you want to continue y n TYPE y PRESS Enter The following menu appears ALTOS ETHERNET CHANNEL ADAPTER SETUP 1 Install the ECA driver 2 Disable th ECA driver 3 Change current ECA configuration 4 Display current ECA configuration q Quit Enter Selection TYPE 4 PRESS Enter The following message appears Current ECA driver configuration Total ECA boards configured 1 enc00 enc01 Board Slot IRQ I OAddrRange Interface 0 6 10 6c80 N6caf 1 disabled Press lt Enter gt to continue Verify that the displayed IRQ for Board 0 is 10 and the interface contains enc00 then PRESS Enter The menu from Step 17 appears again TYPE q PRESS Enter The system prompts Installing ALTOS TCP IP over aaa 5 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Enter the internet address of this interface Where aaa is en0 on Altos 5000 platform enc00 on Altos 15000 platform TYPE internet address in the form nnn nnn nnn nnn PRESS
300. ry 1997 8 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System For the Altos 15000 system insert the bootable disk containing MS DOS and power on the system To do this power on the system using the power switch on the back of the unit Proceed to Step 4 For the Altos 5000 system power on the system using the power switch on the back of the unit The System 5000 will run through its normal power up sequence and display the following message Press spacebar to interrupt autoboot PRESS the spacebar immediately The Boot Menu appears see Figure 8 1 Insert the bootable disk containing MS DOS and select Option 2 to boot from the floppy Once the system boots you are ready to format the blank disk and transfer the system files onto the disk so that it can be used to boot the system To do this at the A gt prompt TYPE format a s PRESS Enter The system displays the following prompt Insert new diskette for Drive a and strike enter when ready Remove the MS DOS disk insert the blank disk into the floppy drive and PRESS Enter The system formats the disk and transfers the system files to it When complete the system displays the following prompt Format complete format another TYPE n PRESS Enter With the newly formatted disk still in the drive boot the system If the format was successful the system prompts you for the date and time PRESS Enter You are now ready to copy the IP
301. s 2 28 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Installing the 16 Port Cabinet Assembly If you installed an IPC 1600 card in Slot 8 of the UIP you will have to connect the card to a 16 port cabinet assembly device that is shipped with the card To do this perform the following Locate the two 80 conductor ribbon cables and the 16 port cabinet assembly as shown in Figure 2 11 Carefully thread the ends of the ribbon cables marked P3 and P4 through the card slot opening Connect the cable marked P3 for Ports 9 through 16 to header P3 Connect the cable marked P4 for Ports 1 through 8 to header P4 The connectors are keyed for proper alignment with the 80 pin headers on the card as shown in Figure 2 12 Make sure that the retaining clips are properly secured Carefully pass the excess ribbon cable through the slot opening until the IPC 1600 can be plugged into expansion Slot 8 Locate a convenient area to place the cable assembly unit close to the host processor so that the ports are easily accessible for connecting devices The cabinet must be located within about seven cable feet the length of the fanout module cable assembly of the host computer The cabinet can be installed on the floor or table or wall mounted Route the ribbon cables behind the wire frame assembly of the cabinet with the lead 1 identifiers to the left as shown in Figure 2 13 The connectors on the fanout mod
302. s Insert the X ONE disk Labeled Fonts Disk 1 Press ENTER to continue or q to Quit Remove X One Install disk insert requested disk and PRESS Enter After some time marked by a line of dots on the screen the system prompts Insert the X ONE disk Labeled Fonts Disk 2 Press ENTER to continue or q to Quit Remove Fonts Disk 1 insert requested disk and PRESS Enter After another period also marked by the line of dots on the screen the following messages appear All files successfully installed The following should be placed in your autoexec bat file SET XONEDIR C XONE SET DOS4G quiet Would you like X One to add this to your autoexec bat file y n y PRESS Enter The system responds Ready to execute setup Press any key to continue PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 71 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 10 11 The system responds X One Setup Utility Press any key to continue PRESS Enter The system prompts Select Mouse type 1 Mouse type device pre loaded driver 2 Microsoft serial mouse 3 Logitech serial mouse 4 Mouse Systems serial mouse Enter selection or q to Quit 1 TYPE 1 PRESS Enter The system prompts Would you like to use the graphics board configuration detected by Xsetup y n y PRESS Enter Select graphics mode 640x480 displayed in 816x640 virtual space 16 colo
303. s for System and go to Step 6 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 49 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Changing the Token Ring Configuration The Token Ring package configuration can be changed using the ECU to specify 4 Mbps speed and or shielded cable You should execute the ECU normally and follow the steps specified above through Step 8 Continue with the following steps To view all configured resources and display the Detailed Slot Map PRESS Alt v TYPE d The Detailed Slot Map lists the setting for each component of the system Use the et keys to scroll down to Slot 6 to see the Token Ring card configuration and to highlight the Interrupt field values PRESS Enter A Change Function Menu appears Use the 7 keys to select IRQ 10 Edge Triggered PRESS Enter The Detailed Slot Map again appears Use the keys to highlight the Speed field values PRESS Enter A Change Function Menu appears The speed is set to 16 Mbps Use the LT keys to select 4 Mbps if your LAN runs at this speed PRESS Enter The Detailed Slot Map again appears Use the IT keys to highlight the Media Type field values PRESS Enter A Change Function Menu appears The Media Type is set to unshielded Use the keys to select Shielded STP cable if that cable type has been physically connected from the Token Ring card to the Multi Access Unit MAU PRESS Enter To exit from this con
304. s gt M6AY channel connector remote DCE o EEEE ENE he gt 4 Feature Jeminn gt 3 6821 F1 517 U a is 5 gt 9 8 lt gt 7 4 lt gt 8 9 lt 20 lt Part 6 pin modular jack to Connects control channel to 6 pin 10 pin 035 0106 0531 10 pin male control remote Model 2 device when Ternes Sn gt 7 M6BK channel connector used with 035 0184 5031 2 lt gt 8 Feature 3 lt gt 4 6821 F1 518 5 ae a ie 6 gt 9 Dannin nn gt 3 6 lt gt 10 Part 8 pin modular jack to Connects StarLAN NAU in 8 pin 8 pin 035 0116 2531 8 pin modular jack 6820 to Network Hub Unit te EEEE gt 1 DW8A DE Connects Network Hub Unitto 7 lt gt 2 Feature full feature workstation EREE 3 6831 F1 521 2531 ILOT gt 4 25 4 lt gt 5 6831 F1 520 5031 ae a gt 6 50 2 lt gt 7 6831 F1 522 9031 lereno Anm gt 8 100 6831 F1 523 9931 200 Part 6 pin modular plug to Connects any Model 2 pin to pin 035 0145 5031 6 pin modular plug modem or 4000 Series carrier M6BJ to control channel Feature 6821 F 1 513 B 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Adapter and Cable Identification Table B 1 7 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Part Number Feature Number Description Usage Pin Diagram Part 25 pin male Sub D to Connects control channel to 25 pin 25 pin 035 0147 5031 25 pin female Sub D DCE device for remo
305. s Guide for information on backing up the databases 5 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Select Select Select Select NOTE If the system fails to respond to keystrokes at any point during the installation procedure it is necessary to power down the processor wait approximately 60 seconds power up the processor and resume the installation at the point you left off When you have these items perform the following steps 1 Insert the Volume 1 diskette in the floppy disk drive Turn on the processor and make sure the RESET key is in the RUN position The processor begins the boot process and runs through its internal memory checks When booting a System 15000 several status messages appear ending with a BOOT prompt Proceed to Step 4 When booting a System 5000 the following message appears Press space bar to interrupt autoboot NOTE If an error message about memory appears ignore it and continue the procedure 2 PRESS the spacebar immediately to to to to Enter Option and the menu in Figure 5 2 appears NOTE If this menu does not appear you missed the time out window You will need to restart the procedure boot from Hard Disk boot from Floppy boot from Tape enter BIOS setup 492 13954 Figure 5 2 System 5000 Boot Menu Installing UNIX on Host Computer 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 7 COMS
306. s NMS and how it will be used with Release 4 2 Table 2 4 describes the major actions to be taken when converting a Source system to a 4 2 UIP Table 2 4 Altos 5000 UIP Conversion Matrix Source System Target System 4 2 UIP Connected To Altos 5000 Host 4 2 UIP Connected To Altos 15000 Host R3 1 Altos 5000 host with 32 Mb and StarLan N A Add 16 Megabytes memory Remove StarLan card and check Integral Ethernet card R3 1 Altos 5000 UIP with 16 Mb and StarLan e Add 16 Megabytes memory e Remove StarLan card and check Integral Ethernet card Add 32 Megabytes memory Remove StarLan card and check Integral Ethernet card R4 1 Altos 5000 host with 32 Mb and Ethernet N A Add 16 Megabytes memory R4 1 Altos 5000 UIP with 32 Mb and Ethernet No changes required Add 16 Megabytes memory 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 27 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System UIP Conversion Procedures The following steps describe the actions to be taken in converting an Altos 5000 host processor from a previous release of NMS to Release 4 2 1 2 Backup the previous release database and user files Power off the Altos 5000 processor and remove the processor covers Remove the DCP 286i 3270 Emulation package IPC 900 ANALYSIS NMS package and DCP MUXi 16 Control Channel package cards if any of them are installed in the processor The DCP MUXi can
307. s modified or deleted Use the following procedure to backup the Release 2 database 1 TYPE cd usr nms adm PRESS Enter 2 Insert the Release 4 migration floppy disk into the Release 2 host processor 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 17 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 3 TYPE cpio ic lt dev rdsk f0 PRESS Enter 4 When the command is completed TYPE ksh migBackup PRESS Enter The following message appears wake eET ATA BASE BACKUP FOR MIGRATION STARTED Check for database index errors before performing backup y n y 5 Perform the following TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears Continue with backup y n y 6 To proceed TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears Please insert cartridge tape Type lt c gt to continue or lt q gt to quit and then press Enter 7 Insert the blank data cartridge tape TYPE c PRESS Enter to continue The following message appears wee T ATA BASE BACKUP FOR MIGRATION COMPLETED 8 Remove the tape and label it R2 Database Backup for Migration 7 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration Migrating the Database To migrate the existing Release 2 database to the Release 4 2 NMS perform the following steps NOTE The NMS application must not be running 1 At the Console Login prompt TYPE root PRESS Enter 2 At the pound sign prompt TYPE ksh usr nms adm in
308. s which can be run on either the Altos 5000 or Altos 15000 systems These tests can only be run under the MS DOS operating system Thus for either system you must boot the system with MS DOS create a bootable disk copy the diagnostics onto the bootable disk and reboot the system with the newly created diagnostic disk However you only have to do this once after which you can save the disk and use it whenever you have to run the diagnostic Before you run this diagnostic you must power down the system remove the IPC 1600 card and reset the dip switch settings for the memory address Be sure to note the original setting before changing the address You must return the address to its original setting for normal operation Set the address for A0000 as shown in Figure 8 5 and replace the board To create a a new diagnostic disk you need a bootable disk containing the MS DOS operating system a blank unformatted disk and the disk containing the IPC 16000 diagnostic program The Altos 5000 and Altos 15000 systems do not have the same power up procedure This difference is accommodated in Step 1 Ribbon Cable Connections P3 Ports 9 16 and Local Program g P4 Ports 1 8 Memory Size Select Jumper J1 DS1 1110987654321 ON A A A A A A A Push Switch to the Indicated Position i OFF 492 13021a DN L J v v 110 Memory Address A0000 Figure 8 5 Dip Switch Settings for Memory Address 6800 A2 GN22 30 Janua
309. se 4 2 format TYPE 3 PRESS Enter to select Include Migration Data The following message appears Do you wish to include migration data from a previous NMS y n n To proceed TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears Enter the previous NMS type sc r1 r2 r3 r3 1 r4 r4 1 Enter the appropriate type TYPE rl PRESS Enter The original menu Figure 7 2 appears with the selected type in parentheses after Option 3 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition 2 Initialize NMS Database 3 Include Migration Data r1 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices cont To Continue quit To abort If you wish to modify the NMS parameters Enter number 1 2 3 4 cont or quit 494 13960a 01 Figure 7 2 Original Menu Showing Selected Type r1 To rebuild the NMS data base indices TYPE 4 PRESS Enter 7 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration 12 To continue TYPE y PRESS Enter To continue TYPE c PRESS Enter The following message appears xxxx Data Base Initialization xxxx followed by several console messages indicating the initialization of the INFORMIX OnLine Once completed the following message appears xxxx Data Base Initialization Completed xxxx followed by several console messages indicating the start up of database servers Once completed the following message appears Beginning Migration Procedures Device data will be migrat
310. sh the connection perform the following steps Connect one end of the 835 5783 0011 cable to an available NAP on the 74x multiplexer 2 Connect the other end of the 835 5783 0011 cable to any unused data link on the 719 NETWORKER External Systems This section explains how to establish cut throughs to the following external systems DATAPHONE II System Controller 300 400 DATAPHONE II 839A Dial Backup Unit Paradyne 4400 Series Service Restoration Carrier Paradyne 840 and 850 DCX Multiplexers Computer systems requiring VT 100 terminal emulation SNMP Manager connected through Ethernet Figure 4 20 illustrates the above connections to the IPC 1600 card located in either the host processor or the UIP 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 35 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Host Processor 035 0153 0031 or UIP 035 0152 0031 System O A a gt Corelle 035 0153 0031 035 0152 0031 System Controller Cr 839A Dial Backup 035 0153 0031 035 0151 0031 839A Dial Backup lt ________ _ gt BVA 035 0153 0031 Carrier 035 0153 0031 p 035 0152 0031 Service Restoration L a Carrier 035 0153 0031 035 0153 0031 DCX Multiplexer MIU 035 0153 0031 Jale el 8355 83001 DCX Multiplexer MIU l 035 0153 0031 EA Computer System Requiring VT100 Terminal Emulation 035 0153 0031 r 835 5783 0011 Computer System Requiring i lt Q L 1 VT100 Te
311. sitioned 4 Run the Facility Inventory Report fir or the List Facility Profile sfp command to list facilities having the facility types mayexist The mayexist cases result from ambiguous information about connections between devices Facility profiles which do not correspond to actual existing facilities may be removed using the Delete Facility Profile difp command 5 Run the List Device Profile sdp command to list unmanaged device profiles having the device type bridge Bridges are created automatically by the migration utility to describe a multipoint circuit They are assumed to be colocated with the upstream device while they may actually be located elsewhere e Obtain a list of multipoint bridges run the List Device Profile sdp command to select devices having the device type bridge e To obtain a list of facilities connected to bridges run a Facility Inventory Report fir or a List Facility Profile sfp command to search for facility types ctrltobr control to bridge or brtotrib bridge to tributary e Use the Edit Device Profile eddp command to correct the site location for those bridges that are not colocated with the control modem Facility profiles having these bridges as endpoints will be automatically updated to reflect the change in site name e Ifa bridge does not actually exist use the Edit Facility Profile edfp command to edit all facility profiles associated with the tributaries The facilities to b
312. stallDb PRESS Enter The AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters menu Figure 7 3 appears AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition 2 Initialize NMS Database 3 Include Migration Data 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices cont To Continue quit To abort If you wish to modify the NMS parameters Enter number 1 2 3 4 cont or quit 492 13960 Figure 7 3 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters Menu Release 2 Database Migration 3 If the INFORMIX OnLine partition has not been initialized since NMS installation TYPE 1 PRESS Enter to select Initialize ONLINE Partition The following message appears Do you wish to initialize the ONLINE partition y n n 4 To initialize the partition TYPE y PRESS Enter A warning will appear To proceed PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 19 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 5 All user created NMS databases must be initialized in preparation for migration TYPE 2 PRESS Enter to select Initialize NMS Database The following message appears Do you wish to initialize the NMS database y n n To initialize the NMS database TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears WARNING Initializing the NMS database will replace it with default values Hit lt Enter gt to continue or lt q gt to quit To continue with the migration process PRESS Enter If there is a database from Release 2 to be converted
313. stallation sos riii eee cee eee 5 3 Network Preinstallation Preparation 0 0 00 cee eee eee eee 5 4 Base Network Configuration 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 5 4 Customized Network Configuration 0 00 00 e eee 5 5 Inserting the Software Media 00 cece eee cee eee 5 6 UNIX Software for the Host Processor 00 0 c eee eee eee 5 6 Installing the MPX Software on the Altos 15000 0 5 19 Release 4 2 NMS Software 0 0 0 cece cece eee ene 5 21 Installing the NMS Software 00 eee 5 21 Formatting the Third Hard Disk 0 0 0 0 0c e eee 5 26 Initializing the NMS Database 0 0 c ee eee eee 5 28 Network Configuration of NMS Host 0 00000 e eee 5 30 Installing Token Ring Software on the NMS Host UIP 5 35 Configuring the Token Ring Network on the 5000 Host UIP 5 36 UNIX Software for the UIP 0 eee cee ee 5 41 UIP Software sta cecinetesiva gee eee kw eae ee es EEE R ARES SS 5 40 Network Configuration of NMS UIP 0 0 eee eee ee 5 54 Installing Token Ring Software on the UIP 0000 5 58 Configuring the Token Ring Network on the UIP 5 58 Full Feature Workstation Software 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 5 59 Installing MS DOS 00 eee ccc eee ee 5 60 Installing the GrafPoint X One Software Package with EtherLink M Card ier Saa
314. stalling UNIX on Host Computer 5 8 5 4 Hardware Configuration Menu Installing UNIX on Host Computer 5 9 5 5 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters Menu 0 00 00 0c eee ee eee 5 29 5 6 System 5000 Boot Menu Installing UNIX on UIP 0 0004 5 41 5 7 Installation Procedure Menu Installing UNIX on UIP 0 5 42 5 8 Hardware Configuration Menu Installing UNIX on UIP 0 5 43 5 9 ANALYSIS Selection Menu 00 0 ee eee eee 5 94 5 10 ANALYSIS Selection Menu for Changing 6510 Parameters 5 97 6 1 Network Management System Menu 0 0 02 c eee eee eee 6 2 6 2 FFW Login Window 00 a eee etnies 6 4 6 3 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu Window 0 0 0 cece ee eee eee 6 4 6 4 Manager Window ni cee eee teen eens 6 5 6 5 Network Management System Menu 00 0 cece eee eee eee 6 8 7 1 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters Menu Release 1 Database Migration 7 9 7 2 Original Menu Showing Selected Type r1 00 0000 00005 7 10 7 3 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters Menu Release 2 Database Migration 7 19 7 4 Original Menu Showing Selected Type r2 0 0 0 0 00 ee eee eee 7 21 7 5 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters Menu Release 3 0 3 1 Database Migration 7 27 7 6 Original Menu Showing Selected Type r3 0 0 00 000 e eee eee 7 29 7 7 AT a
315. sted in this install script 5 The system prompts for the value of the starting I O address Please enter the following system configuration information for the IPC 900 board The available starting I O address for the IPC 900 Board are Starting I O address 2A0 Starting I O address 2B0 Starting I O address 3E0 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 91 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Type the starting I O address and strike the ENTER key or type Q to cancel installation Striking the ENTER alonewill select the default For the starting I O address TYPE 2B0 PRESS Enter The system prompts for the starting memory address Please enter the following system configuration information for the IPC 900 Board The available starting controller memory addresses for the IPC 900 Board are A0000 default A2000 A4000 A6000 A8000 AA000 ACO000 AE000 B0000 B2000 B4000 B6000 B8000 BA000 BC000 BE000 C0000 C2000 C4000 C6000 C8000 CA000 CC000 CE000 D0000 D2000 D4000 D6000 E0000 E2000 E4000 E6000 E8000 EA000 EC000 EE000 Type the starting controller memory address and strike the ENTER key or type Q to cancel installation Striking the ENTER alone will select the default For the Starting memory address TYPE D2000 PRESS Enter The system displays the following information before seeking verification EEEE fe os fe E a fe of fe of he E os he a E os hs fe E os he k os ahs ok k of is k ok oe ok k k k k
316. t dar and Alert Report Summary ars commands If user group permissions have been customized use the SQL Customization Package to examine the command_view table Correct any incomplete migration of data and account for the new capabilities of Release 4 2 specifically that all Network Control commands can now have customized user group levels Likewise if alert text or alert group names have been customized redo the customization after the migration is completed When the migration is completed execute the Edit Alert Monitoring State edams command to turn on polling NMS will then automatically acquire the current feature packages Versions for the multiplexer network if ANM is installed 7 24 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration 12 The Edit Profile commands Edit Site Profile edsp Edit Device Profile eddp Edit Facility Profile edfp and the Identity id command provide mechanisms for changing or correcting the migrated data When migration completes successfully the messages sent to the console can be reviewed to take note of any warning messages as follows cd usr tmp pg migdbload log pg migrestore log Release 3 0 3 1 Database Migration When a customer migrates from a Release 3 0 or Release 3 1 6800 Series NMS to a Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS all device profiles site profiles vendor profiles historical alerts trouble tickets user profiles and user groups filter values and chann
317. t List Restore menu for a printed listing of what is contained on the backup tape 4 Select cartridge tape as the storage medium To do this TYPE c PRESS Enter The User Data Copy Cartridge Tape Selection menu appears 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 5 Insert a quarter inch data cartridge into the tape drive then TYPE y PRESS Enter to begin the copying process Messages are displayed as databases are copied from the hard disk to the cartridge tape 6 Write protect the tape Migrating the Database Following physical transfer data is translated to the values and internal representations which are consistent with the Release 4 2 database schema The translated data is then used to populate the following Release 4 2 databases e Device Profile e Site Profile e Facility Profile e Historical Alerts In addition to INFORMIX data files created by the Release 1 multiplexer application are migrated without translation for use in Release 4 2 This multiplexer data does not correspond to any INFORMIX tables To migrate the existing Release 1 database to the Release 4 2 NMS perform the following steps NOTE The NMS application must not be running 1 At the Console Login prompt TYPE root PRESS Enter 2 From the pound sign prompt TYPE ksh usr nms adm installDb PRESS Enter The AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters menu Figure 7
318. t floppy or tape until the Press Any Key to Reboot prompt is displayed Remove both the floppy disk and the cartridge tape PRESS any key to reboot the system The system auto boots do not press the spacebar to interrupt auto boot The following prompt appears Boot PRESS Enter 5 44 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software INIT SINGLE USER MODE Type CONTROL d to proceed with normal startup or give root password for system maintenance 10 For system maintenance mode TYPE root password PRESS Enter NOTE You have approximately 10 seconds to press the Enter key to select system maintenance Failure to do so within the 10 second window defaults the system to normal start up If this occurs a reboot is necessary 11 Insert the 6800 UIP Application Volume 4 floppy disk and 6800 UIP Application Volume 5 cartridge tape 12 At the prompt TYPE installpkg PRESS Enter The system prompts for the tape and floppy and prompt Strike enter when ready or Esc to stop PRESS Enter 13 After the disk and tape are read the following message appears Done reading tape TCP IP Runtime Serialization Enter your serial number or enter q to quit CAUTION The serial number and activation key entered must be unique across all TCP IP nodes on the network to which the UIP is connected The TCP IP daemon will shut down for both nodes having equal serial number or activat
319. t processor perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to a port on the IPC 900 card 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0040 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0040 0031 connector to Port 1 on the ANALYSIS 6510 5605 Connecting the ANALYSIS 5600 To connect a local ANALYSIS 5600 to the host processor perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to a port on the IPC 900 card 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0053 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0053 0031 connector to Port 1 on the ANALYSIS 5600 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 51 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Connecting Remotely To connect a remote ANALYSIS NMS to the host processor you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector e Two DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous transmission Full duplex operation Flow control ON Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 or 9600 bps e 835 5783 0011 cable for ANALYSIS 6510 5605 e 835 4613 2511 cable and 002 0019 0031 connector for ANALYSIS 5600 Figure 4 26 illustrates a remote connection for both the ANALYSIS 6510 5605 and ANALYSIS 5600 NMS The following sections explain how to connect both systems remotely Host Processor 035 0153 0031 z 835 5783 0011 PORT 1 ANALYSIS 6510 5605 035 0
320. t shut off the power until the message shown in Step 3 is displayed Indicating that it is safe to power off The system displays the following message Shutting down UNIX You may turn the power off once UNIX has been shutdown Shutdown started date time Broadcast message from root console on unix date and time THE SYSTEM IS BEING SHUTDOWN NOW Log off now or risk your files being damaged NOTE The following message is broadcast across the system to alert other users of the impending shutdown 3 When the following message displays either power the system down or press any key to reboot the system Safe to Power Off 0r Press Any Key to Reboot 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 6 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Starting UNIX on the UIP To start the UNIX operating system perform the following steps 1 With the RESET key in the RUN position turn on the power switch on the System 5000 The UNIX system will proceed to boot and as it boots it will display a series of self check and diagnostic messages on the console screen After these messages have displayed the following message displays Type CONTROL d to proceed with normal start up or hit return for system maintenance 2 To select normal start up press the Ctrl and d keys simultaneously 3 The boot process will continue When the system has fully booted the login prompt displays on your screen
321. ta y or n n 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System To transfer fault data or to skip fault data transfer TYPE yorn PRESS Enter The following message appears Do you wish to migrate trouble ticket data y or n n To transfer trouble ticket data or to skip trouble ticket data transfer TYPE yorn PRESS Enter The following message appears Do you wish to migrate results queue y or n n To transfer the results queue or to skip results queue transfer TYPE yorn PRESS Enter The following message appears Please insert tape labeled R2 Database Backup for Migration Enter c to continue or q to quit Insert the backup data cartridge tape into the Release 4 2 6800 NMS host computer Then TYPE c PRESS Enter As the migration process proceeds the system displays status messages at various stages reporting the progress of the migration to that point You will now be queried for 741 multiplexer node numbers as follows Please provide the node numbers for all 741 multiplexers Please enter a node number or done to end the list List all 741 multiplexer node numbers supported by the NMS and PRESS Enter after each one When the list is complete or if there are none TYPE done PRESS Enter The following message appears Now rebuild the NMS database indices 7 22 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performi
322. tal bracket to the chassis 8 When you have installed all circuit cards you must run the EISA Configuration Utility See the section EJSA Configuration Utility for instructions 2 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors Installing the Octopus Cable Assembly Every host system contains an Emulex DCP MUXi card If the 16 Control Channel Package is installed two Emulex DCP MUXi cards are present An external octopus cable assembly must be attached to the card at the customer site Attach the 50 pin connector of the octopus cable to the connector on the back of the DCP MUXi card and lock into place Figure 2 10 shows the DCP MUXi and the octopus cable assembly 80 Pin Connector Octopus Cable 25 Pin Connector 493 11589 Figure 2 10 Emulex DCP MUCi Circuit Card and Cable Assembly 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 17 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Connecting the Ethernet Card to the Network The Integral Ethernet card used on most NMS processors requires additional equipment before it can be connected to the Local Area Network LAN Connect an Allied Telesis 210T transceiver to the Ethernet card s AUI connector using a 15 pin Ethernet extender Connect the transceiver to the LAN s network hub unit Converting Host Processor R3 x to R4 2 The Altos 5000 processor used as a host with 6800 Release 3 x can be migrated as a host under Release 4 2 by performing t
323. tc rc2 file route add default port_name 1 Where port_name is the name of the router port The command change in Step 3 takes effect when the host or UIP is rebooted If you want it to take effect immediately TYPE route add default port_name 1 Where port_name is the name of the router port PRESS Enter On the full feature workstation edit the VX ONEVHOSTS file and add the IP address and name of both the router port to which the full feature workstation is connected and the router port to which the NMS host or UIP is connected in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn port_name Where nnn is a number from to 255 inclusive port_name is the name of the router port On the full feature workstation edit the VXVONEVTCP CFG file and set up the default route for the remote port to which the full feature workstation is connected and the local port to which the NMS host or UIP is connected Add the following lines name remote_port_name gateway 1 name local_port_name gateway 2 Where remote_port_name is the name of the router port to which the full feature workstation is connected local_port_name is the name of router port to which the NMS host or UIP is connected Be sure that there is a space both before and after the semicolon 5 84 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Installing Full Feature Workstation Software on a Sun Workstation The full feature workstation software is insta
324. tegrity of the migrated data should be verified The following procedures may be executed for that purpose To verify the integrity of the migrated data perform the following steps 1 Bring up the System Management window and execute the Create Network Map crnm command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for details on all commands Following completion of the Create Network Map crnm command bring up the network map window and inspect the network map visually NOTE Circuit names and device addresses are not displayed on the Release 4 2 network map Device names and site names are displayed 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Execute the Display Device Profile dsdp command to verify profiles for three devices Verify the accuracy of the information Execute the Display Site Profile dssp command to examine profiles for three sites Verify the accuracy of the information Execute the Display Facility Profile dsfp command to examine facility profiles associated with three devices If the ACCULINK Network Manager ANM is installed execute the List Facility Profile sfp command selecting T1 for the facility type and m2 for Device s Compare the screen results with a hard copy output from the List Node Connectivity Isnc command on the source system If ANM is installed
325. terface to display on the generic X terminal the fonts are distributed in BDF format They must be converted to the SNF format Each X server package must have a program to accomplish that conversion in order to complete the installation process An example for an MS DOS based machine follows 1 Insert the floppy disk containing the BDF font files in the disk drive TYPE COPY A font C FONTS PRESS Enter 2 When the files are completely copied TYPE cdC FONTS PRESS Enter TYPE BDFTOSNF PRESS Enter 3 The system translates the font files into a format ready for use by the NMS application software Remove the font file floppy from the disk drive Basic Feature Workstation Software The basic feature workstation application software runs on an Altos 486DX 33 an Altos SX 20 or an approved AT amp T workstation for a complete list see Chapter 1 The Network Management Workstation NMW software package executes under the Microsoft Windows operating environment Release 3 0 running in Real Mode You will need to install the following software programs on the basic feature workstation e MS DOS Release 5 0 e Microsoft Windows Release 3 0 e NMW Software The following sections provide the installation instructions for each of these three software programs 5 86 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Installing MS DOS A full feature workstation requires the MS DOS operating system
326. th your selections Press ENTER to continue ESCAPE to change selections 5 80 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software 20 21 22 23 24 If they are not correct press Esc the system requests entry again starting with Step 12 If the values entered are correct PRESS Enter The system displays statements for the CONFIG SYS file The statements appear as follows device C PROTEON proarb sys device C PROTEON prol6eul sys B 0a20 I 5 D 5 S nn The above file C PROTEON CONFIG LSP has been created for your convenience and future reference It contains the necessary config sys statements to run the LSP software Press ENTER to continue ESCAPE to change previous selections Where nn is the selected transmission speed 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps To accept them PRESS Enter The system prompts Select action of LSP statements Add to your config sys No action Replace your config sys Use the JT keys to select Add to your config sys and PRESS Enter The system displays the following confirmation LSP Software Setup Completed Press ENTER to continue PRESS Enter The Installation Function Selection Menu appears as in Step 4 To exit the install procedure TYPE x The system prompts Are you sure you want to exit the Installation Program TYPE y The DOS prompt appears Insert the floppy disk labeled Token Ring FFW Application in the floppy disk drive an
327. the 6800 NMS Applications software package and used to configure the System 5000 and System 15000 so that their resources match the requirements of the circuit cards you installed The ECU is shipped on a floppy disk with separate disks for the System 5000 host System 15000 host and UIP To ensure that these cards function properly you must run this program as soon as you have finished installing the cards in either the host or the UIP To run the ECU you must connect the display unit keyboard and mouse For instructions turn to the section entitled System Console NOTE in Chapter 4 Connecting the Components The EISA Configuration Disk contains the ECU program and configuration files These configuration files describe all the circuit cards that could be installed on the Altos System 5000 or System 15000 Table 2 8 shows the names of the configuration files depending on the type of processor you have and the type of network connected to the processor Table 2 8 Configuration Files Diskette Title Processor Network Type File Name 6800 NMS ECU System 5000 Host Ethernet 68005E SCI System 5000 Host Token Ring 68005T SCI 6800 UIP ECU System 5000 UIP Ethernet 68005EU SCI System 5000 UIP Token Ring 68005TU SCI 6800 NMS ECU 15000 System 15000 Ethernet 680015 SCl NOTE The configuration files supporting the Token Ring network contain parameters for a network operating at 16 Mbps over
328. theses after Option 3 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition 2 Initialize NMS Database 3 Include Migration Data r3 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices cont To Continue quit To abort If you wish to modify the NMS parameters Enter number 1 2 3 4 cont or quit 493 13960b Figure 7 6 Original Menu Showing Selected Type r3 12 To rebuild the NMS database indices TYPE 4 PRESS Enter 13 To continue TYPE y PRESS Enter 14 To continue TYPE c PRESS Enter The following message appears xxxx Data Base Initialization xxxx followed by several console messages indicating the initialization of the INFORMIX OnLine Once completed the following message appears xxxx Data Base Initialization Completed xxxx XXXXXXXXXXXXXxxxStarting Database migrationxxxxxxxxxxxx The database restore consists of files directories used with the INFORMIX database and the INFORMIX database itself To perform a database restore the NMS system must not be running Checking NMS system please wait Please insert tape labeled Database Files Directories Backup Type c to continue or q to quit and then press Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 7 29 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 15 Insert the proper tape in the cartridge drive and TYPE c PRESS Enter The following messages appear Checking files directories please wait Removing old files direc
329. ting CC teseS 5 22 s M6BC M4BB connections ee OE EE 52 Feature 3 lt gt 3 6821 F1 519 4 lt J 6821 F1 518 5 lt 6 lt 8 lt gt 9 20 lt i gt 20 T 45s gt 7 Part 9 pin DB9 female to Connects remote basicfeature 25 pin 9 pin 035 0149 2531 25 pin male Sub D workstation to its DCE o TEEN gt 3 serial cable for serial cable interface e des aw Basel ae gt 2 SX EL OES gt 7 Feature 5 lt gt 8 6821 F 1 507 66 gt 6 Ci aa ea gt 5 8 lt gt 1 20 lt gt 4 22 lt gt 9 Part 25 pin male Sub D to Connects an 839A DBU 25 pin 25 pin 035 0151 0031 25 pin male Sub D null control unit to a remote DCE es2 eS ees gt 1 M8W modem cable Connects a local alert log Oe oo gt 3 Feature printer to a serial port cee hea ot a 52 6821 F1 510 4 lt gt 8 6821 B1 133 esse sS5s5 gt 7 6821 B1 135 8 lt gt 4 17 lt gt 24 24 lt gt 17 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 B 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Table B 1 8 of 10 Adapter and Cable Identification Part Number Feature Number Description Usage Pin Diagram Part 8 pin to 8 pin modular System Controller Local 8 pin 8 pin 035 0152 0031 cable and remote System Controller 1 lt gt 8 8 position modular connection to 6800 Connects 9 _______ 7 cable local SC to an 002
330. tion connect a VT100 terminal to Channel 0 and power up If the banner displays ACCULINK 3 K or higher the NETWORKER can support all three ports If the banner displays an earlier version number the 719 networker cannot support the command port In this case a 74x multiplexer must be used with the 719 Networker Connecting an External Systems Port To connect the 719 NETWORKER you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 33 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System To connect a 719 NETWORKER to the host processor perform the following steps 1 Connect the 035 0153 0031 cable to the IPC 1600 port that is configured as the external systems port 2 Connect the 002 0021 0031 connector to the 035 0153 0031 cable 3 Connect the 002 0021 0031 connector to any unused data channel port on the 719 NETWORKER Connecting an Event or Command Port To connect an event port or command port on the 719 NETWORKER to the host processor you will need the following materials e Two 035 0153 0031 cables e Two 002 0021 0031 connectors To establish the connection perform the following steps 1 Connect 035 0153 0031 to the IPC 1600 port that is configured as the event or command port 2 Connect 002 0021 0031 to 035 0153 0031 3 Connect the 002 0021 0031 to an unused data channel port on the 719 NETWORKER Connecting the Earlier Version 719 NETWOR
331. tiplexer support First load the NMS UIP Application and then follow the installation instructions in the respective software abstracts to load these two PTFs Full Feature Workstation Software This software is loaded at the time of manufacture for workstations supplied by Paradyne You will need to load this software into any system i e a Release 2 host you are converting into a full feature workstation The NMS supports three types of workstations Sun 386 486 processors or any generic X terminal which can run the X11 R4 windowing software You also need to reload the full feature workstation software to recover from a hard disk failure or when upgrading software such as changing X DOS software to X One software Basic Feature Workstation Software This software is loaded at the time of manufacture You may need to reload it to recover from a hard disk failure or when upgrading software 5 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software Order of Installation The order of software package installation is important The typical NMS installation is an upgrade from a pre existing 6800 Series NMS To properly install the NMS on the host processor for a site already running a previous release of the NMS follow the order of general steps defined below 1 Backup the existing database 2 Load the seven volume set of 6800 NMS Application software Release 4 2 3 Load the PTF base software Release 4 2 1 4 O
332. to Release 4 2 format TYPE 3 PRESS Enter to select Include Migration Data The following message appears Do you wish to include migration data from a previous NMS y n n To proceed TYPE y PRESS Enter The following message appears Enter the previous NMS type sc r1 r2 r3 r3 1 r4 r4 1 Enter the appropriate type TYPE 12 PRESS Enter 7 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration The original menu Figure 7 4 appears with the selected type in parentheses after Option 3 AT amp T Paradyne NMS Parameters 1 Initialize ONLINE Partition 2 Initialize NMS Database 3 Include Migration Data r2 4 Rebuild NMS Database Indices cont To Continue quit To abort If you wish to modify the NMS parameters Enter number 1 2 3 4 cont or quit 492 13963 Figure 7 4 Original Menu Showing Selected Type r2 11 To rebuild the NMS database indices TYPE 4 PRESS Enter 12 To continue TYPE y PRESS Enter 13 To continue TYPE c PRESS Enter The following message appears xxxx Data Base Initialization xxxx followed by several console messages indicating the initialization of the INFORMIX OnLine Once completed the following message appears xxxx Data Base Initialization Completed xxxx The database migration consists of files directories used with the INFORMIX database and the INFORMIX database itself followed by this query Do you wish to migrate faults da
333. to the original Customer Test main menu Use the J key to highlight Exit The Program A window displays the message Want to QUIT Remove the Customer Test disk and select Yes 2 56 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors 16 The system will automatically reboot The 6386 25 is now ready for full feature workstation software installation 17 Load the MS DOS operating system and the workstation software as detailed in Chapter 5 Loading and Restoring Software Full Feature Workstation Any 6386 based AT amp T computer or the Altos 386 SX 20 that was previously used as a full feature workstation in Release 1 2 3 x or 4 x can be used as a full feature workstation for Release 4 2 NOTE A 6286 AT amp T computer cannot be converted to a full feature workstation for Release 4 2 To migrate a Release 1 2 3 x or 4 x full feature workstation to run under NMS Release 4 2 perform the following steps 1 Ifthe full feature workstation is running PRESS Ctrl break This brings you to DOS 2 Power off the full feature workstation and remove the processor cover 3 If the processor already has a video card connected to the processor bus you must remove it first Then install the Paradise Windows Accelerator video card 4 Ifyou do not have a StarLAN NAU card with Link Integrity which you will use for connecting to the 10BaseT network you must either replace that card with a StarLAN card
334. tories please wait Restoring files directories please wait Restore of files directories completed Please remove tape and insert the tape containing the INFORMIX database backup Remove the tape labeled Database Files Directories Backup and insert the INFORMIX database backup tape in the cartridge drive The system prompts Press Return to continue PRESS Return Select the following options under the INFORMIX menu e Archive e Restore The system will ask a series of questions respond accordingly The system will prompt Do you have another level of tapes to restore y n TYPE n PRESS Enter The system will prompt Is there a logical log tape to restore y n TYPE n PRESS Enter When the base INFORMIX menu appears select Exit Now rebuild the NMS database indices When the pound sign prompt appears TYPE exit PRESS Enter to return to the Console Login prompt 7 30 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration 19 At the Console Login prompt TYPE nms PRESS Enter TYPE The nms password the default is startmenu PRESS Enter The Release 4 2 6800 NMS Main Menu appears 20 To continue TYPE 1 PRESS Enter to select Start the System The following message appears Starting the AT amp T Paradyne NMS system Please wait The system performs database error checking and then starts the NMS When the start up is complete the following message appears
335. toring Software NOTE For the 15000 platform the division of full feature workstations among the three processors should be Host Uip 1 Ujip 2 7 3 14 Configurations with lower numbers of full feature workstations should retain equivalent ratios among the processors for best performance 5 Ifthe workstation is connected to a UIP and while still in the XONE directory TYPE copy UIP CFG XONE CFG PRESS Enter TYPE edit XONE CFG PRESS Enter The DOS editor displays the XONE CFG file You should look for the line which starts with CONN_COMMAND and change WSNAME to the name of the workstation Look for the line beginning with CONN_HOST and change NMSUIP to the name of the UIP machine 6 Ifthe workstation is connected to an NMS host and while still in the XONE directory TYPE copy HOST CFG XONE CFG PRESS Enter TYPE edit XONE CFG PRESS Enter The DOS editor displays the XONE CFG file You should look for the line which starts with CONN_COMMAND and change WSNAME to the name of the workstation Look for the line beginning with CONN_HOST and change NMSHOST to the name of the host machine 7 Reboot the processor to ensure that all changed parameters are properly loaded 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 69 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installing GrafPoint X One Software Package with a StarLAN 10 NAU To install the GrafPoint X One Server when a StarLAN NAU card will be used perform th
336. try codes or the latitude and longitude fields in the device profile and specifying a site name Device site and facility profiles may be edited to add or modify any other information After modifying site or connectivity information execute the Create Network Map crnm command When this completes update the network map display by closing and recreating the network map window Release 2 Database Migration When a customer migrates from a Release 2 6820 NMS to a Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS all device profiles site profiles facility profiles vendor profiles historical alerts trouble tickets user profiles and user groups filter values and channel group tables are transferred Databases Migrated NOTE The customer should perform the cleanup procedure prior to Paradyne upgrading to the Altos 5000 host hardware It is the customer s responsibility to verify the accuracy of the database prior to the migration The following databases will be migrated Device Profiles Vendor Profiles Site Profiles Facility Profiles User Profiles System Configuration Data External System Configuration Data Workstation Data Filter Values Alert Monitoring States Alert Colors and Alert Group Attributes 7 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Performing Migration e ATR Phone Directories e Historic Alerts e Network Summary Categories and Labels e Trouble Tickets e Port Configuration NOTE Us
337. uld be set UP U Disable or DOWN D Enable as indicated in Table A 1 07 and 051 are software configuration options discussed in the next section Table A 1 Modem Hardware and Configuration Option Switch Settings Modem Used For sit s1 2 s1 3 T s1 7 51 8 07 051 058 ATR NMS end D D U DUD D D y y Remote end U D D DUD U D y y Remote terminal D D D DUD D D n y Remote Terminal NMS end U D U DUD U D y y Remote end D D D DUD D D n y Cut through SC DBU NMS end D D D DUD D D n y Remote end U D D DUD U D y y Cut through NMS end specific for DCX D D D DUD D D n y n Remote end D D D DUD D D y n y Remote System Printer Both ends D D D DUD U D y y A 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Modem Settings NOTE The factory default setting for all switches is down After option switches are set the reset switch also located behind the cover must be pressed The significant switch settings are as follows S1 1 D CTS and CD follow DTR U CTS and CD follow EIA RS 232 C standard S1 2 D Option changes enabled U Option changes disabled S1 3 D Enter command mode with carriage return U Enter commands with at or atz sequence S1 4 5 amp 6 Control speed and mode The setting DUD for these three switches is 2400 bps asynchronous operation See the documentation packed with the modem for other values S1 7 D Modem interprets commands
338. ule and the ribbon cables are keyed for proper alignment Be sure the retaining clips are properly secured when connecting the ribbon cables to the fanout module Connect the ribbon cable nearest the front of the wire frame assembly to the fanout module connector for Ports 9 through 16 Next connect the other ribbon cable for Ports 1 through 8 The fanfold module snaps into the wire frame assembly from the front of the assembly see Figure 2 13 Put the slot on the left side of the fanout module over the wire tab on the left side of the wire frame assembly Next slide the right side of the fanfold module into the wire frame assembly until the two slots on the right of the module engage with the wire tabs 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 29 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Altos System 15000 The Altos System 15000 is based on the EISA bus featuring two Intel i80486 processors running at a clock speed of 50 Mhz The following section describes the hardware and circuit cards that Hardware may be installed in the System 15000 The System 15000 is shipped to the customer with the processor three memory modules two hard disks one CPU two Emulex DCP MUX lt i cards and one IPC 1600 card Circuit Cards Table 2 5 indicates the location of the standard and optional circuit cards installed in the System 15000 Preinstallation checks for the Ethernet card are the same for the System 15000 as for the Syste
339. ull feature workstations among the three processors should be Host Uip 1 Ujip 2 7 3 14 Configurations with lower numbers of full feature workstations should retain equivalent ratios among the processors for best performance Configuring Full Feature Workstation with a Router Network Full feature workstations can be configured and used over a LAN using routers To configure full feature workstations on such a LAN you need the following information IP address of the router port connected to the host or UIP and a name for that port IP address of the router port connected to the full feature workstation and a name for that port IP address of the full feature workstation and a name for the full feature workstation The names for the router ports and the full feature workstation can be arbitrarily determined but must be unique within the NMS Once you have the information above perform the following steps Log on as root on the host or UIP whichever is to connect to the full feature workstation 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 83 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Using the vi editor add the IP address and the name of the router port connected to the host or UIP to the etc hosts file in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn port_name Where nnn is a number from 1 to 255 inclusive port_name is the name of the router port Using the vi editor add the following line at the bottom of the e
340. unshielded twisted pair UTP wires If your Token Ring network has different characteristics you need to follow the procedures in the section Changing the Token Ring Configuration to configure the network properly 2 46 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors The EISA Configuration Disk is a bootable disk To run the program you will need to boot the processor with this disk To do this perform the following steps 1 Insert the EISA Configuration Disk into the floppy disk drive Turn the power switch to the ON position If the RESET RUN switch is not in the RUN position turn the key clockwise until it is in the RUN position The system begins to boot If you are running the ECU on a System 15000 go to Step 3 The system briefly displays the following message Press spacebar to interrupt autoboot NOTE You have approximately 10 seconds to press the spacebar to interrupt the autoboot sequence and allow booting from the floppy disk Failure to do this within the 10 second window allows the system to start up from the hard disk and requires a reboot 2 Immediately press the spacebar The boot menu appears as shown in Figure 2 24 TYPE 2 to select boot from floppy Select to boot from hard disk Select to boot from floppy Select to boot from tape Select to enter BIOS setup Enter option 491 13836 Figure 2 24 Boot Menu 3 Press any key to dismiss the EISA logo and d
341. up to five other ANALYSIS Network Management Systems You can connect the ANALYSIS NMS either locally or remotely The following sections explain NOTE The port configuration on the ANALYSIS NMS must also be defined This is done on the ANALYSIS NMS and is not discussed in this document For more information see the ANALYSIS 6510 Automated Network Management System Reference Manual The ANALYSIS software must be Version 6 1 In addition the NMS software must be activated and the ANALYSIS NMS must be configured into the system Instructions for both these tasks can be found in Chapter 5 Loading and Restoring Software Connecting Locally To connect a local ANALYSIS NMS to the host processor you will need the following materials e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0040 0031 connector for ANALYSIS 6510 5605 e A 002 0053 0031 connector for ANALYSIS 5600 Figure 4 25 illustrates a local connection for both the ANALYSIS 6510 5605 and ANALYSIS 5600 NMS The following sections explain how to connect both systems locally 4 50 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Host Processor 035 0153 0031 ANALYSIS 6510 5605 035 0153 0031 PoR ANALYSIS 5600 IPC 900 Card HL 002 0040 0031 Connector L 002 0053 0031 Connector 492 13917 01 Figure 4 25 ANALYSIS 6510 5605 AND 5600 Local Connection Connecting the ANALYSIS 6510 5605 To connect a local ANALYSIS 6510 5605 to the hos
342. ure C 3 shows the location of these connections on the 745 multiplexer c Check the power supply monitor and control connections Refer to Figure C 1 C 2 or C 3 for the connections appropriate to your multiplexer d Check the 4336 power supply monitor and control connections Refer to Figure C 4 or C 5 If one of these power supplies has failed the light on the front of the 4336 power supply may be flashing Om ood e Power Distribution Connection Power Monitor and Control Connection 490 11631 Figure C 1 Power Connections for 740 Multiplexers without Expansion Shelf 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 C 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Power Distribution Connection power connections Power Distribution Connection power connections Bus Expansion Monitor and Control Connection Po
343. using the EISA Configuration Utility Optional Host Upgrade Procedures Once you have obtained the appropriate field upgrade package and configured the cards you are ready to install the circuit cards in the host processor The following sections explain how to do this Installing the Third Hard Drive in the System 5000 To physically install the third hard disk drive in the System 5000 chassis refer to Figure 2 8 perform the following steps 1 2 Attach the 3 5 mounting brackets to the side of the disk drive Slide the drive into the chassis and attach the 50 pin SCSI bus cable using the next connector available on the cable Attach the 5 pin power connector to the disk drive Insert the screws through the mounting bracket into the front of the chassis Secure the drive in the chassis 2 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Preparing the Processors lt Cartridge Tape Drive O a0 O Q lt Floppy Disk Drive O O 3rd Hard Drive o oD aS IX Nn O q oOo ees 494 14506 Figure 2 8 Altos 5000 Disk Bay Installing Circuit Cards in the System 5000 The System 5000 contains eight EISA expansion slots Figure 2
344. ven full feature workstations are required you must cascade multiple hub units Figure 4 9 shows what one network hub unit looks like with two cascaded hubs connected to it Four hub units are required to support 24 full feature workstations 4 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Host Processor ECA Altos 15000 Full Feature Workstation Full Feature Workstation Full Feature Workstation Full Feature Workstation EtherLink II Card EtherLink II Card E EtherLink II Card Network Hub Unit 035 0116 5031 Modified Cable 035 0116 5031 Network Hub Unit User Interface Processor 1 Ethernet Card Altos 5000 User Interface Processor 2 035 0116 5031 035 0116 5031 L EtherLink II Card Full Feature Workstation 035 0116 5031 E EtherLink II Card Console Full Feature Workstation Console Full Feature Ethernet Workstation cl Altos 5000 Full Feature Workstation EtherLink II Card Full Feature Workstation EtherLink II Card Full Feature Workstation EtherLink II Card Full Feature m Workstation EtherLink II Card Full Feature Workstation EtherLink II Card Full Feature Workstation Figure 4 9 Altos 15000 Cascaded Network Hub Units Card EtherLink II 494 14584 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series N
345. wer Monitor and Control Connection 490 11632 Figure C 2 Power Connections for 740 Multiplexers with Expansion Shelf C 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Maintaining Multiplexers Power Distribution Connection power connections Figure C 3 Power Connections for 745 Multiplexers P11 hoes Power Monitor and Control Connection 490 11633 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 C 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Optional Shelf Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4AZ2ruzcumna 4AZ2r0zcuman ORWR ORUA NAOUR OROA Power Supply for Shelf Slots 1 8 common modules Redundant Power Supply 491 11634 01 Figure C 4 4336 Power Supply for 740 Multiplexers C 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Maintaining Multiplexers Optional Shelf Slots 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 AZrouzcuomya 4AZ2 gt ru0uzcumyn Power Supply for Shelf Slots 1 8 common modules Redundant Power Supply 491 11635 01 Figure C 5 4336 Power Supply Connection for 745 Multiplexers 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 C 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Netwo
346. will need to connect a User Interface Processor UIP to the network hub unit The display unit and keyboard on the UIP will serve as both UIP console and full feature workstation Stage 3 Connect the Fourth Fifth and Sixth Full Feature Workstations The UIP that serves as the third full feature workstation will also support the fourth fifth and sixth full feature workstations if they are added These workstations are connected to the network hub and are supported by the UIP 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 4 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Connecting the Second Full Feature Workstation To connect the second full feature workstation you will have to set up a TCP IP Ethernet network Figure 4 3 shows what this network will look like with the second full feature workstation connected Host Processor Network Hub Unit Ethernet Card 035 0116 5031 035 0116 5031 EtherLink II Card Full Feature Workstation Console Full Feature Workstation Cable 035 0116 5031 is 50 in length Other lengths available 035 0116 2531 25 035 0116 9031 100 035 0116 9931 200 Sena Figure 4 3 Local Area Network with Second Full Feature Workstation The Ethernet circuit card must be activated in the host processor see Chapter 2 Preparing the Processors to support the second full feature workstation To complete the network installation you will need the following equipment
347. wo DCE devices with the following characteristics Asynchronous Full duplex Flow control ON Bit rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 bps e 835 3564 2511 cable To establish the connection perform the following steps at the host processor end 1 Connect the grounded end of a 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor 2 Connect the other end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to the 002 0039 0031 connector 3 Connect the 002 0039 0031 connector to the local DCE device Perform the following steps at the remote end 1 Connect one end of the 835 3564 2511 cable to the serial port on the NetView PC 2 Connect the other end of the 835 3564 2511 cable to the remote DCE devices 4 44 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Connecting the Components Automatic Trouble Report Feature The Automatic Trouble Report ATR feature provides a remote printer at the Paradyne technical assistance center to print user defined alert reports The customer is responsible for connecting a 2224CEO or 3810 modem to the ATR port The diagram in Figure 4 22 illustrates the ATR connection To connect the ATR to the host processor you will need the following items e 2224CEO or 3810 dial modem e 035 0153 0031 cable e 002 0039 0031 connector Perform the following steps 1 Connect the grounded end of the 035 0153 0031 cable to an available port on the IPC 1600 card in the host processor 2 Connect the
348. x explains how to identify and resolve communications problems between the NMS and the multiplexers it monitors Communications between the NMS and the multiplexers takes place via the following three ports on the host processor e Command Port The command port handles two way communication Some of its activities include transporting commands to the nodes and permitting polling e Event Port The event port handles one way communication This port receives events from the multiplexers e External Systems Port This port is dedicated to the multiplexer external systems cut through interface This appendix begins with a discussion of some general hardware troubleshooting procedures that you should follow It then provides procedures for detecting and solving specific problems associated with each of the three ports General Troubleshooting Procedures Whenever a communications problem occurs you should use the following general procedure 1 Check the hardware connections 2 Check the multiplexer for problems 3 Check the host processor and IPC 1600 card for problems see Chapter 8 Running Diagnostics for detailed instructions 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 C 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Systems Always begin troubleshooting by checking the hardware connections Make a visual inspection of the hardware connections to ensure that e The host processor power supply is plugged in and the ac outlet is on e
349. y and tape and PRESS Enter Several status messages appear followed by the menu in Figure 5 7 This is a completely automated installation procedure The following options are available 1 Install the Operating System 2 Exit the Installation Please enter your choice 1 2 492 13955 Figure 5 7 Installation Procedure Menu Installing UNIX on UIP 5 To proceed TYPE 1 PRESS Enter 5 42 January 1997 6800 A2 GN22 30 Loading and Restoring Software The menu in Figure 5 8 appears Please specify Hardware Configuration 1 Hardware configuration I Single hard disk UIP 2 Hardware configuration II Two hard disks NMS HOST 3 Exit Installation Please enter your choice 1 3 492 13956 Figure 5 8 Hardware Configuration Menu Installing UNIX on UIP 6 For the UIP TYPE 1 PRESS Enter In response the system sets the operating system environment configures the hard disk creates a UNIX partition and divides the partition into file systems and swap space When this is complete the following message appears Altos UNIX System V Operating System Serialization When prompted use the serial number and activation key included with the Altos System V Operating System distribution Enter your serial number or enter q to quit TYPE the UNIX serial number found on the Serial Number card attached to the Release Notes PRESS Enter 7 The following message appears Enter your activation k
350. ymptoms The movement of any windows appears to be jittery or choppy when dragged by the mouse When running NMS R3 1 at initial start up the screen comes up but the keyboard is locked and unusable The 486DX cache may be switched off using the BIOS Setup Utility which is resident in the workstation s processor firmware Starting with the 486DX powered off perform the following steps 1 2 Power on the workstation s processor and immediately press Ctrl Alt Esc The BIOS Setup Utility window menu will appear Using the LT keys select System Configuration Setup and PRESS Enter Page 1 of the Utility will appear to get to Page 2 PRESS Page Down Page 2 will appear Using the J key move the cursor until it reaches the line labeled System Cache Using will cause the field value to toggle between on and off Set the value to off PRESS Esc A confirmation box will appear To save the CMOS data PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 2 53 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 6 The Main BIOS Setup Utility menu will appear PRESS Esc 7 The system will automatically reboot Follow the standard procedures for starting up a full feature workstation Migrating Host Processor Release 1 or 2 to Full Feature Workstation The AT amp T 6386 25 used as the 6820 Release 1 and Release 2 host processor can be converted to a full feature workstation in Release 4 2 NMS The conversio
351. ype plug by modifying the plug or using an adaptor Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a three wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel General purpose cables are provided with this product Special cables which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility of the customer When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance A r
352. ystem prompts Please verify settings Transport Interface IP Address Subnet mask Hosts file path Are these settings correct y n q y PRESS Enter If the settings are not correct TYPE n PRESS Enter The system returns to Step 20 If the settings are OK PRESS Enter The system responds Xsetup will need to copy the network driver tcpnet exe from the XOne diskette to the C XONE directory Insert the disk labeled Install in drive A Press ENTER to continue or q to Quit Insert the diskette labeled Install and PRESS Enter The system displays various messages including file extracted from archive Press any Key to continue Xsetup will need to copy some additional files to go with your network files 6800 A2 GN22 30 January 1997 5 75 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Press any Key to continue PRESS Enter The system displays various messages including 5 files extracted Press any Key to continue PRESS Enter The following message appears X One install complete Press any Key to continue PRESS Enter Installing the NMS Full Feature Workstation Application Software with StarLAN 10 NAU A special program is provided to help you install the full feature workstation application software on your Altos 486DX 33 Altos SX 20 or a 386 based processor To install the software when you are using the StarLAN 10 NAU perform the following steps 1

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

6800 A2 GN22 30 g2r-2-sn ac200/ 220

6800-A2-GN22-30

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents